WO2011068005A1 - Emergency medicine support device, doctor availability-status management-use terminal, emergency medicine support method and program - Google Patents

Emergency medicine support device, doctor availability-status management-use terminal, emergency medicine support method and program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011068005A1
WO2011068005A1 PCT/JP2010/069470 JP2010069470W WO2011068005A1 WO 2011068005 A1 WO2011068005 A1 WO 2011068005A1 JP 2010069470 W JP2010069470 W JP 2010069470W WO 2011068005 A1 WO2011068005 A1 WO 2011068005A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
doctor
identifier
emergency
patient
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2010/069470
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
晃敏 吉田
一知 郷
智 藤田
Original Assignee
国立大学法人旭川医科大学
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 国立大学法人旭川医科大学 filed Critical 国立大学法人旭川医科大学
Publication of WO2011068005A1 publication Critical patent/WO2011068005A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q10/00—Administration; Management
    • G06Q10/10—Office automation; Time management
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H40/00—ICT specially adapted for the management or administration of healthcare resources or facilities; ICT specially adapted for the management or operation of medical equipment or devices
    • G16H40/20—ICT specially adapted for the management or administration of healthcare resources or facilities; ICT specially adapted for the management or operation of medical equipment or devices for the management or administration of healthcare resources or facilities, e.g. managing hospital staff or surgery rooms

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a device that supports emergency medical care, and more particularly to a device that supports the determination of the delivery destination of an emergency patient.
  • medical facilities regularly send current medical facility information to the fire station terminal in the fire station in charge through the communication center, communication satellite, and emergency command center, and the fire station reports emergency cases.
  • the ambulance Upon receiving the ambulance, the ambulance receives radio communication from the ambulance and uses the fire department terminal to collate the patient's symptom information with the medical facility information for the medical facility that can best respond to the emergency case.
  • the communication to the selected medical facility and the transmission of symptom information are performed via a dedicated Internet network (for example, see Patent Document 1).
  • one of a plurality of hospitals distributes patient information transmitted from an information processing apparatus included in an ambulance to information processing apparatuses of other hospitals, and processes information of the plurality of hospitals.
  • Each device receives the information transmitted from the other device, transmits it to the information processing device of the other hospital, the information processing device provided in the ambulance, and the receiving destination inquiry information transmitted from the information processing device provided in the ambulance Based on a comparison between the hospital information management server and the acceptance determination information held by the hospital information management server, identification information of medical facilities that can be accepted by a patient is determined (for example, see Patent Document 2).
  • JP 2002-251474 A (first page, FIG. 1 etc.) JP-A-2006-276922 (first page, FIG. 1 etc.)
  • the conventional emergency medical support device has a problem that it is difficult to appropriately determine whether or not an emergency patient can be accepted.
  • the current medical facility information has to be manually input and created on the hospital side, so it is difficult to always collect and input the latest information. For this reason, it has been difficult to determine acceptance using the latest information.
  • the emergency medical support device of the present invention is information related to hospital facilities, a hospital facility information storage unit that can store hospital facility information having at least the number of beds in a room that accepts emergency cases, and the number of patients in a room that accepts emergency cases.
  • Static information storage such as a doctor who can store static information such as a doctor having a patient information reception unit that receives and includes at least temporarily a patient information and a doctor identifier group having one or more doctor identifiers for identifying a doctor
  • Receiving dynamic information such as a doctor including one or more doctor identifiers from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors in a region where a medical practice is performed for an emergency patient, including a room and a room for receiving an emergency patient,
  • a dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor that accumulates at least temporarily, an acceptance request receiving unit that receives an acceptance request, which is information indicating a request for accepting an emergency patient, from an external device, and a hospital When the reception request is received by the bed determination unit that determines
  • the doctor identifier of the doctor in the medical practice area can be accurately obtained without imposing a heavy burden on the doctor. Since it can be acquired, it can be prevented from interfering with medical practice.
  • the patient information receiving unit receives information indicating that the patient is at least a patient from one or more wireless communication devices attached to one or more patients.
  • the hospital facility information storage unit stores at least one set of a hospital identifier for identifying a hospital and hospital facility information, and receives patient information.
  • the department accepts one or more pairs of hospital identifiers and patient information and accumulates at least temporarily, and the static information storage unit such as doctors stores one or more pairs of hospital identifiers and static information such as doctors.
  • the bed determination unit when the reception request reception unit receives the reception request, acquires the hospital identifier of the hospital where the bed is vacant using the hospital facility information and the patient information, and the medical team determination unit
  • the acceptance request receiving unit uses the static information such as doctors and the dynamic information such as doctors to obtain the hospital identifier of the hospital where there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases and Transmitter determines bed
  • an emergency medical support device that transmits one or more of the hospital identifier medical team determination unit has both get to an external device.
  • the acceptance request includes a fault site identifier that identifies a site of a fault of the emergency patient, and the static information such as a doctor is one or more that identifies the doctor.
  • the medical team determination unit has a doctor identifier group having a doctor identifier and one or more medical action identifiers for identifying a medical action that can be performed by a medical team including one or more doctors identified by the doctor identifier group.
  • the doctor or the like can dynamically respond to the emergency using the medical action identifier included in the static information such as the doctor and the disorder part identifier included in the acceptance request.
  • the information is used to determine whether there is currently a medical team that can respond to an emergency or to a medical team that is capable of responding to an emergency and is currently capable of responding to an emergency. There is the presence emergency medical support apparatus for acquiring a hospital identifier of hospitals.
  • the dynamic information such as a doctor has at least one set of a doctor identifier and position information indicating a position where the doctor is located.
  • the medical information receiving unit accumulates dynamic history information such as a doctor, which is a plurality of pieces of information in which dynamic information such as a doctor is associated with time information indicating time, at least temporarily. Is used to determine whether or not there is a medical team that can respond to an emergency, or is currently an emergency. This is an emergency medical support device that acquires a hospital identifier of a hospital where there is a medical team that can handle this.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor receives dynamic information such as a doctor input using the input unit, and stores at least temporarily It is a medical support device.
  • the emergency medical support device is the emergency medical support device, wherein the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor is a schedule information receiving unit that receives a doctor identifier and schedule information related to a doctor schedule identified by the doctor identifier; And a position information receiving means for receiving the doctor identifier and the position information of the doctor identified by the doctor identifier, the medical team determination unit includes schedule information and position information included in static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor To determine whether there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases, or a medical team that is capable of handling emergency cases and currently has a medical team capable of handling emergency cases This is an emergency medical support device that acquires the hospital identifier.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor can receive a doctor identifier from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors and can or cannot respond.
  • the medical team determination unit receives a request for acceptance when the reception request receiving unit receives an acceptance request.
  • the status identifier of each doctor in the target information is used to determine whether there is a medical team that can respond to an emergency or to obtain the hospital identifier of a hospital that has a medical team that can respond to an emergency Emergency medical support device.
  • the patient information receiving unit in the emergency medical support device includes a patient identifier for identifying a patient and transfer enable / disable information indicating whether transfer to another room is possible. Accepts and accumulates at least temporarily patient information that has more than one set, and the bed determination unit determines whether there is a bed available using the hospital facility information and the number of patients included in the patient information and transferability information Or an emergency medical support device that acquires a hospital identifier of a hospital having a bed available.
  • the emergency medical support device of the present invention further includes a transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit that can store transfer destination candidate facility information that is information related to an empty bed in a patient transfer destination room in the emergency medical support device.
  • the bed determination unit is an emergency medical support device that further determines whether there is a bed available using the transfer destination candidate facility information or acquires a hospital identifier of a hospital with a bed available.
  • a transferable patient can determine whether or not the transfer is actually possible from the availability of the transfer destination bed, and can determine whether or not there is an empty bed.
  • the emergency medical support device of the present invention is the emergency medical support device, wherein the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor receives one or more doctor identifiers and position information from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors.
  • Display control information that accepts dynamic information such as a doctor having one or more sets of information, stores at least temporarily, and displays display control information that is information about a region that displays or does not display a doctor identifier and position information
  • the emergency medical support device further includes a storage unit and a display unit that displays only the doctor identifier in the display area according to the display control information.
  • the doctor status management terminal of the present invention includes a doctor identifier storage unit that can store a doctor identifier, a status information reception unit that receives status information indicating the status of the doctor, and stores at least temporarily, a doctor identifier, and a status
  • a doctor state management terminal including a wireless transmission unit that transmits information by wireless communication means.
  • the doctor identifier and the doctor status information can be transmitted without the doctor performing any particular transmission operation.
  • the doctor state management terminal of the present invention further includes a position information acquisition unit that acquires position information in the doctor state management terminal, and the wireless transmission unit wirelessly transmits the doctor identifier, the state information, and the position information. It is a terminal for doctor state management transmitted by communication means.
  • the receiving emergency medical support device can reduce the process of acquiring the location information.
  • the emergency medical support device and the like it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not an emergency patient can be accepted.
  • Block diagram of emergency medical support system in Embodiment 1 of the present invention The flowchart explaining operation
  • movement of the emergency medical assistance apparatus of the emergency medical assistance system Flow chart explaining operation of acceptance request device of the emergency medical support system
  • the figure which shows the external appearance of the card for doctor state management of the emergency medical assistance system The figure which shows the reception position management table in order to explain the operation of the emergency medical support system
  • movement of the emergency medical assistance system The figure which shows the emergency room management table for explaining the operation of the emergency medical support system
  • the figure which shows patient information for explaining operation of the emergency medical support system The figure which shows the patient information which shows the number of patients for demonstrating operation
  • movement of the emergency medical assistance system The figure which shows the example of a display of the emergency medical assistance system
  • movement of the emergency medical assistance system The figure which shows hospital facility information for explaining operation of the emergency medical support system
  • movement of the emergency medical assistance system The figure which shows schedule information for explaining operation of the emergency medical support system
  • movement of the emergency medical assistance system Block diagram of emergency medical support system in Embodiment 2 of the present invention Flowchart explaining the operation of acceptability determination processing of the emergency medical support device of the emergency medical support system
  • Conceptual diagram of the emergency medical support system The figure which shows an example of dynamic information, such as a doctor, for demonstrating operation
  • movement of the emergency medical assistance system The figure which shows an example of patient information for demonstrating operation
  • movement of the emergency medical assistance system The figure which shows an example of the hospital facility information matched with the hospital identifier for demonstrating operation
  • movement of the emergency medical assistance system The figure which shows the example of a display of an acceptance request apparatus for demonstrating operation
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an emergency medical support system 10 in the present embodiment.
  • the emergency medical support system 10 includes an emergency medical support device 1, one or more wireless communication devices 3, one or more patient wireless communication devices 4, and one or more acceptance request devices 5.
  • an example in which the number of the wireless communication device 3, the patient wireless communication device 4, and the acceptance requesting device 5 is one is shown.
  • the emergency medical support apparatus 1 includes a hospital facility information storage unit 100, a patient information reception unit 101, a transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102, an acceptance request reception unit 103, a bed determination unit 104, a static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor, a doctor An isodynamic information reception unit 106, a display control information storage unit 107, a display unit 108, a medical team determination unit 109, and a response availability transmission unit 110 are provided.
  • the doctor's dynamic information receiving unit 106 includes schedule information receiving means 1061 and position information receiving means 1062.
  • the wireless communication device 3 includes a doctor identifier storage unit 301, a state identifier reception unit 302, and a wireless transmission unit 303.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 includes a patient identifier storage unit 401 and a patient wireless transmission unit 402.
  • the acceptance request device 5 includes an acceptance request acceptance unit 501, an acceptance request transmission unit 502, a correspondence availability receiving unit 503, and a correspondence availability output unit 504.
  • the emergency medical support device 1, the wireless communication device 3, the patient wireless communication device 4, and the acceptance request device 5 are communicably connected via a network such as a communication line or wireless.
  • the emergency medical support device 1 is a device arranged in each hospital facility, for example.
  • the emergency medical support device 1 can be realized by, for example, a computer or a peripheral device thereof, but may be configured by dedicated hardware or the like.
  • the hospital facility information storage unit 100 is information related to hospital facilities, and can store hospital facility information having at least the number of beds in a room that accepts emergency cases.
  • the hospital facility information is static information related to hospital facilities.
  • the hospital facility information is, for example, information on the number of hospital beds.
  • the number of beds is specifically the number of beds.
  • the number of beds in the hospital may be the number of beds in each department of the hospital such as internal medicine and surgery, etc., and each room in the hospital, for example, a bedroom, an ICU (intensive care unit), or a bed in a treatment room It may be a number.
  • the information on the number of beds may be information in which the number of beds is managed for each room, each department, or each use, or information indicating the total number of beds in some or all of these is managed. It may be information. Further, it may be hospital facility information or information on the number of operating rooms of the hospital.
  • the room for receiving emergency cases may be any room as long as it can receive emergency cases at each hospital.
  • the room for receiving an emergency patient is, for example, a treatment room, a bedroom, an operating room, a room of an ICU, or the like in an emergency ward of a hospital.
  • the hospital facility information may include information indicating the use of each room. Further, it may further include information on hospital facility information and hospital equipment.
  • an emergency patient is a patient with a sudden illness, for example, a patient conveyed by an ambulance vehicle such as an ambulance.
  • hospital facility information may be accumulated in the hospital facility information storage unit 100 via a recording medium.
  • hospital facility information transmitted via a communication line or the like may be accumulated in the hospital facility information storage unit 100.
  • hospital facility information input via an input device such as a keyboard may be accumulated in the hospital facility information storage unit 100.
  • the hospital facility information storage unit 100 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 receives patient information including the number of patients in a room that accepts an emergency case, and accumulates at least temporarily.
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 may receive patient information input via, for example, an input device (not shown).
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 may acquire patient information as long as it can receive patient information including the number of patients in a room that receives a sudden illness in the hospital.
  • the patient information reception unit 101 includes one or more wireless communication devices, each of which is attached to one or more patients in each room that accepts an emergency in a hospital. You may receive the information which shows that it is a patient from the communication apparatus 4 at least, and may acquire patient information including the number of patients using the information which shows that it is a received patient.
  • the number of patients may be acquired by counting the number of information indicating that the patient has been received in each room that accepts an emergency.
  • the information indicating that the patient is a patient may be, for example, specific information that is commonly assigned to the patient or the patient wireless communication device 4 and simply indicates that the patient is a patient.
  • Different identification information assigned to each wireless communication device 4 may be used, for example, a patient identifier.
  • the patient identifier is an identifier that can identify a patient.
  • the patient identifier may be a patient name or the like, or a number or code given to the patient.
  • the patient identifier may be an identifier included in the patient wireless communication device 4 attached to the patient as described later.
  • the patient information reception unit 101 receives, for example, identification information transmitted from a communication device including the patient wireless communication device 4 in a room that accepts an emergency in a hospital, and assigns the identification information to a patient in advance. Identification information that matches the identified identification information may be detected by searching or the like, and the number of matching identification information detected may be counted to obtain information on the number of patients. Identification information that is commonly assigned to patients in advance or individually assigned may be stored in advance in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
  • Any method may be used for acquiring information indicating that the patient is a patient from one or more patients in each room receiving the emergency patient. For example, it is a patient who has received one or more antennas for receiving information in a hospital in an arrangement that can receive only information output in a room that accepts an emergency. Only information indicating this may be acquired. When receiving information other than information indicating that the patient is the same antenna using the same antenna, only information that matches the information indicating that the patient is prepared in advance is acquired from the received information. You may do it.
  • Identification information or the like of each room associated with the antenna in advance may be received as patient position information, and the number of patients in the room receiving the emergency patient may be acquired using this position information. That is, patient room identification information may be used as patient position information. The same applies to the following processing.
  • the information indicating that the patient is output from the patient wireless communication device 4 such as an RFID tag is received by a plurality of antennas, and the patient information receiving unit 101 receives from the reception intensity at the time of reception at each antenna,
  • the position of the patient (the position of the patient wireless communication device 4) is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated position indicates a position in the room that receives a preset emergency patient. Only information from existing patients may be acquired. Or you may make it give information, such as a flag which shows that it is the information from the patient in the room which receives the sudden illness designated beforehand only to the information from the patient in the room which receives the sudden illness.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 includes a GPS (Global Positioning System) or the like, and transmits the position information acquired by the GPS together with the information indicating that the patient is a patient.
  • Information indicating that the patient is a patient may be acquired only when the received position information is information indicating a preset position in the room that receives the emergency patient. Alternatively, information such as a flag may be added as described above.
  • the process etc. which detect a position by RFID tag, GPS, etc. are well-known techniques, detailed description is abbreviate
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 receives patient information having one or more sets of a patient identifier for identifying a patient and transferability information indicating whether transfer is possible to another room, and stores the information in a storage medium (not shown). It may be accumulated at least temporarily.
  • the other room is specifically a room other than the room that receives the emergency case. For example, a room other than the emergency ward.
  • the information indicating whether transfer is possible to another room is information indicating that transfer is possible only if it is possible to determine whether transfer is possible as a result. good.
  • the information indicating whether transfer is possible may be flag information that is set only when transfer is possible or transfer is impossible.
  • the patient information may include information indicating the transfer destination of the patient.
  • the patient information described above may be considered as a set of patient identifiers received by the patient information receiving unit 101.
  • the number of patient identifiers constituting the patient information is the number of patients.
  • the reception described here refers to reception of information input from an input device such as a keyboard, mouse, touch panel, reception of information transmitted via a wired or wireless communication line, recording on an optical disk, magnetic disk, semiconductor memory, or the like. It is a concept including reception of information read from a medium.
  • the patient information reception unit 101 can be realized by a driver of a communication unit or a reception unit, a device driver of an input unit such as a numeric keypad or a keyboard, a menu screen control software, or the like.
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 may include one or more antennas for receiving information, an RFID tag reader, an RFID tag reader / writer, or the like.
  • the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 can store transfer destination candidate facility information, which is information related to vacant beds in a patient transfer destination room.
  • the patient described here is specifically a patient in a room that accepts an emergency.
  • the forwarding destination described here is a room other than the room for receiving the emergency case.
  • the transfer destination candidate facility information is information regarding an empty bed in a room that can be a transfer destination candidate corresponding to information indicating the transfer destination of a patient.
  • the information related to the vacant beds may be information indicating the presence or absence of vacant beds or information indicating the number of vacant beds.
  • the transfer destination candidate facility information is information in which information indicating a room that is a transfer destination candidate is associated with information related to an empty bed.
  • the information indicating the transfer destination candidate room is, for example, room identification information indicating a room name, a department to which the room belongs, a use of the room, and the like.
  • the information indicating the room that can be a transfer destination candidate is information having a correspondence relationship with the information indicating the transfer destination included in the patient information described above.
  • One piece of information indicating a room that can be a transfer destination candidate may be used as information indicating the transfer destination included in the patient information described above.
  • the process of storing the transfer destination candidate facility information in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 does not matter.
  • transfer destination candidate facility information transmitted via a communication line or the like may be accumulated in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102, or transfer destination candidate facility information input via an input device is transferred to the transfer destination
  • the candidate facility information storage unit 102 may accumulate the information.
  • the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
  • the acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives an acceptance request, which is information indicating a request for accepting an emergency patient, from an external device.
  • the acceptance request may be considered as information asking whether or not an emergency patient can be accepted.
  • the acceptance request may include a faulty part identifier that is information for identifying the faulty part.
  • the fault site identifier may be information indicating a symptom of an emergency that can specify the fault site.
  • An external device is a device that can transmit an acceptance request.
  • the acceptance request is transmitted from an external device via, for example, a wireless communication line or a wireless network.
  • the external device is, for example, a device installed in an ambulance vehicle or the like, a device held by an ambulance team, and the like. In the present embodiment, a case where an external device is an acceptance requesting device 5 described later will be described as an example.
  • the acceptance request receiving unit 103 is usually realized by a wireless or wired communication means, but may be realized by a means for receiving a broadcast.
  • the bed determination unit 104 determines whether there is a bed available using the hospital facility information and the patient information. For example, the bed determination unit 104 determines whether there is a bed available when the reception request reception unit 103 receives the reception request. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the bed is available regularly or irregularly. Further, the bed determination unit 104 may determine whether there is a bed available using the number of patients included in the hospital facility information and the patient information and the transfer availability information.
  • the bed determination unit 104 determines whether or not the number of beds included in the hospital facility information is larger than the number of patients acquired from the patient information. To do. Furthermore, when the number of beds included in the hospital facility information is the same as the number of patients acquired from the patient information, the bed determination unit 104 determines whether there is a patient that can be moved (transferred) in the patient information. Judgment is made using the included transfer enable / disable information. Specifically, when one or more pieces of transfer permission / prohibition information indicating that transfer is possible are stored, the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is an empty bed.
  • a room is available in the room that accepts the emergency case. Because.
  • the bed determination unit 104 may determine whether there is a vacant bed using the number of patients included in the hospital facility information and the patient information, transferability information, and transfer destination candidate facility information.
  • the transfer availability information indicating that transfer is possible includes one or more transfer availability information that designates a transfer destination having an empty bed as the transfer destination. Good. Whether there is an empty bed at the transfer destination can be determined by whether the transfer destination candidate facility information corresponding to the information indicating the transfer destination included in the transfer enable / disable information indicates that there is an empty bed.
  • the bed determination unit 104 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like.
  • the processing procedure of the bed determination unit 104 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
  • the static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor can store static information such as a doctor having a group of doctor identifiers having one or more doctor identifiers for identifying a doctor.
  • the static information such as doctors is static information about the doctors, for example, information for indicating a medical team composed of doctors.
  • the static information such as a doctor has, for example, one or more doctor identifier groups corresponding to one or more medical teams.
  • the doctor indicated by the doctor identifier included in the doctor identifier group corresponding to one medical team is, for example, a doctor belonging to one medical team.
  • the medical team is, for example, a medical team that can deal with emergency cases.
  • the static information such as a doctor may be considered to include static information about a nurse or the like in addition to the static information of the doctor. In this case, the medical team may be considered as a medical team including a nurse in addition to a doctor.
  • the static information of the nurse is the same as the static information of the doctor except that the subject is not a doctor.
  • the static information such as a doctor has a doctor identifier group having one or more doctor identifiers and one or more medical action identifiers for identifying medical actions that can be performed by a medical team including one or more doctors identified by the doctor identifier group. You may do it.
  • the medical practice identifier is information for identifying a medical practice that can be performed by a medical team.
  • the medical practice identifier may be considered as information indicating information indicating a specialized field in medical care of the medical team.
  • the medical practice identifier may be considered as information indicating a faulty part that can be handled by the medical team.
  • the medical practice identifier has a correspondence relationship with the fault site identifier included in the acceptance request described above, for example.
  • the medical practice identifier may be the same as the above-described obstacle site identifier. If they are not the same, information for managing the correspondence relationship between the fault site identifier and the medical practice identifier is accumulated in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown), for example.
  • This management information is information for associating, for example, a failure site identifier “brain” and a medical practice identifier “brain surgery”.
  • the medical practice identifier is stored in association with a doctor identifier or a doctor identifier group.
  • the process of storing static information such as doctors in the static information storage unit 105 is not limited.
  • static information such as a doctor may be accumulated in the static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor via a recording medium, and the static information such as a doctor transmitted via a communication line is stored in the static information storage unit such as a doctor.
  • static information such as a doctor input via an input device may be stored in the static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor.
  • the static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor is preferably a nonvolatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor is a doctor including one or more doctor identifiers from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors in a region where a medical practice is performed for an emergency patient, including a room for receiving an emergency patient. Isodynamic information is received and at least temporarily stored in a storage medium (not shown).
  • the wireless communication device described here is, for example, the wireless communication device 3.
  • Dynamic information such as a doctor is information indicating a dynamic state of a doctor, for example.
  • the dynamic information such as a doctor may have one or more sets of a doctor identifier and position information indicating a position where the doctor is located. Moreover, you may have a doctor's schedule information etc. The position information and schedule information will be described later.
  • the dynamic information such as a doctor may further include dynamic information of the nurse.
  • the dynamic information of the nurse may be considered to be the same as the dynamic information of the doctor except that the subject is different.
  • the area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient may be considered as, for example, an area where there is a doctor who is ready to perform medical care for an emergency patient.
  • the room other than the room for receiving the emergency patient is, for example, an X-ray room, a corridor, an office room, a staff room, or the like.
  • the area where medical treatment is performed on an emergency patient other than the room that receives the emergency patient may be all areas in the emergency ward.
  • the doctor state management card 30 is used as a wireless communication device will be described as an example. Since the wireless communication device has a card shape, it can be easily attached to a doctor.
  • doctor status management card 30 it is used for managing the status of a doctor such as a portable information terminal, a mobile phone, a PHS, or a smartphone having a similar function in a shape other than a card type. It goes without saying that a doctor state management terminal, which is a portable terminal, may be used as a wireless communication device.
  • the acquisition of dynamic information such as a doctor from a wireless communication device attached to a doctor in an area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient may be performed by any method.
  • one or more antennas for receiving information are installed in a hospital in such an arrangement that only information output in an area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient can be received. Only dynamic information such as a doctor may be received by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor.
  • a plurality of antennas and information on positions where the antennas are provided are associated with each other, and an antenna that receives information from a wireless communication device, or a wireless communication device
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor obtains information on the position of the antenna having the highest intensity of information received from the information, and the position information is within the region where medical treatment is performed for a pre-specified emergency patient.
  • the received information may be accepted only when the position is indicated. Or you may make it provide information, such as a flag which shows that it is the information from the doctor who exists in the area
  • a plurality of antennas whose positions are determined in advance are provided in a region including a region where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient, and reception of one or more antennas that receive information transmitted from the wireless communication device
  • the position of the wireless communication device is calculated by three-point positioning or the like using the strength and the position information, and the position information indicates the position in the region where the medical action is performed for the pre-specified emergency patient.
  • the received information may be accepted only when it is present. Further, flag information may be added in the same manner as described above.
  • the doctor identifier prepared in advance is, for example, a doctor identifier included in static information such as a doctor stored in the static information storage unit 105 described above. Obtaining information received only by a specific antenna is well known in the art of RFID tags and the like. The same applies to the following processing.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor receives information indicating that the patient is output from the wireless communication device with a plurality of antennas provided in a hospital or the like, and the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor. 106 calculates the position of the doctor wearing the wireless communication device (that is, the position of the wireless communication device) from the reception intensity at the time of reception at each antenna, and the calculated position is a medical practice for a preset emergency.
  • dynamic information such as a doctor from a doctor in a region performing medical action for an emergency patient may be acquired by determining whether or not the position in the region to be performed is indicated. Moreover, you may give information, such as a flag, to this dynamic information, such as a doctor similarly to the above.
  • the position here is, for example, information on latitude and longitude, or coordinate information such as arbitrarily set coordinates.
  • the wireless communication device includes a GPS and the like, and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor transmits the positional information acquired by the GPS together with the dynamic information such as the doctor, Dynamic information such as a doctor may be acquired only when a position in a region where medical action is performed on a pre-set emergency case is indicated.
  • an information transmission device that transmits position information such as an identifier for identifying the position of each room or region to each room or region that constitutes a region where medical practice is performed for an emergency patient at a predetermined timing. (Not shown), etc., and when a doctor enters each room or area, information on the position transmitted by the information transmitting device is received by the wireless communication device worn by the doctor, and information on the received position is received.
  • the wireless communication device may transmit dynamic information and the like including the doctor.
  • the dynamic information accepting unit 106 such as a doctor is a doctor only when the position information included in the received dynamic information such as a doctor indicates a position in a region where medical action is performed on a pre-set emergency case. Isodynamic information may be acquired.
  • the process etc. which detect a position by RFID tag, GPS, etc. are well-known techniques, detailed description is abbreviate
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor further receives dynamic information such as a doctor input using the input means, and accumulates at least temporarily.
  • the dynamic information such as a doctor input using the input means is, for example, schedule information described later.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor has a doctor identifier and a state identifier for identifying at least two types of states that can or cannot be handled from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors.
  • Dynamic information such as a doctor, which is the above information, may be received and accumulated.
  • “Available” or “impossible” is information indicating whether or not a doctor can deal with a medical action for an emergency patient.
  • the status identifier may include, for example, a status identifier of unknown indicating a situation in which it is not known whether or not it can be handled, in addition to a status identifier that indicates a status of handling or not handling.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor moves from one or more wireless communication devices attached to one or more doctors and includes one or more pairs of one or more doctor identifiers and position information indicating the position where the doctor is located. Target information may be received and stored at least temporarily.
  • the position information described here is information indicating the position of the doctor, for example, information indicating the position of the wireless communication device, for example, the room or area where the coordinates and the lossless communication device exist.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor obtains position information indicating identification information such as the name of an area such as a room including the position of the wireless communication device using the received coordinate information indicating the position of the wireless communication device. And accumulation is also good.
  • information on coordinates that define an outline of one or more areas, for example, a room, etc. that constitute an area including an area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient such as an area identifier or room identifier ( For example, a room name or an area name) is prepared in advance, and it is detected in which area the coordinates indicating the position of the wireless communication apparatus are located, and an area identifier or a room identifier corresponding to the detected area is determined. You may make it acquire.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor may acquire position information as follows. In advance, it is possible to receive only information such as a doctor's dynamic information transmitted from the wireless communication device in each area in one or more areas, for example, rooms, etc. that constitute an area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient in advance.
  • the antennas are arranged in such a way that each antenna is associated with an identifier of the area or room in which the antenna is arranged, and each antenna receives information from the wireless communication device. In this case, an identifier of each region or each room associated with the received antenna may be acquired as the position information of the transmission source wireless communication device.
  • highly directional antennas are arranged at the four corners of one area toward the center of the area.
  • a plurality of one or more antennas may be arranged so that the range combining the reception ranges does not exceed one region.
  • the position of the received antenna (For example, coordinate information) or information on the position of the antenna having the strongest reception intensity may be acquired as the position information of the doctor.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor may at least temporarily accumulate dynamic history information such as a doctor, which is a plurality of information in which dynamic information such as a doctor is associated with time information indicating time.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor acquires time information of the time when the dynamic information such as the doctor is received, and stores the time information in association with the dynamic information such as the doctor.
  • the time information can be acquired from, for example, time measuring means such as a clock (not shown).
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor may further receive the schedule information of the doctor as the dynamic information such as the doctor, and store it in association with the doctor identifier.
  • the reception described here refers to reception of information input from an input device such as a keyboard, mouse, touch panel, reception of information transmitted via a wired or wireless communication line, recording on an optical disk, magnetic disk, semiconductor memory, or the like. It is a concept including reception of information read from a medium.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor can be realized by a driver of a communication unit or a reception unit, a device driver of an input unit such as a numeric keypad or a keyboard, a menu screen control software, or the like.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor may include one or more antennas for receiving information, an RFID tag reader, an RFID tag reader / writer, or the like.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor is provided with a schedule information receiving unit 1061 and a position information receiving unit 1062 will be described.
  • the schedule information accepting means 1061 accepts a doctor identifier and schedule information related to the doctor's schedule identified by the doctor identifier.
  • the schedule information is, for example, information in which a doctor's schedule is associated with a date and time. For example, it is information that can indicate the start time and end time of a doctor's schedule.
  • the schedule information may be, for example, information indicating a doctor's working hours, information indicating a time period in which a doctor performs a medical action for an emergency patient, a time period in which a medical action is not performed, or the like, It may be information indicating a schedule or the like for an operation performed by a doctor or a round-trip.
  • the schedule information receiving unit 1061 receives schedule information associated with a doctor identifier, for example.
  • the received schedule information is stored in a storage medium (not shown) as dynamic information such as a doctor in association with the doctor identifier.
  • the reception described here is reception of information input from an input device such as a keyboard, mouse, touch panel, reception of information transmitted via a wired or wireless communication line, a recording medium such as an optical disk, a magnetic disk, or a semiconductor memory.
  • the schedule information input means may be anything such as a numeric keypad, a keyboard, a mouse, a menu screen, or a wired or wireless communication means.
  • the schedule information receiving unit 1061 can be realized by a device driver of an input unit such as a numeric keypad or a keyboard, control software for a menu screen, or the like.
  • the position information receiving means 1062 receives the doctor identifier and the position information of the doctor identified by the doctor identifier.
  • the position information receiving unit 1062 receives the doctor identifier and the doctor position information transmitted from the wireless communication apparatus. Since the doctor's position information has been described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the position information receiving unit 1062 may receive the position information. Further, position information may be acquired and received using information transmitted from the wireless communication device.
  • information on positions where a plurality of antennas and antennas are provided for example, coordinates, identifiers such as names of rooms and areas, are associated with each other, and an antenna that receives information from a wireless communication device, or a wireless
  • the information on the position of the antenna having the highest intensity of information received from the communication device may be acquired by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor, and the position information may be received as the position information of the doctor.
  • a plurality of antennas whose positions are determined in advance are provided in a region including a region where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient, and reception of one or more antennas that receive information transmitted from the wireless communication device
  • the position of the wireless communication device may be calculated by three-point positioning or the like using the strength and the position information, and the position information may be received as doctor position information.
  • location information such as an identifier for identifying the location of each room or region is transmitted to each room or region constituting the region including the region where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient at a predetermined timing.
  • An information transmission device (not shown) is provided, and when the doctor enters each room or area, the wireless communication device worn by the doctor receives and receives information on the position transmitted by the information transmission device.
  • the wireless communication device may transmit dynamic information such as a doctor information including position information.
  • the position information receiving unit 1062 may receive position information included in dynamic information such as a doctor transmitted from the wireless communication apparatus as the position information of the doctor.
  • the position information receiving means 1062 accumulates the received position information in association with a doctor identifier as a dynamic information such as a doctor in a storage medium (not shown).
  • the acceptance described here is, for example, reception of information transmitted via a wireless communication line or a network.
  • the schedule information receiving means 1061 can be realized by a wireless communication driver, control software for a menu screen, or the like. Further, the schedule information receiving means 1061 may include one or more antennas for receiving information, an RFID tag reader, an RFID tag reader / writer, or the like.
  • the display control information storage unit 107 can store display control information that is information related to a region that displays or does not display a doctor identifier and position information.
  • display control information When position information indicating the position of the doctor is located in the area to be displayed, this position information and doctor identification information associated with the position information are to be displayed.
  • position information indicating the position of the doctor When position information indicating the position of the doctor is located in a region not to be displayed, this position information and doctor identification information associated with the position information are to be hidden.
  • the display control information may be information that can specify a display area and a non-display area.
  • the display control information may be information that specifies only a display area or information that specifies only a non-display area. There may be.
  • the information regarding the area of the display control information may be, for example, coordinate information indicating the outline of the area, or may be an area identifier such as the area name or the room name as described above, or a room identifier.
  • the process in which the display control information is stored in the display control information storage unit 107 does not matter.
  • the display control information storage unit 107 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
  • the display unit 108 displays only the doctor identifier in the display area according to the display control information. Specifically, the display unit 108 designates the corresponding position information as an area to be displayed by the display control information from the combination of the doctor identifier and the position information received by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor. The doctor identifier indicating that the position information is within the area is detected, and the doctor identifier is displayed. Alternatively, the corresponding position information is the position information in the area designated as the area that is not displayed by the display control information from the set of the doctor identifier and the position information received by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor. A doctor identifier other than the doctor identifier indicating this may be detected, and this doctor identifier may be displayed.
  • the display unit 108 may display a doctor identifier in association with position information corresponding to the doctor identifier.
  • the position information is coordinate information
  • the area or room including the coordinates is detected using coordinate information that defines the area or the outline of the room, and the identifier of the detected area or room is determined by the doctor. It may be displayed in association with the identifier.
  • the position information is an area identifier or a room identifier
  • an area or room floor plan or the like indicated by the area identifier or the room identifier is prepared, and on the floor plan corresponding to the area identifier or the room identifier indicated by the position information. You may display the image which has arrange
  • region When the position information is coordinate information, the area or room including the coordinates is detected using coordinate information that defines the area or the outline of the room, and the identifier of the detected area or room is determined by the doctor. It may be displayed in association with the identifier.
  • the position information is
  • the display unit 108 may select the doctor identifier to be displayed according to the state identifier. For example, the display unit 108 acquires only the doctor identifier associated with the display identifier that can be handled from the dynamic information such as the doctor, and among the acquired doctor identifiers, the doctor identifier of the doctor in the display area May be displayed.
  • the doctor identifier associated with the display identifier that cannot be handled is acquired from the dynamic information such as a doctor, and only the doctor identifiers of the doctors in the display area of the acquired doctor identifiers are displayed. It may be. If the state identifier is unknown, that is, if the correspondence is unknown, the doctor identifier corresponding to the state identifier may be set to be used for display or used for display. It may be set not to.
  • the display unit 108 may be considered as including or not including a display device.
  • the display unit 108 can be realized by display device driver software or display device driver software and a display device.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 uses the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor to determine whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling the emergency case. Determine whether. For example, the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor satisfy a predetermined condition, and if the medical team determination unit 109 determines that the condition is satisfied, the response to the emergency patient is determined. Determine that there is a medical team available. As a result, when the acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives the acceptance request, the medical team determination unit 109 can output a determination result as to whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency case.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not. For example, the medical team determination unit 109 can respond to a sudden illness by using static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor at all times or at fixed or indefinite time intervals. It is also possible to repeatedly determine whether or not a medical team is present, and when the acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives the acceptance request, outputting the judgment result immediately before the acceptance request is also received as described above. Even if a doctor receives an acceptance request, it may be considered to determine whether or not there is a medical team that can respond to an emergency case using static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor. good.
  • the conditions designated in advance may be any conditions as long as it is possible to determine that there is a medical team capable of performing medical treatment according to the emergency case according to the acceptance request.
  • Pre-designated conditions are available, for example, in physician identifier groups for each medical team indicated by static information such as doctors.
  • the condition is that there is a group of doctor identifiers that matches one or more doctor identifiers of doctors.
  • the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency case are doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in a region where medical treatment is performed for the emergency case.
  • one or more doctor identifiers indicating doctors in a region where medical action is performed on the emergency case indicated by the dynamic information such as a doctor constitutes one medical team indicated by the static information such as the doctor. It is determined whether or not all of the doctor identifiers of the doctors to be matched. If there is one or more medical teams that match all the doctor identifiers, it is determined that there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency, and if there is no medical team, it is determined that there is no medical team.
  • the predesignated condition is, for example, in a group of doctor identifiers for each medical team indicated by static information such as doctors. Even if there is a condition that there is a doctor identifier group that includes the doctor identifiers of the main doctors such as the leaders and responsible persons of each medical team in the corresponding doctor identifiers good.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 can handle an emergency using the medical action identifier included in the static information such as a doctor and the disordered part identifier included in the acceptance request.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 uses the dynamic information such as a doctor, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency case at present.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not static information such as a doctor, dynamic information such as a doctor, and a faulty part identifier satisfy a predetermined condition. Judge that there is a medical team that can handle emergency cases.
  • the predesignated condition here includes, for example, a doctor identifier group of a medical team capable of performing a medical action corresponding to an obstacle site identifier in a doctor identifier group for each medical team indicated by static information such as a doctor.
  • doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in a region in which medical identifiers of the medical team's doctor identifier group that are preliminarily specified or higher perform medical practice on emergency cases indicated by dynamic information such as doctors. It is a condition that matches.
  • this doctor identifier group is the medical team capable of performing the medical action corresponding to the obstacle part identifier. It can be judged that it is a doctor identifier group. In this group of doctor identifiers, whether or not a predetermined number or more of doctor identifiers match the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in the area where medical action is performed on the emergency illness indicated by the dynamic information such as a doctor. May be determined.
  • information specifying a doctor identifier group of a medical team capable of performing a medical action corresponding to each obstacle part identifier is added to a predesignated condition, and an acceptance request is made using the predesignated condition.
  • the doctor identifier group corresponding to the obstacle part identifier possessed by the doctor is acquired, and for this doctor identifier group, more than a predetermined proportion of doctor identifiers are in a region where medical action is performed for emergency cases indicated by dynamic information such as doctors. You may make it judge whether it corresponds with the doctor identifier of one or more doctors.
  • doctor identifier group corresponding to the faulty part identifier included in the acceptance request cannot be acquired using the predesignated conditions, or if the doctor identifiers of the predesignated ratio or more do not match, there is no medical team Judgment, otherwise it is determined that a medical team exists.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 may determine whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency case using static information such as a doctor and dynamic history information such as a doctor. For example, the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether the static information such as a doctor and the dynamic history information such as a doctor satisfy a predetermined condition, and if the medical team determines that the condition is satisfied, Judge that there is a medical team that can.
  • the conditions specified in advance may be any conditions as long as it is possible to determine that there is a medical team capable of performing medical treatment according to the acceptance request.
  • the predesignated condition corresponds to, for example, a doctor identifier group for each medical team indicated by static information such as a doctor, and a doctor identifier more than a predesignated ratio corresponds to an emergency case indicated by the dynamic history information such as a doctor.
  • the condition is that there is a group of doctor identifiers that matches one or more possible doctor identifiers.
  • the doctor identifier of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency case is a medical team judgment using the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in the area where medical action is performed for the emergency case and the dynamic history information such as a doctor.
  • the determination using the dynamic history information such as a doctor is here a doctor who is in the area of performing medical treatment for the emergency case. It shall have priority over the judgment of no.
  • the process for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied is the same as described above.
  • the dynamic history information such as a doctor indicates that a doctor is in the operating room, and the time in the operating room of the doctor up to the present time calculated from the dynamic history information such as the doctor is When it is over a predetermined time, when determining whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency, the doctor identifier of this doctor is used as the doctor identifier of the doctor in the area where medical action is taken for the emergency You may make it exclude and handle.
  • the doctor identifier of this doctor is excluded from the doctor identifiers of doctors capable of handling emergency cases.
  • the doctor identifier of this doctor is set as the doctor identifier of the doctor who can handle the emergency case.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the schedule information and the position information included in the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor. Also good. For example, the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not the schedule information and the position information included in the static information such as a doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor satisfy a predetermined condition, and determines that the condition is satisfied. In this case, it is determined that there is a medical team capable of handling the emergency case.
  • Pre-designated conditions are available, for example, in physician identifier groups for each medical team indicated by static information such as doctors.
  • the condition is that there is a group of doctor identifiers that matches one or more doctor identifiers of doctors.
  • the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency case are the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in the area where the medical action is performed for the emergency case, and the medical action can be performed for the emergency case. This is a doctor identifier corresponding to the schedule information indicating that the state is in a proper state.
  • the determination using the dynamic history information such as a doctor is here a doctor who is in the area of performing medical treatment for the emergency case. It shall have priority over the judgment of no.
  • the process for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied is the same as described above.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 displays the schedule information corresponding to the doctor identifier of the doctor.
  • the doctor identifier of this doctor is indicated as a doctor doctor who can respond to the emergency case. It may be used as an identifier.
  • the doctor identifier of the doctor may be used as a doctor identifier of a doctor capable of handling an emergency patient.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 has a medical team that can deal with an emergency using the doctor's status identifier of the dynamic information. It may be determined whether or not.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 determines, for example, whether or not the static information such as the doctor and the state identifier of each doctor included in the dynamic information such as the doctor satisfy a predetermined condition, and determines that the condition is satisfied. In this case, it is determined that there is a medical team capable of handling the emergency case.
  • Pre-designated conditions are available, for example, in physician identifier groups for each medical team indicated by static information such as doctors.
  • the condition is that there is a group of doctor identifiers that matches one or more doctor identifiers of doctors.
  • the doctor identifier of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency patient is, for example, a doctor identifier indicating that the corresponding state identifier can be handled, that is, the emergency patient can be handled.
  • the process for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied is the same as described above.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 uses a combination of two or more of position information, schedule information, state identifiers, medical action identifiers, dynamic history information such as doctors, etc., other than the above-described combinations, as appropriate. It may be appropriately determined whether or not there is a medical team that can handle this.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like.
  • the processing procedure of the medical team determination unit 109 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
  • Correspondence propriety transmission unit 110 is able to respond when the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is an available bed and the medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is a medical team capable of handling a sudden illness. Is transmitted to an external device (not shown). For example, the response transmission / reception unit 110 determines that the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is no vacant bed, or the medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is no medical team capable of handling an emergency case. Information indicating that the response is not possible may be transmitted.
  • An external device is usually a device that has transmitted an acceptance request, but may be another external device.
  • the acceptance request described above includes information (IP address) such as address information of a communication destination for communicating with the other external device, and this acceptance request. Is used to transmit information indicating that it is compatible with other external devices.
  • the supportability transmission unit 110 is usually realized by wireless or wired communication means, but may be realized by broadcasting means.
  • the wireless communication device 3 is a device that wirelessly transmits information including a doctor identifier to the emergency medical support device 1 described above.
  • the wireless communication device 3 is a wireless communication device worn by a doctor.
  • the above-described dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor receives information including a doctor identifier transmitted from the wireless communication device 3.
  • the wireless communication device 3 is, for example, an active RFID tag. Alternatively, a passive RFID tag may be used.
  • the wireless communication device 3 may be a dedicated device equipped with GPS, a mobile phone, a PHS, a smartphone, or the like. Radio waves used for wireless communication are adjusted so as to have a frequency band and output that do not interfere with medical practice.
  • the card-shaped wireless communication device 3 is used as an example.
  • a card-shaped wireless communication device 3 is referred to as a doctor state management card 30.
  • a portable information terminal that does not have a card shape, a mobile phone, a PHS, a doctor state management terminal such as a smartphone, or the like may be used as the wireless communication device 3.
  • the doctor identifier storage unit 301 can store a doctor identifier.
  • the doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301 is a doctor identifier corresponding to the doctor wearing the wireless communication device 3.
  • stored in the doctor identifier storage part 301 is not ask
  • the doctor identifier storage unit 301 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
  • the doctor identifier storage unit 301 may also store information such as dynamic information such as a doctor other than the doctor identifier.
  • the state identifier receiving unit 302 receives a state identifier input by a doctor.
  • the state identifier is information indicating whether or not correspondence is possible.
  • the means for inputting the state identifier may be anything such as a numeric keypad, a keyboard, or a menu screen.
  • the input means may be a switch such as a dip switch or a slide switch, a button, or the like.
  • the wireless transmission unit 303 transmits the doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301.
  • the wireless transmission unit 303 may transmit information such as dynamic information such as a doctor including a doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301 and the state identifier received by the state identifier reception unit 302.
  • information such as dynamic information such as a doctor including a doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301 and the state identifier received by the state identifier reception unit 302.
  • the timing at which the wireless transmission unit 303 transmits the doctor identifier For example, it is transmitted regularly or irregularly.
  • the wireless transmission unit 303 transmits a patient identifier at a predetermined or indefinite timing designated in advance.
  • the wireless transmission unit 303 can be realized by communication means or the like.
  • the wireless communication device 3 may include a receiving unit (not shown) that receives an instruction to transmit dynamic information such as a doctor identifier or a doctor from the emergency medical support device 1 or the like. The doctor identifier may be transmitted accordingly. Further, the wireless communication device 3 may have an acquisition unit (not shown) such as a GPS for acquiring information indicating the position of the own device, and the information on the position acquired by the acquisition unit is It may be transmitted in association with the doctor identifier.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 is a device that wirelessly transmits information indicating that the patient is a patient to the emergency medical support device 1 described above.
  • the wireless communication device 3 is a wireless communication device worn by a patient.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 is, for example, an active RFID tag. Alternatively, a passive RFID tag may be used.
  • the wireless communication device 3 may be a dedicated device equipped with GPS, a mobile phone, a PHS, a PDA, a smartphone, or the like. Radio waves used for wireless communication are in a frequency band that does not interfere with medical practice.
  • the shape of the patient wireless communication device 4 is preferably, for example, a shape that does not interfere with the operation in the state of being in a bed.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 preferably has a wristband shape or the like.
  • the patient identifier storage unit 401 can store a patient identifier.
  • the patient identifier stored in the patient identifier storage unit 401 is, for example, a patient identifier corresponding to the patient wearing the device.
  • stored in the patient identifier storage part 401 is not ask
  • the patient identifier storage unit 401 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
  • the patient wireless transmission unit 402 transmits the patient identifier stored in the patient identifier storage unit 401.
  • the timing at which the patient wireless transmission unit 402 transmits the patient identifier does not matter.
  • the patient wireless transmission unit 402 transmits the patient identifier at a predetermined or indefinite timing designated in advance, for example.
  • the patient identifier transmission unit 402 can be realized by communication means or the like.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 may include a receiving unit (not shown) that receives an instruction to transmit a patient identifier from the emergency medical support device 1 or the like. May be sent. Further, the wireless communication device 3 may include an acquisition unit (not shown) for acquiring information indicating the position of the own device, and the position information acquired by the acquisition unit is used as a patient identifier. You may transmit in association.
  • the acceptance request device 5 transmits an acceptance request to the emergency medical assistance device 1 by wireless communication.
  • the acceptance request device 5 is, for example, a device that is placed on an ambulance vehicle or carried by an ambulance crew.
  • the acceptance requesting device 5 may be a portable computer, a mobile phone, a PHS, a PDA, a smartphone, a car navigation system, or the like.
  • the acceptance request accepting unit 501 accepts acceptance requests. For example, an acceptance request input by an ambulance crew or the like is accepted.
  • the acceptance request is information for inquiring whether acceptance is possible, for example. Alternatively, it may be considered as information for inquiring about the recipient.
  • the acceptance request accepting unit 501 may accept an acceptance request having a fault site identifier.
  • the fault site identifier is information indicating the fault site determined by, for example, an emergency crew member from the state of emergency.
  • the acceptance request may include information such as the consciousness level of sudden illness, presence / absence / frequency of breathing, degree of pulse, blood pressure, presence / absence of trauma.
  • accepting an instruction to read an acceptance request stored in advance in a storage unit (not shown) for transmission may also be considered acceptance of the acceptance request.
  • the means for inputting the acceptance request may be anything such as a numeric keypad, a keyboard, or a menu screen.
  • the acceptance request acceptance unit 501 can be realized by a device driver for input means such as a numeric keypad or a keyboard, control software for a menu screen, and the like.
  • the acceptance request transmitting unit 502 transmits the accepted acceptance request to the emergency medical assistance device 1.
  • the acceptance request transmission unit 502 can be realized by communication means or the like.
  • the response availability receiving unit 503 receives information from the emergency medical support device 1 indicating that it is possible to handle an emergency patient. Further, the response availability receiving unit 503 may accept information indicating that the response is not possible.
  • the availability receiving unit 503 can be realized by a communication unit or the like.
  • the correspondence availability output unit 504 outputs information indicating that the correspondence received by the correspondence availability receiving unit 503 is possible. Also, information indicating that the correspondence received by the correspondence availability receiving unit 503 is impossible is output. Output described here includes display on a display, printing on a printer, sound output, transmission to an external device, storage in a recording medium, delivery of processing results to another processing device or other program, etc. It is a concept that includes.
  • the correspondence output unit 504 may be considered as including or not including an output device such as a display or a printer.
  • the output unit may be realized by output device driver software, or output device driver software and an output device.
  • Step S101 The acceptance request receiving unit 103 determines whether an acceptance request has been received from an external device, here, the acceptance request device 5. If received, the process proceeds to step S102. If not received, the process proceeds to step S103.
  • Step S102 The emergency medical assistance device 1 determines whether or not the acceptance is possible. Details of this processing will be described later. Then, the process returns to step S101.
  • Step S103 The position information receiving unit 1062 determines whether or not information including a doctor identifier transmitted from the wireless communication device 3 has been received.
  • the information including a doctor identifier is dynamic information such as a doctor including a state identifier, for example. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S104. If not accepted, the process proceeds to step S108. Note that, for example, when an antenna that receives information including a doctor identifier and information including a patient identifier is shared, the doctor identifier is determined by determining whether or not the identifier included in the received information is a doctor identifier. It may also be determined that has been accepted.
  • Whether or not the identifier is a doctor identifier is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the predetermined identifier such as the head of the identifier has a character string unique to the doctor identifier specified in advance, This can be determined by determining whether or not the value matches the assigned or assignable value.
  • Step S104 The position information receiving means 1062 acquires the doctor's position information using the information received in Step S103. For example, when the position information is included in the information received in step S103, the position information is acquired as it is. In addition, when the information received in step S103 includes information for identifying the antenna that has received the information and information such as the antenna position, the position information of the antenna obtained by performing calculations or the like using this information is obtained. Obtained as location information.
  • Step S105 The position information receiving means 1062 determines whether or not the position information acquired in step S104 indicates a position in the region where the medical treatment is performed on the emergency patient. When the position in the region where the medical treatment is performed for the emergency patient is indicated, the process proceeds to step S106, and when not indicated, the process returns to step S101.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor accumulates dynamic information such as a doctor including the doctor identifier received in step S103 and the position information acquired in step S104 in a storage medium (not shown). Further, information on the time when the doctor identifier is received may be stored in association with these pieces of information. When dynamic information such as a doctor with a matching doctor identifier has already been accumulated, it is updated with new dynamic information such as a doctor by overwriting or the like.
  • Step S107 The dynamic information accepting unit 106 such as a doctor acquires time information, and the dynamic history information such as a doctor that associates the time information with the dynamic information such as the doctor accumulated in Step 106 is not illustrated. Accumulate in storage media. The accumulation here is additional writing. Then, the process returns to step S101.
  • Step S108 The patient information receiving unit 101 determines whether information including a patient identifier transmitted from the patient wireless communication device 4 has been received. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S109. If not accepted, the process proceeds to step S112.
  • Step S109 The patient information receiving unit 101 acquires information on the position of the patient using the information received in Step S108. For example, if the information received in step S108 includes position information, the position information is acquired as it is. Further, when the information received in step S108 includes information for identifying the antenna that received the information and information such as the antenna position, the information on the antenna position obtained using this information and the information associated with the antenna.
  • the identification information of the room or area may be acquired as the patient position information.
  • the patient position information described here may be coordinate information or the like indicating the position of the patient, or identification information or the like of the room or region where the patient is located.
  • Step S110 The patient information receiving unit 101 determines whether or not the position information acquired in Step S109 indicates the position in the room where the patient is received. If the position in the room where the patient is received is shown, the process proceeds to step S111. If not, the process returns to step S101.
  • Step S111 The patient information receiving unit 101 associates the patient identifier received in Step S108 with the position information acquired in Step S109, and stores them in a storage medium (not shown). In addition, when the information in which a patient identifier corresponds is already accumulate
  • Step S112 The patient information accepting unit 101 counts the number of patient identifiers accumulated so far in step S111, accepts the count result as patient information, and accumulates it in a storage medium or the like (not shown). Then, the process returns to step S101.
  • Step S113 The schedule information receiving means 1061 determines whether or not the schedule information associated with the doctor identifier has been received. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S114. If not accepted, the process proceeds to step S115.
  • Step S114 The schedule information receiving means 1061 stores the schedule information received in step S113 in a storage medium (not shown) in association with the doctor identifier. Then, the process returns to step S101.
  • Step S115 The patient information receiving unit 101 determines whether or not the transfer enable / disable information associated with the patient information has been received. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S116. If not accepted, the process proceeds to step S117.
  • Step S116 The patient information receiving unit 101 stores the patient information received in Step S115 and the transfer availability information in association with each other in a storage medium (not shown). Then, the process returns to step S101.
  • Step S117 The emergency medical assistance device 1 accepts transfer destination candidate facility information via a not-shown accepting unit.
  • Step S118 The emergency medical assistance device 1 updates the transfer destination candidate facility information stored in a storage medium (not shown) using the transfer destination candidate facility information received in Step S116. Then, the process returns to step S101.
  • Step S119 The display unit 108 determines whether an instruction to display is accepted. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S119. If not accepted, the process returns to step 101.
  • Step S120 The display unit 108 reads the display control information in the display control information storage unit 107, and displays the doctor identifier associated with the position information indicating the position in the region indicated by the display control information and the position information. Obtained from the dynamic information such as the doctor accumulated in step S106.
  • Step S121 The display unit 108 displays an image indicating the doctor identifier acquired in step S121. For example, an image such as a floor plan of a region where a medical action for an emergency patient is performed in which a doctor corresponding to the doctor identifier is arranged at a position indicated by position information corresponding to the acquired doctor identifier is configured and displayed. Then, the process returns to step S101.
  • step S102 in FIG. 2 the details of the process for determining acceptance / rejection described in step S102 in FIG. 2 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
  • the bed determination unit 104 includes the number of patients in the room that receives the emergency cases accumulated by the patient information reception unit 101 and the bed in the room that receives the emergency cases indicated by the hospital facility information stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 100.
  • the number ie, the number of beds, is compared to determine whether the number of patients is less than the number of beds. If not, the process proceeds to step S202. If not, that is, if they are the same, the process proceeds to step S220.
  • Step S202 The medical team determination unit 109 adds 1 to the counter n.
  • Step S203 The medical team determination unit 109 adds dynamic information such as a doctor corresponding to the nth doctor identifier to the dynamic information such as the doctor accumulated by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 (hereinafter referred to as the nth doctor or the like). It is determined whether or not (referred to as dynamic information) is included. If it is included, the process proceeds to step S204. If it is not included, the process proceeds to step S209.
  • Step S204 The medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not the state identifier included in the dynamic information such as the nth doctor indicates that it can be handled. If the response is indicated, the process proceeds to step S205. If not indicated, the process proceeds to step S208.
  • Step S205 The medical team determination unit 109 indicates that the schedule information accumulated in a storage medium (not shown) in association with the nth doctor identifier indicates that the doctor's current schedule is available for emergency cases. Whether or not is indicated. If the response is possible, the process proceeds to step S205. If the response is not possible, the process proceeds to step S208.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 is in a state where the dynamic history information such as a doctor stored in a storage medium (not shown) in association with the nth doctor identifier is capable of handling an emergency patient by the nth doctor. It is determined whether or not a history indicating the above is shown. For example, in the history within one hour immediately before the doctor indicated by the dynamic history information, such as a doctor, if the doctor indicates that he / she has been in the operating room for 40 minutes or more, it is determined that the patient cannot respond to the emergency case In such a case, it may be determined that the state is compatible. Any condition may be set as a condition for determining similar history information such as a doctor. If a history indicating that the patient is ready for an emergency is shown, the process proceeds to step S207. If not, the process proceeds to step S208.
  • the dynamic history information such as a doctor stored in a storage medium (not shown) in association with the nth doctor identifier is capable of handling an emergency patient by the nth doctor. It
  • the medical team determination unit 109 acquires the doctor identifier of the nth doctor and stores it in a storage medium (not shown). It should be noted that information such as a flag indicating that it is possible to respond to the doctor identifier of the nth doctor or dynamic information such as a doctor may be given.
  • Step S208 The medical team determination unit 109 increments the value of the counter n by 1. Then, the process returns to step S203.
  • Step S209 The medical team determination unit 109 detects a doctor identifier group corresponding to the medical practice identifier corresponding to the disordered part identifier included in the acceptance request received in step S101 in the static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor, get.
  • Information indicating the correspondence between the faulty part identifier and the medical practice identifier is stored in advance in, for example, a storage medium (not shown).
  • Step S210 The medical team determination unit 109 assigns 1 to the counter m.
  • Step S211 The medical team determination unit 109 detects and acquires a doctor identifier that matches the doctor identifier constituting the m-th doctor identifier group acquired in Step S209 in the doctor identifier accumulated in Step S207.
  • Step S212 The medical team determination unit 109 counts the number of doctor identifiers acquired in step S211.
  • Step S213 The medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not the count result in step S212 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.
  • the value designated in advance may be a fixed value, or a value prepared in advance in association with one or more faulty part identifiers obtained by a search using the faulty part identifier included in the acceptance request. There may be. Further, this value may be a value indicating a ratio or the like to the number of doctor identifiers constituting the incoming identifier group. If it is greater than or equal to the value specified in advance, the process proceeds to step S214, and if not greater than the value, the process proceeds to step S216.
  • Step S214 The medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is a compatible medical team.
  • Step S215) The response propriety transmitting unit 110 transmits information indicating that it is possible to respond to the emergency case to an external device, here, the acceptance requesting device 5. Then, the process returns to the upper process.
  • Step S216 The correspondence propriety transmission unit 110 increments the value of m by 1.
  • Step S21-7 It is determined whether or not the doctor identifier group acquired in Step S209 includes the mth doctor identifier group. If there is, the process returns to step S211; otherwise, the process proceeds to step 218.
  • Step S228 The correspondence transmission / reception unit 110 determines that there is no medical team that can be handled.
  • Step S219) The response propriety transmission unit 110 transmits information indicating that it is impossible to respond to the emergency case to an external device, here, the acceptance requesting device 5. Then, the process returns to the upper process.
  • Step S220 The bed determination unit 104 detects transferability information corresponding to the patient identifier of the patient in the room receiving the emergency patient from the transferability information stored in association with the patient identifier by the patient information reception unit 101, and It is detected whether there is transfer enable / disable information indicating that transfer is possible. Specifically, the patient identifier of the patient in the room receiving the emergency patient is the patient identifier accumulated in step S111. If there is a message indicating that transfer is possible, the process proceeds to step S221.
  • the bed determination unit 104 uses the transfer destination candidate facility information to determine whether there is an empty bed at the transfer destination corresponding to the transfer enable / disable information indicating that transfer is possible. Specifically, the bed determination unit 104 transfers, from the transfer destination candidate facility information, information indicating the availability of the transfer destination bed indicated by one or more transfer enable / disable information indicating that transfer is possible detected in step S220. Information indicating the destination is sequentially acquired by searching using a search key or the like. If one or more pieces of information indicating that a bed is available are detected, the process returns to step S202, and if not detected, the process proceeds to step S219.
  • the wireless transmission unit 303 reads the doctor identifier stored in the doctor identification storage unit 301 and the state identifier received by the state identifier reception unit 302, and transmits them at a predetermined or indefinite timing specified in advance.
  • the patient wireless transmission unit 402 reads out the patient identifier stored in the patient identification storage unit 401 and transmits it at a predetermined or indefinite timing designated in advance.
  • Step S301 The acceptance request receiving unit 501 determines whether or not an acceptance request has been accepted.
  • the acceptance request accepted here is, for example, an acceptance request including a fault site identifier. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S302. If not accepted, the process returns to step S301.
  • Step S302 The acceptance request transmitting unit 502 transmits the acceptance request received in Step S301 to the emergency medical assistance device 1.
  • Step S303 The acceptance request transmission unit 502 determines whether or not information indicating whether or not the emergency medical support device 1 is transmitted from the emergency medical assistance device 1 has been received. If received, the process proceeds to step S304. If not received, the process returns to step S303.
  • Step S304 The correspondence availability output unit 504 outputs information indicating availability of the correspondence accepted in Step S303. Then, the process ends.
  • FIG. 5 is a conceptual diagram of the emergency medical support system 10.
  • the emergency medical support device 1 is assumed to be disposed in an emergency ward in the hospital ⁇ which is one hospital.
  • Antennas 121 to 128 are installed on the walls of the rooms of the emergency ward in the hospital ⁇ .
  • the antenna 121 is disposed in the ICU 601.
  • the antenna 122 is disposed in the bedroom 602.
  • the antenna 123 is disposed in the waiting room 603.
  • the antenna 124 is disposed in the operating room 604.
  • the antenna 125 is disposed in the treatment room 605.
  • the antenna 126 is arranged in the staff room.
  • Antennas 127 and 128 are disposed in the passage.
  • an RFID tag reader / writer (not shown) is attached to each antenna, and each RFID tag reader / writer is connected to the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor of the emergency medical support apparatus 1 via a network. It shall be connected.
  • the antennas 121 to 128 and the RFID tag reader / writer may be considered as a part of the emergency medical support system 1, for example, a part of the patient information receiving unit 101 or the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor.
  • an RFID tag reader may be used instead of the RFID tag reader / writer. It is assumed that each of the antennas 121 to 126 is disposed at a position where a signal transmitted from an active RFID tag can be received in a room where the antennas are disposed. Further, it is assumed that the antennas 127 and 128 are disposed at positions where signals transmitted from the active RFID tag can be received in the passage.
  • doctor status management card 30 that is, the card-type wireless communication device 3
  • the doctor status management card 30 stores a doctor identifier associated with each doctor.
  • the doctor state management card is an active RFID tag having a power source.
  • FIG. 6 is a view of the name tag with the doctor state management card 30 attached to the back side as viewed from the back side.
  • the doctor state management card 30 has a slide switch for receiving a state identifier.
  • the state identifier receiving unit 302 receives a state identifier “available” indicating that the doctor is ready to handle an emergency.
  • a state identifier “unavailable” indicating that it is in a state incapable of handling an emergency is accepted.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 has a bracelet shape and is fitted on each patient's arm.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 stores a patient identifier associated with each patient.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 is an active RFID tag.
  • the acceptance request device 5 is disposed in an ambulance which is an ambulance vehicle, and can communicate with the emergency medical support device 1 through a wireless communication line such as a wireless LAN or a mobile phone.
  • the acceptance requesting device 5 may be arranged at a command center or the like for determining a transfer destination of an emergency patient based on information from an emergency vehicle or the like.
  • doctor A001 a doctor whose doctor identifier is “A001” (hereinafter, each doctor is displayed side by side with identification information of the doctor.
  • doctor A001 a doctor whose doctor identifier is “A001” is hereinafter referred to as doctor A001). Assume that you are in the treatment room 605 in the emergency ward.
  • the wireless transmission unit 303 of the doctor state management card 30 attached to the chest by the doctor is a doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301 at a predetermined time interval, in this case, “A001”
  • the state identifier “available” received by the identifier receiving unit 302 is read, and a signal including the read doctor identifier and the state identifier is transmitted.
  • the antenna 125 installed in the treatment room 605 receives a signal including a doctor identifier transmitted by the doctor state management card 30 of the doctor A001 and a state identifier. Then, the RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna 125 extracts the doctor identifier “A001” and the state identifier “available” from the received signal. Then, a device identifier assigned to the device itself is assigned to the extracted information and transmitted to the emergency medical assistance device 1.
  • the device identifier may be any information as long as it can be identified from an RFID tag reader / writer connected to another antenna. For example, the device identifier may be a serial number, an IP address on the network, or a MAC address. Etc.
  • the device identifier of the RFID tag reader / writer is assumed to be a character string “RF125”.
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor can receive information transmitted from the RFID tag reader / writer, but here, the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor 106 determines whether the identifier included in the transmitted information is a doctor identifier or a patient identifier, and the patient information reception unit 101 receives information only when the identifier is a patient identifier.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor is set in advance so as to receive information only when the identifier is a doctor identifier.
  • the patient identifier is a character string that starts with “P”
  • the identifiers that start with other characters are doctor identifiers
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor are . It is determined whether the identifier is a doctor identifier or a patient identifier depending on whether or not the first character of the identifier starts with P.
  • the received identifier starts with a character other than “P”
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor acquires information indicating the position of the antenna that has received the information, using the device identifier of the RFID tag reader / writer included in the received information.
  • the information on the position of the antenna that has received this information is acquired as the position information of the doctor.
  • FIG. 7 is a reception position management table showing the correspondence between the device identifier of each RFID tag reader / writer attached to the antenna and the area name to which the antenna is attached.
  • the reception position management table has items of “device identifier” and “area name”.
  • the “device identifier” is an identifier of each RFID tag reader / writer attached to the antenna.
  • the “area name” is the name of the area where the antenna is installed, for example, a room name.
  • the “area name” may be considered as the area name where the doctor is located.
  • This management table is assumed to be stored in advance in a storage medium (not shown).
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 since the device identifier included in the information received by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as the doctor is “RF125”, the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as the doctor matches the value of the “device identifier”.
  • a record to be searched is searched in the reception position management table, and “treatment room” which is a value of “area name” of the searched record is acquired as position information of the doctor.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor determines whether or not the doctor is in an area where he / she performs medical treatment for an emergency patient.
  • FIG. 8 is a medical area management table for managing an area where medical action is performed on an emergency patient.
  • the medical area management table is a list of area names of areas where medical treatment is performed for emergency patients.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor determines whether or not there is an area name in the medical area management table that matches the “treatment room” that is the position information of the acquired doctor. Here, since there is a match, it is determined that the position information of the doctor is within the area where medical treatment is performed for the emergency patient. For this reason, the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor accumulates dynamic information such as a doctor including the received doctor identifier and state identifier and position information in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown). Here, since dynamic information such as a doctor including the same doctor identifier “A001” has already been stored, it is assumed that the dynamic information such as a doctor has been updated using new dynamic information such as a doctor.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing dynamic information such as a doctor accumulated in a storage unit (not shown). Here, it is assumed that dynamic information such as the latest doctors of a plurality of doctors has already been stored.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor acquires time information via a clock, NTP (network time protocol), etc., and associates with the dynamic information such as the doctor as a storage medium (not shown) as dynamic history information such as a doctor. And so on. Since the dynamic history information such as a doctor is information indicating a history, the accumulation here is an additional note. Here, for example, dynamic history information such as a doctor is accumulated as a file for each doctor identifier.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of dynamic history information such as a doctor associated with the doctor identifier “A001”. It is assumed that the dynamic history information such as a doctor has a file name “A001” and stores a list of sets of time information, position information, and a state identifier.
  • the time information here is a concept that may include date and time information.
  • a patient whose patient identifier is “P001” (hereinafter, each patient is displayed side by side with patient identification information.
  • a patient whose patient identifier is “P001” is hereinafter referred to as patient P001).
  • patient P001 a patient whose patient identifier is “P001”
  • the patient wireless transmission unit 402 of the patient wireless communication device 4 attached to the wrist of the patient receives the patient identifier stored in the patient identifier storage unit 401 at a predetermined time interval, in this case, “P001”.
  • a signal including the read patient identifier is transmitted.
  • the antenna 122 installed in the bedroom 602 receives a signal including the patient identifier transmitted by the patient wireless communication device 4 of the patient P001. Then, the RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna 122 extracts the patient identifier “P001” from the received signal. Then, the device identifier “RF122” of the device itself is assigned to the extracted information and transmitted to the emergency medical assistance device 1.
  • the identifier included in the transmitted information is an identifier beginning with “P”, it is determined that the identifier is a patient identifier, and the patient information receiving unit 101 receives the transmitted information.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor, information indicating the antenna position from the reception position management table shown in FIG. 7 using the IP address “RF122” of the RFID tag reader / writer included in the received information. To get.
  • information on the position of the antenna that has received this information is acquired as information on the position of the patient.
  • the patient position information is referred to as patient position information.
  • the patient information reception unit 101 acquires patient position information “bedroom”.
  • FIG. 11 is an emergency room management table for managing rooms for receiving emergency patients.
  • the emergency room management table is a list of area names of rooms that receive emergency patients.
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 determines whether or not an area name that coincides with “bedroom” that is the acquired patient position information is in the emergency room management table. Here, since there is a match, it is determined that the position indicated by the patient position information is in the room that receives the emergency patient. Therefore, the patient information receiving unit 101 accumulates patient information in which the received patient identifier is associated with the patient position information in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown). Here, since the same patient identifier as the patient identifier “P001” has already been stored, the already stored patient identifier and patient position information are updated using the new patient identifier and patient position information. To do.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing patient information accumulated in a storage unit (not shown).
  • the patient information includes items of “patient identifier”, “patient position information”, “transferability”, and “transfer destination”.
  • Patient identifier is a patient identifier.
  • Patient position information is patient position information, and here, the same area name as that shown in FIG. 7 is used.
  • Transportability” and “Transfer destination” are transfer enable / disable information, and “Transfer enable / disable” is information indicating whether transfer is possible.
  • the value “ ⁇ ” indicates that transfer is possible, and the value “ ⁇ ” indicates that transfer is not possible.
  • “Forwarding destination” is information for designating a facility in a hospital that is a forwarding destination. It is assumed that the transfer permission / prohibition information is appropriately input by, for example, a hospital doctor or the like via a reception unit (not shown). It is assumed that the latest information on a plurality of patients has already been stored in this patient information.
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 counts the number of patient identifiers in the patient management table shown in FIG. Here, for example, it is assumed that the count number is “17”. That is, the patient is in a room that accepts 17 urgent patients.
  • the patient information receiving unit 101 accumulates this count result as further patient information in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing patient information indicating the number of patients in a room that accepts emergency cases accumulated by the patient information receiving unit 101.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the display control information stored in the display control information storage unit 107.
  • the display control information is information that designates an area for which display is refused.
  • the display unit 108 obtains the corresponding position information from the dynamic information such as the doctor's dynamic information accumulating unit 106 as shown in FIG. 9 and the display control information shown in FIG. A combination of the doctor identifier (doctor ID in FIG. 9) that does not match the position information shown and the position information is acquired.
  • the combination of the doctor identifier other than the “staff room” indicated by the display control information and the position information corresponding to the position information is acquired.
  • the display part 108 comprises the image which has arrange
  • the image indicating that a doctor is present usually displays a doctor identifier or the like in the area or position where the doctor is present, but does not indicate the doctor identifier, but merely indicates that the doctor exists, You may make it impossible to identify each other.
  • the display unit 108 displays the configured image on a monitor or the like (not shown).
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a display example by the display unit 108.
  • the doctor identifiers of doctors in each area are arranged and displayed on each area.
  • the image is displayed according to the display instruction. However, at a predetermined or indefinite timing designated in advance, the image is displayed while updating the content using the latest dynamic information such as a doctor. Also good.
  • the patient position may be displayed in the same manner as the doctor position, or the doctor display and the patient display may be simultaneously displayed on the same floor plan.
  • FIG. 16 is an input screen for inputting an acceptance request of the acceptance requesting device 5.
  • a lifesaving member places an emergency patient on an ambulance and inputs an acceptance request including designation of a faulty part according to the symptom of the emergency patient from the input screen of the acceptance requesting apparatus 5 as shown in FIG.
  • the patient's heart is determined to be defective, and the heart is designated as the damaged part.
  • the acceptance request accepting unit 501 accepts an acceptance request including “heart”, which is an obstacle part identifier for indicating the heart as the obstacle part, according to the designation of the obstacle part. Then, the acceptance request transmitting unit 502 transmits an acceptance request including the fault site identifier to the emergency medical assistance device 1 via a wireless network or the like.
  • the acceptance request receiving unit 103 of the emergency medical assistance device 1 accepts an acceptance request transmitted from the acceptance requesting device 5 including the fault site identifier via a wireless network or the like.
  • the accepted acceptance request is temporarily stored in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of hospital facility information of the hospital ⁇ .
  • the hospital facility information has items of “room name” and “number of beds”.
  • the “room name” is a room name for receiving the emergency case, and here, the area name as shown in FIG. 7 is used.
  • the bed determination unit 104 compares the total number of beds of all the rooms receiving the emergency case indicated by the hospital facility information stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 100 with the number of patients in the room receiving the emergency case indicated by the patient information. .
  • the total number of beds is the value in the “total” column of the hospital facility information shown in FIG. 17, and is “17” here. Further, since the number of patients indicated by the patient information is “17” as shown in FIG. 13, it is determined that the number of patients and the number of beds are the same.
  • the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is a vacant room for receiving an emergency case, and the medical team determination unit 109 detects a medical team that can handle the emergency case. Start processing. However, since the number of patients is not smaller than the number of beds here, the bed determination unit 104 determines whether there is a patient that can be transferred to the current patient.
  • FIG. 18 shows transfer destination candidate facility information stored in advance in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102.
  • the transfer destination candidate facility information has items of “transfer destination” and “empty”.
  • the “transfer destination” is an item indicating a hospital facility as a transfer destination, and here, the same value as the “transfer destination” of the patient information shown in FIG. 12 is used.
  • “Availability” indicates whether a bed is available in each facility. For example, the value “ ⁇ ” indicates that there is a vacancy, and the value “x” indicates that there is no vacancy.
  • the bed determination unit 104 detects a record in which the value of “transferability” is “ ⁇ ” in the patient information shown in FIG. 12, that is, a record indicating that the patient can be transferred.
  • a record with “P002” as “patient identifier” is detected as a record with “ ⁇ ” as the value of “transferability”.
  • the bed determination unit 104 determines that the “transfer destination” value is the value of the “transfer destination” item of the record detected from FIG. Is detected, and it is determined whether the value of the “free” item of the record is “ ⁇ ”, that is, transfer is possible.
  • the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is a patient that can be transferred to the room that receives the emergency case. For this reason, the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is a vacancy in the room for receiving the emergency case. Then, the medical team determination unit 109 starts a process of detecting a medical team that can deal with an emergency case.
  • the transfer destination candidate facility information indicates that there is no bed available first, there is no bed available in the room to receive the emergency case, and there is no patient that can be transferred among the patients who are present, so make a bed available. It will not be possible. For this reason, the response transmission / reception unit 110 transmits information indicating that it is impossible to respond to the emergency case to the acceptance requesting device 5.
  • the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is a room in the room for receiving an emergency, and the medical team determination unit 109 starts a process of detecting a medical team that can handle the emergency.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 reads one record of the dynamic information such as a doctor stored in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown) as illustrated in FIG.
  • a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown) as illustrated in FIG.
  • a record whose “doctor ID” is “A001” is read.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 uses the schedule information received by the schedule information reception unit 1061 to determine whether or not the schedule of the doctor indicated by the “doctor ID” is a possible response. Judgment.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of schedule information received and accumulated by the schedule information receiving means 1061.
  • the schedule information is stored in association with the doctor identifier.
  • This schedule information is schedule information of a doctor whose doctor identifier is “A001”.
  • the schedule information receiving unit 1061 accumulates schedule information received from a doctor or the like at an arbitrary timing.
  • the schedule information is information in which time is associated with an action schedule. It is assumed that the time for which the action schedule is “emergency charge” is predetermined in the schedule to be a time that can deal with an emergency patient.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 determines the action schedule in the time zone including the current time of the doctor whose doctor identifier is “A001”. Is determined to be “emergency officer”.
  • the doctor AS001 is currently in emergency on the schedule. It is determined that it can be handled.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 uses the dynamic history information such as the doctor shown in FIG. 10 to enable the doctor A001 to respond to the emergency case. It is determined whether or not it is in a state.
  • the location information is other than “operating room”, the history of the time until 5 minutes before that, and the location information is “operating room”
  • the latest time and the earliest time indicated by the detected history are detected. It is determined whether or not the difference is less than 5 minutes.
  • the doctor indicates that the doctor is incapable of handling.
  • the reason for not being able to cope with such a case is that, for example, it is considered that the doctor has left the area other than the operating room to temporarily search for materials and tools necessary for the operation at the start of the operation. .
  • it is determined that a state capable of handling an emergency is indicated.
  • the “position information” in the history of the latest time “14:50” is “treatment room”, not “operating room”, and the time two minutes before that The position information of the history of “14:48” is “operating room”, and before that, the history of the position information of “operating room” continues until the time “13:10”.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 determines that the dynamic history information such as the doctor is the doctor A001. Judge that it indicates that the patient is ready for an emergency.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 acquires the doctor identifier “A001” included in the record of dynamic information such as a doctor, and accumulates the information in a storage medium (not shown) as information indicating a doctor who can handle an emergency patient.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram showing doctor identifiers accumulated by the medical team determination unit 109 as information indicating doctors capable of handling emergency cases at the time when the above processing is completed for all records of dynamic information such as doctors. .
  • the medical team determination unit 109 reads the failure site identifier “heart” included in the acceptance request from a storage unit (not shown) or the like, and selects a medical activity identifier group associated with the medical activity identifier corresponding to the failure site identifier. Obtain from static information such as doctors.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of static information such as doctors stored in the static information storage unit 105 such as doctors.
  • the static information such as a doctor has items of “team name”, “medical practice”, and “doctor ID”.
  • Team name is the name of a medical team constituted by doctors corresponding to doctor identifiers constituting one doctor identifier group.
  • One medical team name corresponds to one doctor identifier group.
  • the “medical practice” is a medical practice identifier for identifying a medical practice that can be performed by the medical team indicated by one doctor identifier group.
  • the medical practice identifier the same information as the information used for the above-mentioned “failure site identifier” is used.
  • doctor ID is a doctor identifier constituting one doctor identifier group. You may think that it is a doctor identifier of the doctor who comprises one medical team.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 detects a record having a value that matches the failure site identifier “heart” included in the reception request as the value of “medical action” in the static information such as a doctor shown in FIG.
  • the “doctor ID” value is acquired for each team name.
  • the record whose “team name” is “A” and the record of “B” includes “heart”, the record whose “team name” is “A”
  • the “doctor ID” and the “doctor ID” of the record whose “team name” is “B” are respectively acquired and temporarily stored in a memory or the like for each “team name” value.
  • FIG. 22 is a doctor ID management table for managing “doctor IDs” temporarily stored by the medical team determination unit 109 for each “team name” value.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 first obtains the “doctor ID” acquired from the doctor identifier group of “team name” “A” among the temporarily stored “doctor IDs” as shown in FIG. 20 is sequentially read out, and it is determined whether or not there is a doctor identifier that matches the doctor ID that has been read out among the doctor identifiers of doctors that can deal with the emergency shown in FIG. 20, and the number of matching "doctor ID” is counted. I will do it.
  • the doctor identifiers that match the “doctor ID” of “A001”, “A002”, and “A004” in the group of doctor identifiers of “team name” “A” of static information such as doctors are shown in FIG.
  • the count result at this time is “3”. Then, when the processing for all “doctor IDs” acquired from the doctor identifier group of “team name” “A” is completed, it is determined whether or not the count result is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. .
  • the pre-specified condition indicates that the value designated in advance is half the number of doctor identifiers constituting each doctor identifier group. That is, the count number of the doctor identifier that matches the “doctor ID” acquired from the “team name” doctor identifier group “A” is the “doctor ID” that constitutes the “team name” doctor identifier group “A”.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency case.
  • the count result is “less than 2”
  • the medical team determines The unit 109 determines that there is no medical team capable of handling the emergency case.
  • the response availability transmission unit 110 transmits information indicating that the emergency case can be handled to the acceptance requesting device 5.
  • the information indicating that the emergency case can be handled is, for example, information such as “Hospital ⁇ : Acceptance of emergency case”.
  • the medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is no medical team that can respond to the emergency case, the medical team determination unit 109 transmits information to the acceptance requesting device 5 that the emergency case cannot be handled.
  • the information indicating that it is impossible to handle an emergency is, for example, information such as “Hospital ⁇ : Unacceptable emergency”.
  • the response availability receiving unit 503 of the acceptance requesting device 5 receives information indicating that the emergency request transmitted from the emergency medical support device 1 is available.
  • the response availability output unit 504 configures image information using information indicating that it is possible to respond to a sudden illness, and displays information indicating that the response is possible on a monitor or the like.
  • FIG. 23 is a view showing a display example by the availability output unit 504.
  • the determination result of bed availability and the determination result of the presence or absence of a medical team determined by a combination of static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to accept an emergency patient.
  • the emergency medical support system determines whether each hospital is capable of handling an emergency using information from the wireless communication device 3 and the patient wireless communication device 4 received at each of a plurality of hospitals. In this way, centralized management of the transportation of emergency cases is made possible.
  • FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the emergency medical support system 20 according to the present embodiment.
  • the emergency medical support system 20 includes an emergency medical support device 2, one or more wireless communication devices 3, one or more patient wireless communication devices 4, and one or more acceptance requesting devices 5.
  • the one or more wireless communication devices 3 and the one or more patient wireless communication devices 4 are respectively installed in one or more hospitals and attached to doctors and patients of each hospital.
  • the wireless communication device 3 Since the configurations and operations of the wireless communication device 3, the patient wireless communication device 4, and the acceptance requesting device 5 are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.
  • the wireless communication device 3 and the patient wireless communication device 4 include a storage unit (not shown) such as a storage medium that stores a hospital identifier that is an identifier of a hospital in which each wireless communication device 3 and the patient wireless communication device 4 is used. And the wireless transmitter 303 and the patient wireless transmitter 402 may transmit the hospital identifier together with the doctor identifier and the patient identifier.
  • the hospital identifier will be described later.
  • the emergency medical support device 2 includes a hospital facility information storage unit 200, a patient information reception unit 201, a transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 202, an acceptance request reception unit 203, a bed determination unit 204, a static information storage unit 205 such as a doctor, a doctor An isodynamic information reception unit 206, a display control information storage unit 207, a display unit 208, a medical team determination unit 209, and a response availability transmission unit 210 are provided.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 206 such as a doctor includes a schedule information receiving unit 2061 and a position information receiving unit 2062.
  • the hospital facility information storage unit 200 stores one or more pairs of a hospital identifier for identifying a hospital and hospital facility information in the hospital facility information storage unit 100 described above.
  • a set of a hospital identifier and hospital facility information may be considered to be associated with a hospital identifier and hospital facility information. This also applies to other information sets.
  • the hospital identifier is information for the emergency medical support apparatus 2 to identify a hospital that supports the determination of whether or not to accept an emergency patient. For example, it may be a hospital name or a character string assigned to a hospital. It may also be a hospital phone number.
  • the hospital facility information stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 200 is hospital facility information regarding a hospital identified by a hospital identifier that forms a pair with the hospital facility information. Other configurations and the like are the same as those of the hospital facility information storage unit 100 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the patient information receiving unit 201 receives at least one set of a hospital identifier and patient information in the patient information receiving unit 101 described above, and accumulates at least temporarily.
  • the patient information receiving unit 201 may receive a hospital identifier transmitted in association with patient information or the like.
  • the patient information reception unit 201 determines whether or not an antenna that has received information transmitted from the patient wireless communication device 4 or the like, or an RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna is installed in which hospital. And the hospital identifier of the hospital where the antenna or the like is installed may be acquired.
  • the position of the patient wireless communication device 4 or the like is calculated from the position of the antenna that has received the information transmitted from the patient wireless communication device 4 or the like, and the hospital built on the area including the calculated position
  • a hospital identifier may be acquired.
  • the patient information here is patient information in a hospital indicated by a hospital identifier forming one set.
  • Other configurations are the same as those of the patient information receiving unit 101 described above, and thus description thereof is omitted here.
  • the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 202 stores the set of the hospital identifier and transfer destination candidate facility information in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 described above.
  • the transfer destination candidate facility information stored in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 202 is specifically transfer destination candidate facility information for a hospital identified by a hospital identifier paired with the transfer destination candidate facility information.
  • Other configurations and the like are the same as those of the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the acceptance request receiving unit 203 has the same configuration and operation as the above-described acceptance request receiving unit 103, the description thereof is omitted here.
  • the bed determination unit 204 acquires a hospital identifier of a hospital having a bed available by using the hospital facility information and the patient information when the reception request reception unit 203 receives the reception request in the bed determination unit 104 described above. . Specifically, it is determined whether there is a bed available for each hospital identifier using patient information and hospital facility information associated with the same hospital identifier. And the hospital identifier when there is a vacancy is acquired. Further, the bed determination unit 104 uses the hospital facility information and the number of patients included in the patient information and the transferability information associated with the same hospital identifier to determine whether there is a bed available for each hospital identifier. It is possible to determine and acquire a hospital identifier when there is a bed available.
  • the bed determination unit 104 uses the hospital facility information and the number of patients included in the patient information, transferability information, and transfer destination candidate facility information associated with the same hospital identifier, for each hospital identifier. It may be determined whether there is a vacancy, and a hospital identifier when there is a vacant bed may be acquired. Except for performing processing for each hospital identifier, the process for determining whether or not a bed is available is the same as that for the bed determination unit 104 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.
  • the static information storage unit 205 such as a doctor stores the set of a hospital identifier and static information such as a doctor in the static information storage unit 105 described above.
  • the static information such as doctors stored here is static information such as doctors regarding the doctors of the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier. Since other configurations are the same as those of the static information storage unit 105 such as the doctor described above, description thereof is omitted here.
  • the doctor etc. dynamic information receiving unit 206 uses the information output from the radio communication device such as the radio communication device 3 in the aforementioned doctor etc. dynamic information accepting unit 106 to use the doctor etc. dynamic information associated with the hospital identifier. It is designed to accept information.
  • the dynamic information such as a doctor received here is dynamic information such as a doctor about the doctor of the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier.
  • the hospital identifier can be received using information output from the wireless communication device 3 or the like by the same processing as the patient information receiving unit 201 described above. Since other configurations are the same as those of the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as the doctor described above, the description thereof is omitted here.
  • the schedule information receiving unit 2061 is configured to receive the schedule information associated with the hospital identifier in the schedule information receiving unit 1061 described above.
  • the schedule information received here is schedule information for the doctor of the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier.
  • Other configurations are the same as those of the schedule information accepting unit 1061 described above, and thus description thereof is omitted here.
  • the location information receiving unit 2062 is configured to receive the location information associated with the hospital identifier in the above-described location information receiving unit 1062.
  • This position information can be received using, for example, information output by the wireless communication device 3 or the like by the same process as the patient information receiving unit 201 described above.
  • This position information is the position information of the doctor in the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier.
  • the other configuration is the same as that of the position information receiving unit 1062 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted here.
  • the display control information storage unit 207 is configured to store the display control information associated with the hospital identifier in the display control information storage unit 107 described above.
  • the display control information stored here is display control information in the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier. Since other configurations are the same as those of the display control information storage unit 107 described above, description thereof is omitted here.
  • the display unit 208 allows the display unit 108 described above to display doctor identifiers by hospital identifier. Other configurations are the same as those of the display unit 208 described above, except that the doctor identifiers to be displayed are acquired for each hospital identifier and the display control information is acquired for each hospital identifier. Omitted.
  • the medical team judgment unit 209 can respond to an emergency using static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor.
  • static information such as a doctor
  • dynamic information such as a doctor.
  • the hospital identifier of the hospital where the medical team exists is acquired.
  • the medical team determination unit 209 can perform emergency treatment for each hospital identifier using static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor that are associated with the same hospital identifier. It is determined whether or not a team exists, and a hospital identifier in which a medical team exists is acquired.
  • the medical team determination unit 209 uses the medical action identifier included in the static information such as a doctor and the fault site identifier included in the acceptance request in the medical team determination unit 209 described above to be able to deal with an emergency case.
  • a hospital identifier of a hospital where a medical team capable of handling emergency cases is present Specifically, for each medical identifier, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases and currently capable of handling emergency cases, and the hospital identifier where the medical team exists is determined. You may get it.
  • the medical team determination unit 209 is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the static information such as a doctor and the dynamic history information such as a doctor in the medical team determination unit 209 described above, and currently has an emergency
  • the hospital identifier of the hospital where the medical team that can handle this is present may be acquired. Specifically, for each medical identifier, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases and currently capable of handling emergency cases, and the hospital identifier where the medical team exists is determined. You may get it.
  • the medical team determination unit 209 is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the schedule information and the position information included in the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor in the medical team determination unit 209 described above. You may make it acquire the hospital identifier of the hospital where there is a medical team that is available and can handle emergency cases. Specifically, for each medical identifier, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases and currently capable of handling emergency cases, and the hospital identifier where the medical team exists is determined. You may get it.
  • the medical team determination unit 209 uses the state identifier of each doctor included in the dynamic information such as the doctor in the medical team determination unit 209 described above, and the hospital identifier of the hospital where the medical team capable of handling the emergency patient exists. You may make it acquire. Specifically, for each medical identifier, it may be determined whether there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency patient, and a hospital identifier in which the medical team exists may be acquired.
  • the response availability transmission unit 210 is configured to transmit one or more hospital identifiers acquired by the bed determination unit 204 and the medical team determination unit 209 to the external device in the response availability transmission unit 210 described above.
  • the one or more hospital identifiers acquired together mean hospital identifiers that exist in common among the acquired hospital identifiers.
  • the hospital identifier to be transmitted may be considered as information indicating that correspondence is possible.
  • the response transmission / reception unit 210 may transmit information indicating that the response is not possible when there is no hospital identifier acquired by both the bed determination unit 204 and the medical team determination unit 209. Since the configuration other than the above is the same as that of the above-described correspondence availability transmitter 210, description thereof is omitted here.
  • a hospital identifier is accepted, and dynamic information such as a doctor, patient information, and the like are accumulated in association with the hospital identifier. Is. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 3, whether there is a medical team that can be handled using only patient information associated with the same hospital identifier, static information such as a doctor, dynamic information such as a doctor, and the like.
  • the hospitality identifier 210 is used to transmit the hospital identifier when it is determined that there is a compatible medical team to the acceptance requesting device 5. For this reason, detailed description of the operation of the emergency medical assistance device 2 is omitted here.
  • step S201 to step S219 information such as doctor dynamic information used in the processing from step S201 to step S219 is information associated with the kth hospital identifier corresponding to the value of the counter k acquired in step S2501. Are used as appropriate.
  • Step S2500 The supportability transmission unit 210 substitutes 1 for the counter k.
  • Step S2501 The correspondence availability transmitter 210 determines whether there is a kth hospital identifier. If there is, the process proceeds to step S201, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2505.
  • the number of hospital identifiers may be stored in advance in a storage medium (not shown).
  • Step S2502 The bed determination unit 204 acquires the kth hospital identifier and stores it in a storage medium (not shown).
  • the medical team determination unit 209 acquires the kth hospital identifier and stores it in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
  • Step S2504 Correspondence propriety transmission section 210 increments the value of counter k by 1. Then, the process returns to step S2502.
  • Step S2505 The availability transmitting unit 210 determines whether there is a hospital identifier that matches the hospital identifier acquired in step S2502 and the hospital identifier acquired in step S2503. If there is, a common hospital identifier is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S2506. If not, the process proceeds to step S2507.
  • Step S2506 The correspondence availability transmitting unit 210 transmits the hospital identifier acquired in Step S2505 to the acceptance requesting device 5. Then, the process returns to the upper process.
  • Step S2507 The response transmission / reception unit 210 transmits information indicating that the response is disabled to the acceptance requesting device 5. Then, the process returns to the upper process.
  • FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram of the emergency medical support system 20.
  • the emergency medical support device 2 is arranged in one emergency center or the like.
  • the emergency medical support device 2 is connected to the antennas 121 to 128 and the antennas 131 to 138 installed on the walls of the rooms of the emergency wards of a plurality of hospitals via a network or the like.
  • the antennas 121 to 128 are installed in the hospital ⁇ and the antennas 131 to 138 are installed in the hospital ⁇ .
  • An RFID tag reader / writer (not shown) is attached to each antenna, and each RFID tag reader / writer is connected to the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor of the emergency medical support apparatus 1 via a network. It shall be.
  • a device identifier is assigned to each RFID tag reader / writer, and a hospital identifier of each hospital is stored in the RFID tag reader / writer in the same hospital.
  • the hospital identifier may be an IP address, a MAC address, or the like.
  • the wireless transmission unit 303 of the doctor state management card 30 attached to the chest by the doctor is a doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301 at a predetermined time interval, in this case, “A001”
  • the state identifier “available” received by the identifier receiving unit 302 is read, and a signal including the read doctor identifier and the state identifier is transmitted.
  • the antenna installed in the treatment room in the emergency ward of the hospital ⁇ receives a signal including the doctor identifier transmitted by the doctor state management card 30 of the doctor A001 and the state identifier. Then, the RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna 125 extracts the doctor identifier “A001” and the state identifier “available” from the received signal. Then, the device identifier “RF125” assigned to the own device and the hospital identifier “H001” of the hospital ⁇ are assigned to the extracted information and transmitted to the emergency medical assistance device 1.
  • the hospital identifier may be an IP address, a MAC address, or the like.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 206 such as a doctor receives information transmitted from the RFID tag of each hospital.
  • information transmitted from an RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna 125 is received.
  • the position of the doctor which is information indicating the position of the antenna that has received the information transmitted by the doctor status management card 30, as in the first embodiment.
  • a reception position management table as shown in FIG. 7 used at this time, a reception position management table (not shown) associated with the hospital identifier received together with the apparatus identifier is used.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 206 such as a doctor also acquires a doctor identifier, a state identifier, and a hospital identifier included in the received information.
  • the acquired doctor identifier, state identifier, and position information are stored in a storage unit (not shown) in combination with the hospital identifier.
  • doctor C003 is in the treatment room in the emergency ward of hospital beta whose hospital identifier is “H002”,
  • the antenna installed in the treatment room in the emergency ward of the hospital ⁇ receives a signal including the doctor identifier and the state identifier transmitted from the doctor state management card 30 of the doctor C003, and the RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna is
  • the doctor identifier and the state identifier are added to the RFID tag reader / writer device identifier and the hospital identifier “H002” of the hospital ⁇ , and transmitted to the emergency medical assistance device 1.
  • the dynamic information receiving unit 206 such as a doctor receives the information transmitted from the RFID tag reader / writer, acquires the position information of the doctor using the apparatus identifier of the received information, and acquires the position information, the state identifier, and the apparatus identifier. Are stored in a storage unit (not shown).
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of dynamic information such as a doctor accumulated in this way.
  • the hospital identifier is a hospital identifier paired with the dynamic information such as a doctor. This dynamic information such as the doctor is associated with the hospital identifier. It is different from specific information.
  • doctor identifiers of doctors in different hospitals may be duplicated.
  • the RFID tag reader transmits information such as a patient identifier to which the hospital identifier and the device identifier of the hospital where the patient is located to the emergency medical support device 1 so that the hospital identifier and the patient information Can be stored.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of patient information accumulated in this way.
  • schedule information, transfer permission / inhibition information, and the like are also given and stored with a hospital identifier of a hospital where doctors and patients are targets of such information.
  • the acceptance request receiving unit 203 of the emergency medical assistance device 2 accepts the acceptance request from the acceptance request device 5.
  • the emergency medical support device 2 determines whether or not the hospital ⁇ can cope with an emergency using the information associated with the hospital identifier “H001” of the hospital ⁇ which is the first hospital. To do. In addition, the order etc. which select a hospital identifier are not ask
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of hospital facility information associated with a hospital identifier stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 200.
  • the hospital facility information has items of “room name”, “number of beds”, and “hospital identifier”.
  • “Hospital identifier” is a hospital identifier.
  • the bed determination unit 204 includes the number of beds of all the rooms that receive the emergency indicated by the record having the corresponding “hospital identifier” value “H001” in the hospital facility information stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 200. The total is calculated and compared with the number of patients in the room that receives the emergency case indicated by the patient information associated with the hospital identifier “H001”. Here, it is assumed that the number of patients is determined to be smaller than the number of beds.
  • the bed determination unit 204 determines that there is an empty bed and accumulates the hospital identifier “H001” in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
  • the medical team determination unit 209 selects one of the dynamic information such as a doctor associated with the hospital identifier “H001” stored in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown) as illustrated in FIG. Read the record.
  • a record in which the hospital identifier is “H001” and the “doctor ID” is “A001” is read.
  • the medical team determination unit 209 Since it is determined that the response is possible, the medical team determination unit 209 has received whether the schedule of the doctor whose “doctor ID” is “A001” is a schedule that can be supported or not by the schedule information reception unit 2061. Of the schedule information associated with the hospital identifier of each hospital, a determination is made using the schedule associated with the hospital identifier “H001” and the doctor identifier “A001”. Note that the determination as to whether or not the schedule is available is the same as in the above specific example, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.
  • the medical team determination unit 209 determines the schedule information in the dynamic history information such as doctors stored in association with the hospital identifier of each hospital. Using the dynamic history information such as the doctor associated with the hospital identifier “H001” and the doctor identifier “A001”, it is determined whether or not the doctor is in a compatible state. Note that the determination as to whether or not it is possible to respond using the dynamic history information such as a doctor is the same as in the above specific example, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.
  • the medical team determination unit 209 determines that the dynamic history information such as a doctor indicates that the doctor A001 is in a state capable of handling an emergency patient, the medical team determination unit 209 determines that the doctor identifier “ "A001" is stored in a storage medium or the like (not shown) in association with the hospital identifier "H001" as information indicating a doctor capable of handling an emergency.
  • the medical team determination unit 209 uses the failure part identifier included in the reception request and the medical action information included in the static information such as a doctor associated with the hospital identifier “H001” to determine the hospital identifier. It is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of performing a medical action on the emergency site in the hospital that is “H001”. The process of determining the presence or absence of a medical team that can be handled using the faulty part identifier and the medical practice information is the same as in the above specific example, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. When it is determined that there is a medical team that can be handled, the medical team determination unit 209 acquires the hospital identifier “H001” and stores it in a storage medium (not shown).
  • FIG. 30 shows hospital identifiers acquired by the bed determination unit 204 as a result of performing the above processing using all hospital identifiers.
  • FIG. 31 shows hospital identifiers acquired by the medical team determination unit 209 as a result of performing the above processing using all hospital identifiers.
  • the availability transmission unit 210 compares the hospital identifier acquired by the bed determination unit 204 shown in FIG. 30 with the hospital identifier acquired by the medical team determination unit 209 shown in FIG.
  • the hospital identifier to be detected is detected.
  • the response propriety transmitting unit 210 transmits the matching hospital identifier to the acceptance requesting device 5.
  • the acceptance request device 5 receives the hospital identifiers “H001” and “H004”, and the response output unit 504 displays the hospital identifier on a monitor (not shown).
  • FIG. 32 shows a display example of the hospital identifier by the acceptance requesting device 5.
  • the hospital identifier is an identifier other than the hospital name
  • the hospital identifier is converted into the hospital name and displayed using information indicating the correspondence between the hospital identifier and the hospital name prepared in advance in the storage unit or the like. It may be.
  • patient information associated with a hospital identifier can be used to handle an emergency from a plurality of hospitals. It is possible to select a suitable hospital.
  • the wireless communication device 3 acquires information on the position of the own device, in other words, the position of the attached doctor.
  • a position information acquisition unit 304 may be provided.
  • the wireless transmission unit 303 may transmit information including information on the position together with the doctor identifier and the state identifier to the emergency medical assistance device 1.
  • This position information may be considered as the position information of the doctor described above.
  • the position information acquisition unit 304 can be realized by GPS or the like, for example. This GPS is preferably provided with, for example, an antenna or an integrated circuit for acquiring weak GPS satellite radio waves or the like indoors.
  • the wireless communication device 3 receives information indicating a position transmitted from an antenna or the like in each area of the hospital, and use this information as position information as it is. By doing in this way, in the emergency medical assistance apparatus 1, processing can be reduced without performing the process etc. which acquire position information.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 also obtains information on the position of the own device, in other words, the position of the attached patient, similar to the position information acquisition unit 304.
  • a patient position information acquisition unit 403 may be provided.
  • the patient wireless communication device 4 may transmit information including this position information to the emergency medical support device 1 together with the patient identifier.
  • This position information may be considered as the patient position information described above.
  • each process may be realized by centralized processing by a single device (system), or by distributed processing by a plurality of devices. May be.
  • two or more communication means such as an information transmission unit
  • two or more communication means existing in one apparatus may be physically realized by one medium.
  • information related to processing executed by each component for example, information received, acquired, selected, generated, transmitted, and received by each component.
  • information such as threshold values, mathematical formulas, addresses, etc. used by each component in processing is retained temporarily or over a long period of time on a recording medium (not shown) even when not explicitly stated in the above description. It may be.
  • the storage of information in the recording medium (not shown) may be performed by each component or a storage unit (not shown).
  • reading of information from the recording medium (not shown) may be performed by each component or a reading unit (not shown).
  • the emergency medical support device may be a stand-alone device or a server device in a server / client system.
  • the output unit or the reception unit receives an input or outputs a screen via a communication line.
  • each component may be configured by dedicated hardware, or a component that can be realized by software may be realized by executing a program.
  • each component can be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory.
  • this program accepts patient information including the number of patients in a room that accepts an emergency, and at least temporarily stores a patient information reception unit that stores the emergency information and a room that receives the emergency.
  • a dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor for receiving dynamic information such as a doctor including one or more doctor identifiers from a wireless communication device attached to each of one or more doctors in the area where the act is performed; Number of beds in the room that accepts emergency cases, which is information about hospital facilities stored in the reception request reception unit and the hospital facility information storage unit that receives an acceptance request that is information indicating a request for acceptance of an emergency case from an external device.
  • a bed determination unit for determining whether there is a bed available using the hospital facility information and the patient information at least, and the reception request reception unit When receiving a request, using static information such as a doctor having a group of doctor identifiers having one or more doctor identifiers identifying a doctor stored in a static information storage unit such as a doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor, A medical team determination unit that determines whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency, the bed determination unit determines that a bed is available, and the medical team determination unit When it is determined that there is a medical team that can be used, this is a program for functioning as a supportability transmission unit that transmits information indicating that support is possible to the external device.
  • processing performed by hardware for example, processing performed by a modem or an interface card in the transmission step (only performed by hardware). Not included) is not included.
  • the functions realized by the program do not include functions that can only be realized by hardware.
  • a function that can be realized only by hardware such as a modem or an interface card in an acquisition unit that acquires information or an output unit that outputs information is not included in the function realized by the program.
  • the computer that executes this program may be singular or plural. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
  • FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the external appearance of a computer that executes the program and realizes the emergency medical assistance device according to the embodiment.
  • the above-described embodiment can be realized by computer hardware and a computer program executed on the computer hardware.
  • a computer system 900 includes a computer 901 including a CD-ROM (Compact Read Only Memory) drive 905 and an FD (Floppy (registered trademark) Disk) drive 906, a keyboard 902, a mouse 903, a monitor 904, and the like. Is provided.
  • a computer 901 including a CD-ROM (Compact Read Only Memory) drive 905 and an FD (Floppy (registered trademark) Disk) drive 906, a keyboard 902, a mouse 903, a monitor 904, and the like. Is provided.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an internal configuration of the computer system 900.
  • a computer 901 in addition to the CD-ROM drive 905 and the FD drive 906, a computer 901 is connected to an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 911, a ROM 912 for storing a program such as a bootup program, and the MPU 911.
  • MPU Micro Processing Unit
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • a RAM Random Access Memory
  • a bus 915 that temporarily stores program instructions and a temporary storage space
  • the computer 901 may include a network card (not shown) that provides connection to the LAN.
  • a program for causing the computer system 900 to execute the functions of the emergency medical support device and the like according to the above-described embodiment is stored in the CD-ROM 921 or the FD 922, inserted into the CD-ROM drive 905 or the FD drive 906, and the hard disk 914. May be forwarded to. Instead, the program may be transmitted to the computer 901 via a network (not shown) and stored in the hard disk 914. The program is loaded into the RAM 913 when executed. The program may be loaded directly from the CD-ROM 921, the FD 922, or the network.
  • the program does not necessarily include an operating system (OS) or a third-party program that causes the computer 901 to execute the functions of the emergency medical assistance device according to the above-described embodiment.
  • the program may include only a part of an instruction that calls an appropriate function (module) in a controlled manner and obtains a desired result. How the computer system 900 operates is well known and will not be described in detail.
  • the emergency medical support device and the like according to the present invention are suitable as a device for supporting emergency medical care, and are particularly useful as a device and the like for assisting determination of a delivery destination of an emergency patient.

Abstract

Disclosed is an emergency medical support device for suitably determining whether an emergency patient can be accepted. The emergency medical support device is provided with a bed determination unit (104) for determining availability of beds using hospital facility information comprising the number of beds available in rooms for accepting an emergency patient and patient information, including the number of patients of the rooms for accepting the emergency patient, that has been received by a patient information receiving unit (101); a medical team determination unit (109) for determining, upon reception of an acceptance request, whether a medical team capable of dealing with the emergency patient is available using doctor static information comprising a doctor identifier group and doctor dynamic information including doctor identifiers received from wireless communication devices of doctors present in an area in which medical service is to be performed for the emergency patient; and an availability transmission unit (110) for transmitting information indicating availability to an external device if the bed determination unit (104) has determined that a bed is available and the medical team determination unit (109) has determined that a medical team capable of dealing with the emergency patient is present.

Description

救急医療支援装置、医師状態管理用端末、救急医療支援方法、およびプログラムEmergency medical support device, doctor condition management terminal, emergency medical support method, and program
　本発明は、救急医療を支援する装置等に関するものであり、特に、急患の搬送先の決定を支援する装置等に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a device that supports emergency medical care, and more particularly to a device that supports the determination of the delivery destination of an emergency patient.
　従来の技術として、医療施設が、現在の医療施設情報を、通信センター、通信衛星、救急指令センターを介して所轄の消防署内の消防署用端末に定期的に送信し、消防署は、急患の通報を受けると救急車を出動させ、救急車からの無線連絡を受け、かつ消防署用端末を使用して、急患に最も適切に対応することができる医療施設を、患者の症状情報と医療施設情報とを照合することにより選定し、その後、選定された医療施設への連絡と症状情報の送信とを専用インターネット網を介して行うものが知られている（例えば、特許文献１参照）。
　また、従来の技術として、複数の病院のうちのいずれかの病院が、救急車の備える情報処理装置から送信された患者の情報を他の病院の情報処理装置へ配信し、複数の病院の情報処理装置それぞれが、他の装置から送信された情報を受信して、他の病院の情報処理装置、救急車が備える情報処理装置へ送信し、救急車の備える情報処理装置から送信された受け入れ先問合わせ情報と病院情報管理サーバが保持する受入可否判定情報との比較に基づいて、患者の受け入れできる医療施設の識別情報を決定するようにしたものが知られている（例えば、特許文献２参照）。 As a conventional technology, medical facilities regularly send current medical facility information to the fire station terminal in the fire station in charge through the communication center, communication satellite, and emergency command center, and the fire station reports emergency cases. Upon receiving the ambulance, the ambulance receives radio communication from the ambulance and uses the fire department terminal to collate the patient's symptom information with the medical facility information for the medical facility that can best respond to the emergency case. It is known that, after that, the communication to the selected medical facility and the transmission of symptom information are performed via a dedicated Internet network (for example, see Patent Document 1).
In addition, as a conventional technique, one of a plurality of hospitals distributes patient information transmitted from an information processing apparatus included in an ambulance to information processing apparatuses of other hospitals, and processes information of the plurality of hospitals. Each device receives the information transmitted from the other device, transmits it to the information processing device of the other hospital, the information processing device provided in the ambulance, and the receiving destination inquiry information transmitted from the information processing device provided in the ambulance Based on a comparison between the hospital information management server and the acceptance determination information held by the hospital information management server, identification information of medical facilities that can be accepted by a patient is determined (for example, see Patent Document 2).
特開２００２－２５１４７４号公報（第１頁、第１図等）JP 2002-251474 A (first page, FIG. 1 etc.) 特開２００６－２７６９２２号公報（第１頁、第１図等）JP-A-2006-276922 (first page, FIG. 1 etc.)
　しかしながら、従来の救急医療支援装置においては、急患の受入の可否を適切に判断することが困難であるという課題があった。例えば、従来の技術においては、現在の医療施設の情報を病院側で手入力して作成しなければならなかったため、常に最新の情報を集めて入力しておくということが困難であった。このため、最新の情報を用いて、受入の判断を行うことが困難であった。また、このような情報収集や入力を行うための専門のスタッフを病院側で用意することは、非常にコストがかかるため、導入および維持が困難であった。また、医療施設の情報を人間が入力する必要があるため、人為的な入力ミス等が発生する可能性があり、このような入力ミスが発生すると、適切な支援ができなくなる場合があるという課題があった。 However, the conventional emergency medical support device has a problem that it is difficult to appropriately determine whether or not an emergency patient can be accepted. For example, in the prior art, the current medical facility information has to be manually input and created on the hospital side, so it is difficult to always collect and input the latest information. For this reason, it has been difficult to determine acceptance using the latest information. In addition, it is very expensive to prepare a specialized staff for collecting and inputting such information on the hospital side, so that it is difficult to introduce and maintain the staff. In addition, it is necessary for humans to input information on medical facilities, and human input errors may occur. When such input errors occur, appropriate support may not be possible. was there.
　本発明の救急医療支援装置は、病院の施設に関する情報であり、急患を受け入れる部屋の病床数を少なくとも有する病院施設情報を格納し得る病院施設情報格納部と、急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の数を含む患者情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する患者情報受付部と、医師を識別する１以上の医師識別子を有する医師識別子群を有する医師等静的情報を格納し得る医師等静的情報格納部と、急患を受け入れる部屋を含む、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域に居る１以上の各医師に装着された無線通信装置から、１以上の医師識別子を含む医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する医師等動的情報受付部と、急患の受け入れの要請を示す情報である受入要請を、外部の装置から受信する受入要請受信部と、病院施設情報および患者情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断するベッド判断部と、受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断する医療チーム判断部と、ベッド判断部がベッドの空きがあると判断し、かつ、医療チーム判断部が急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断した場合、対応可能である旨の情報を外部の装置に送信する対応可否送信部とを備えた救急医療支援装置である。 The emergency medical support device of the present invention is information related to hospital facilities, a hospital facility information storage unit that can store hospital facility information having at least the number of beds in a room that accepts emergency cases, and the number of patients in a room that accepts emergency cases. Static information storage such as a doctor who can store static information such as a doctor having a patient information reception unit that receives and includes at least temporarily a patient information and a doctor identifier group having one or more doctor identifiers for identifying a doctor Receiving dynamic information such as a doctor including one or more doctor identifiers from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors in a region where a medical practice is performed for an emergency patient, including a room and a room for receiving an emergency patient, A dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor that accumulates at least temporarily, an acceptance request receiving unit that receives an acceptance request, which is information indicating a request for accepting an emergency patient, from an external device, and a hospital When the reception request is received by the bed determination unit that determines whether there is a bed available using the setting information and the patient information, and static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor To determine whether there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency, the medical team determination unit determines that there is an empty bed, and the medical team determination unit When it is determined that there is a medical team that can respond, the emergency medical support device includes a response availability transmission unit that transmits information indicating that the medical team can respond to an external device.
　かかる構成により、ベッドの空きがあり、対応可能な医療チームがいる場合に対応が可能である旨を送信することができ、急患の受け入れの可否を適切に判断することができる。特に、医療行為を行う領域にいる医師の医師識別子を無線通信装置から取得することで、医師に大きな負担をかけることなく、正確に急患に対して医療行為を行う領域に居る医師の医師識別子を取得することができるため、医療行為の妨げにならないようにすることができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to transmit a message indicating that a response is possible when there is a bed available and there is a medical team capable of handling, and it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to accept an emergency patient. In particular, by acquiring the doctor identifier of the doctor in the medical practice area from the wireless communication device, the doctor identifier of the doctor in the medical practice area for the emergency medical care can be accurately obtained without imposing a heavy burden on the doctor. Since it can be acquired, it can be prevented from interfering with medical practice.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、患者情報受付部は、１以上の患者に装着された１以上の各無線通信装置から、少なくとも患者であることを示す情報を受信し、患者であることを示す情報を用いて、患者の数を含む患者情報を取得する救急医療支援装置である。 In the emergency medical support device according to the present invention, in the emergency medical support device, the patient information receiving unit receives information indicating that the patient is at least a patient from one or more wireless communication devices attached to one or more patients. This is an emergency medical support device that acquires patient information including the number of patients using information that is received and indicates that the patient is a patient.
　かかる構成により、患者に負担をかけることなく、急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の数の正確な数を取得することができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to obtain an accurate number of patients in a room that accepts an emergency case without burdening the patient.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、病院施設情報格納部は、病院を識別する病院識別子と病院施設情報との組を１組以上格納しており、患者情報受付部は、病院識別子と患者情報との組を１組以上受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積し、医師等静的情報格納部は、病院識別子と医師等静的情報との組を１組以上格納しており、ベッド判断部は、受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、病院施設情報および患者情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがある病院の病院識別子を取得し、医療チーム判断部は、受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得し、対応可否送信部は、ベッド判断部および医療チーム判断部がともに取得した１以上の病院識別子を外部の装置に送信する救急医療支援装置である。 In the emergency medical support device according to the present invention, the hospital facility information storage unit stores at least one set of a hospital identifier for identifying a hospital and hospital facility information, and receives patient information. The department accepts one or more pairs of hospital identifiers and patient information and accumulates at least temporarily, and the static information storage unit such as doctors stores one or more pairs of hospital identifiers and static information such as doctors. The bed determination unit, when the reception request reception unit receives the reception request, acquires the hospital identifier of the hospital where the bed is vacant using the hospital facility information and the patient information, and the medical team determination unit When the acceptance request receiving unit receives the acceptance request, it uses the static information such as doctors and the dynamic information such as doctors to obtain the hospital identifier of the hospital where there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases and Transmitter determines bed And is an emergency medical support device that transmits one or more of the hospital identifier medical team determination unit has both get to an external device.
　かかる構成により、病院別に急患の受け入れ可否を判断して、急患受け入れ可能な病院を提示することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether hospitals can accept emergency patients by hospitals and to present hospitals that can accept emergency patients.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、受入要請は、急患の障害の部位を識別する障害部位識別子を含み、医師等静的情報は、医師を識別する１以上の医師識別子を有する医師識別子群と、医師識別子群で識別される１以上の医師を含む医療チームが行える医療行為を識別する１以上の医療行為識別子とを有し、医療チーム判断部は、受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等静的情報が有する医療行為識別子および受入要請が有する障害部位識別子とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームの中で、医師等動的情報を用いて、現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する、または急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得する救急医療支援装置である。 In the emergency medical support device according to the present invention, in the emergency medical support device, the acceptance request includes a fault site identifier that identifies a site of a fault of the emergency patient, and the static information such as a doctor is one or more that identifies the doctor. The medical team determination unit has a doctor identifier group having a doctor identifier and one or more medical action identifiers for identifying a medical action that can be performed by a medical team including one or more doctors identified by the doctor identifier group. When the receiving unit receives the acceptance request, the doctor or the like can dynamically respond to the emergency using the medical action identifier included in the static information such as the doctor and the disorder part identifier included in the acceptance request. The information is used to determine whether there is currently a medical team that can respond to an emergency or to a medical team that is capable of responding to an emergency and is currently capable of responding to an emergency. There is the presence emergency medical support apparatus for acquiring a hospital identifier of hospitals.
　かかる構成により、患者の障害部位に対する医療行為が可能な医療チームの有無により、急患受け入れが可能であるか否かを判断することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not an emergency patient can be accepted depending on the presence or absence of a medical team capable of performing medical treatment for a patient's disordered site.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、医師等動的情報は、医師識別子と、医師が居る位置を示す位置情報との組を１組以上有し、医師等動的情報受付部は、医師等動的情報と、時刻を示す時刻情報とを対応付けた複数の情報である医師等動的履歴情報を、少なくとも一時的に蓄積し、医療チーム判断部は、医師等静的情報および医師等動的履歴情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する、または急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得する救急医療支援装置である。 In the emergency medical support device of the present invention, in the emergency medical support device, the dynamic information such as a doctor has at least one set of a doctor identifier and position information indicating a position where the doctor is located. The medical information receiving unit accumulates dynamic history information such as a doctor, which is a plurality of pieces of information in which dynamic information such as a doctor is associated with time information indicating time, at least temporarily. Is used to determine whether or not there is a medical team that can respond to an emergency, or is currently an emergency This is an emergency medical support device that acquires a hospital identifier of a hospital where there is a medical team that can handle this.
　かかる構成により、医師の位置等の履歴に応じて、急患に対応可能な医療チームの有無を判断することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a medical team capable of handling an emergency according to the history of the doctor's position and the like.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、医師等動的情報受付部は、入力手段を用いて入力された医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する救急医療支援装置である。 In the emergency medical support device according to the present invention, in the emergency medical support device, the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor receives dynamic information such as a doctor input using the input unit, and stores at least temporarily It is a medical support device.
　かかる構成により、無線通信装置から受信した情報以外の医師の情報も利用して、医療チームの有無を判断することができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a medical team by using doctor information other than the information received from the wireless communication device.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、医師等動的情報受付部は、医師識別子と医師識別子で識別される医師のスケジュールに関するスケジュール情報とを受け付けるスケジュール情報受付手段と、医師識別子と医師識別子で識別される医師の位置情報とを受け付ける位置情報受付手段とを備え、医療チーム判断部は、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報が有するスケジュール情報と位置情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する、または急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得する救急医療支援装置である。 The emergency medical support device according to the present invention is the emergency medical support device, wherein the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor is a schedule information receiving unit that receives a doctor identifier and schedule information related to a doctor schedule identified by the doctor identifier; And a position information receiving means for receiving the doctor identifier and the position information of the doctor identified by the doctor identifier, the medical team determination unit includes schedule information and position information included in static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor To determine whether there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases, or a medical team that is capable of handling emergency cases and currently has a medical team capable of handling emergency cases This is an emergency medical support device that acquires the hospital identifier.
　かかる構成により、医師のスケジュールを考慮して、急患の対応が可能である医療チームの有無を判断することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a medical team capable of handling a sudden illness in consideration of a doctor's schedule.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、医師等動的情報受付部は、１以上の医師に装着された無線通信装置から、医師識別子、および対応可または対応不可の少なくとも２種類以上の状態を識別する状態識別子とを有する１以上の情報である医師等動的情報を受信し、医療チーム判断部は、受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等動的情報が有する各医師の状態識別子を用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する、または急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得する救急医療支援装置である。 In the emergency medical support device according to the present invention, in the emergency medical support device, the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor can receive a doctor identifier from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors and can or cannot respond. Upon receiving dynamic information such as a doctor, which is one or more pieces of information having at least two types of state identifiers for identifying states, the medical team determination unit receives a request for acceptance when the reception request receiving unit receives an acceptance request. The status identifier of each doctor in the target information is used to determine whether there is a medical team that can respond to an emergency or to obtain the hospital identifier of a hospital that has a medical team that can respond to an emergency Emergency medical support device.
　かかる構成により、医師の状態に応じて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームの有無を判断することができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a medical team capable of handling an emergency according to the condition of the doctor.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、患者情報受付部は、患者を識別する患者識別子と、他の部屋に転送可能か否かを示す転送可否情報とのを１組以上有する患者情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積し、ベッド判断部は、病院施設情報および患者情報が有する患者の数と転送可否情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断する、またはベッドの空きがある病院の病院識別子を取得する救急医療支援装置である。 In the emergency medical support device of the present invention, the patient information receiving unit in the emergency medical support device includes a patient identifier for identifying a patient and transfer enable / disable information indicating whether transfer to another room is possible. Accepts and accumulates at least temporarily patient information that has more than one set, and the bed determination unit determines whether there is a bed available using the hospital facility information and the number of patients included in the patient information and transferability information Or an emergency medical support device that acquires a hospital identifier of a hospital having a bed available.
　かかる構成により、既存の患者を転送することも考慮して、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断することができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a bed available in consideration of transferring an existing patient.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、患者の転送先の部屋の空きベッドに関する情報である転送先候補施設情報を格納し得る転送先候補施設情報格納部をさらに備え、ベッド判断部は、さらに転送先候補施設情報をも用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断する、またはベッドの空きがある病院の病院識別子を取得する救急医療支援装置である。 The emergency medical support device of the present invention further includes a transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit that can store transfer destination candidate facility information that is information related to an empty bed in a patient transfer destination room in the emergency medical support device. The bed determination unit is an emergency medical support device that further determines whether there is a bed available using the transfer destination candidate facility information or acquires a hospital identifier of a hospital with a bed available.
　かかる構成により、転送可能な患者が、実際に転送可能か否かを転送先のベッドの空きから判断して、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断することができる。 With this configuration, a transferable patient can determine whether or not the transfer is actually possible from the availability of the transfer destination bed, and can determine whether or not there is an empty bed.
　また、本発明の救急医療支援装置は、前記救急医療支援装置において、医師等動的情報受付部は、１以上の各医師に装着された無線通信装置から、１以上の医師識別子と位置情報との組を１組以上有する医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積し、医師識別子と位置情報とを表示する、または表示しない領域に関する情報である表示制御情報を格納し得る表示制御情報格納部と、表示制御情報に従って、表示する領域に居る医師識別子のみ表示する表示部とをさらに備えた救急医療支援装置である。 The emergency medical support device of the present invention is the emergency medical support device, wherein the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor receives one or more doctor identifiers and position information from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors. Display control information that accepts dynamic information such as a doctor having one or more sets of information, stores at least temporarily, and displays display control information that is information about a region that displays or does not display a doctor identifier and position information The emergency medical support device further includes a storage unit and a display unit that displays only the doctor identifier in the display area according to the display control information.
　かかる構成により、医師の位置を表示することができるとともに、表示が適切でない領域に入る医師については、表示を行わないようにすることができる。これにより、例えば医師のプライバシー等を守ることができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to display the position of the doctor, and it is possible to prevent the display of the doctor who enters the area where the display is not appropriate. Thereby, a doctor's privacy etc. can be protected, for example.
　また、本発明の医師状態管理用端末は、医師識別子を格納し得る医師識別子格納部と、医師の状態を示す状態情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する状態情報受付部と、医師識別子と状態情報とを、無線通信手段により送信する無線送信部とを備えた医師状態管理用端末である。 The doctor status management terminal of the present invention includes a doctor identifier storage unit that can store a doctor identifier, a status information reception unit that receives status information indicating the status of the doctor, and stores at least temporarily, a doctor identifier, and a status A doctor state management terminal including a wireless transmission unit that transmits information by wireless communication means.
　かかる構成により、医師識別子と医師の状態情報とを医師が特に送信の操作を行わなくても送信することができる。 With this configuration, the doctor identifier and the doctor status information can be transmitted without the doctor performing any particular transmission operation.
　また、本発明の医師状態管理用端末は、前記医師状態管理用端末において、位置情報を取得する位置情報取得部をさらに備え、無線送信部は、医師識別子と状態情報と位置情報とを、無線通信手段により送信する医師状態管理用端末である。 The doctor state management terminal of the present invention further includes a position information acquisition unit that acquires position information in the doctor state management terminal, and the wireless transmission unit wirelessly transmits the doctor identifier, the state information, and the position information. It is a terminal for doctor state management transmitted by communication means.
　かかる構成により、医師の位置情報を送信できるため、受信する救急医療支援装置が位置情報を取得する処理を軽減することができる。 With this configuration, since the doctor's location information can be transmitted, the receiving emergency medical support device can reduce the process of acquiring the location information.
　本発明による救急医療支援装置等によれば、急患の受け入れの可否を適切に判断することができる。 According to the emergency medical support device and the like according to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not an emergency patient can be accepted.
本発明の実施の形態１における救急医療支援システムのブロック図Block diagram of emergency medical support system in Embodiment 1 of the present invention 同救急医療支援システムの救急医療支援装置の動作について説明するフローチャートThe flowchart explaining operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance apparatus of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの救急医療支援装置の動作について説明するフローチャートThe flowchart explaining operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance apparatus of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの受入要請装置の動作について説明するフローチャートFlow chart explaining operation of acceptance request device of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの概念図Conceptual diagram of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの医師状態管理用カードの外観を示す図The figure which shows the external appearance of the card for doctor state management of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、受信位置管理表を示す図The figure which shows the reception position management table in order to explain the operation of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、医療領域管理表を示す図A diagram showing a medical area management table for explaining the operation of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、医師等動的情報を示す図A diagram showing dynamic information such as a doctor for explaining the operation of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、医師等動的履歴情報を示す図The figure which shows dynamic history information, such as a doctor, for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、急患用部屋管理表を示す図The figure which shows the emergency room management table for explaining the operation of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、患者情報を示す図The figure which shows patient information for explaining operation of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、患者数を示す患者情報を示す図The figure which shows the patient information which shows the number of patients for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system. 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、表示制御情報を示す図The figure which shows display control information for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの表示例を示す図The figure which shows the example of a display of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、受入要請装置の入力画面を示す図The figure which shows the input screen of an acceptance request apparatus for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、病院施設情報を示す図The figure which shows hospital facility information for explaining operation of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、転送先候補施設情報を示す図The figure which shows transfer destination candidate facility information for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、スケジュール情報を示す図The figure which shows schedule information for explaining operation of the emergency medical support system 救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、蓄積された医師識別子を示す図The figure which shows the doctor identifier accumulate | stored for demonstrating operation | movement of an emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、医師等静的情報を示す図A figure showing static information such as doctors for explaining the operation of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、医師ＩＤ管理表を示す図The figure which shows the doctor ID management table for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system. 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、表示例を示す図The figure which shows the example of a display for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 本発明の実施の形態２における救急医療支援システムのブロック図Block diagram of emergency medical support system in Embodiment 2 of the present invention 同救急医療支援システムの救急医療支援装置の受入可否決定処理の動作について説明するフローチャートFlowchart explaining the operation of acceptability determination processing of the emergency medical support device of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの概念図Conceptual diagram of the emergency medical support system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、医師等動的情報の一例を示す図The figure which shows an example of dynamic information, such as a doctor, for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、患者情報の一例を示す図The figure which shows an example of patient information for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、病院識別子と対応づけられた病院施設情報の一例を示す図The figure which shows an example of the hospital facility information matched with the hospital identifier for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、ベッド判断部が取得した病院識別子を示す図The figure which shows the hospital identifier which the bed judgment part acquired for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、医療チーム判断部が取得した病院識別子を示す図The figure which shows the hospital identifier which the medical team judgment part acquired for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの動作を説明するための、受入要請装置の表示例を示す図The figure which shows the example of a display of an acceptance request apparatus for demonstrating operation | movement of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの無線通信装置の変形例を示す図The figure which shows the modification of the radio | wireless communication apparatus of the emergency medical assistance system 同救急医療支援システムの患者用無線通信装置の変形例を示す図The figure which shows the modification of the radio | wireless communication apparatus for patients of the emergency medical assistance system 本発明の各実施の形態による救急医療支援装置を実現するコンピュータの外観の一例を示す模式図The schematic diagram which shows an example of the external appearance of the computer which implement | achieves the emergency medical assistance apparatus by each embodiment of this invention 同救急医療支援装置を実現するコンピュータの内部構成を示す図The figure which shows the internal structure of the computer which implement | achieves the emergency medical assistance apparatus
　以下、救急医療支援装置等の実施形態について図面を参照して説明する。なお、実施の形態において同じ符号を付した構成要素は同様の動作を行うので、再度の説明を省略する場合がある。 Hereinafter, embodiments of an emergency medical support device and the like will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, since the component which attached | subjected the same code | symbol in embodiment performs the same operation | movement, description may be abbreviate | omitted again.
　（実施の形態１）
　図１は、本実施の形態における救急医療支援システム１０のブロック図である。
　救急医療支援システム１０は、救急医療支援装置１、１以上の無線通信装置３、１以上の患者用無線通信装置４、および１以上の受入要請装置５を備える。なお、ここでは、便宜上、無線通信装置３、患者用無線通信装置４、および受入要請装置５が、それぞれ一つである場合の例を示している。 (Embodiment 1)
FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an emergency medical support system 10 in the present embodiment.
The emergency medical support system 10 includes an emergency medical support device 1, one or more wireless communication devices 3, one or more patient wireless communication devices 4, and one or more acceptance request devices 5. Here, for the sake of convenience, an example in which the number of the wireless communication device 3, the patient wireless communication device 4, and the acceptance requesting device 5 is one is shown.
　救急医療支援装置１は、病院施設情報格納部１００、患者情報受付部１０１、転送先候補施設情報格納部１０２、受入要請受信部１０３、ベッド判断部１０４、医師等静的情報格納部１０５、医師等動的情報受付部１０６、表示制御情報格納部１０７、表示部１０８、医療チーム判断部１０９、および対応可否送信部１１０を備える。 The emergency medical support apparatus 1 includes a hospital facility information storage unit 100, a patient information reception unit 101, a transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102, an acceptance request reception unit 103, a bed determination unit 104, a static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor, a doctor An isodynamic information reception unit 106, a display control information storage unit 107, a display unit 108, a medical team determination unit 109, and a response availability transmission unit 110 are provided.
　医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１および位置情報受付手段１０６２を備える。 The doctor's dynamic information receiving unit 106 includes schedule information receiving means 1061 and position information receiving means 1062.
　無線通信装置３は、医師識別子格納部３０１、状態識別子受付部３０２、および無線送信部３０３を備える。 The wireless communication device 3 includes a doctor identifier storage unit 301, a state identifier reception unit 302, and a wireless transmission unit 303.
　患者用無線通信装置４は、患者識別子格納部４０１と、患者用無線送信部４０２とを備える。 The patient wireless communication device 4 includes a patient identifier storage unit 401 and a patient wireless transmission unit 402.
　受入要請装置５は、受入要請受付部５０１と、受入要請送信部５０２と、対応可否受信部５０３、および対応可否出力部５０４とを備える。 The acceptance request device 5 includes an acceptance request acceptance unit 501, an acceptance request transmission unit 502, a correspondence availability receiving unit 503, and a correspondence availability output unit 504.
　救急医療支援システム１０における、救急医療支援装置１、無線通信装置３、患者用無線通信装置４、および受入要請装置５は、通信回線や無線等のネットワーク等により通信可能に接続されている。 In the emergency medical support system 10, the emergency medical support device 1, the wireless communication device 3, the patient wireless communication device 4, and the acceptance request device 5 are communicably connected via a network such as a communication line or wireless.
　救急医療支援装置１は、例えば、各病院施設内に配置される装置である。救急医療支援装置１は、例えば、コンピュータやその周辺装置等から実現され得るが、専用のハードウェア等で構成されても良い。 The emergency medical support device 1 is a device arranged in each hospital facility, for example. The emergency medical support device 1 can be realized by, for example, a computer or a peripheral device thereof, but may be configured by dedicated hardware or the like.
　病院施設情報格納部１００は、病院の施設に関する情報であり、急患を受け入れる部屋の病床数を少なくとも有する病院施設情報を格納し得る。病院施設情報とは、具体的には、病院の施設に関する静的な情報である。病院施設情報は、例えば、病院の病床数の情報である。病床数とは、具体的には、ベッド数である。病院の病床数は、内科や外科等の病院の各科別の病床数であっても良いし、病院の有する各部屋、例えば、ベッドルームや、ＩＣＵ（集中治療室）や、処置室の病床数であっても良い。病床数の情報は、各部屋別や各科別や各用途別に病床数が管理されている情報であっても良いし、これらの一部又は全ての合計の病床数を示す情報が管理されている情報であってもよい。また、病院施設情報や、病院の有する手術室の数の情報であっても良い。急患を受け入れる部屋とは、各病院の急患を受け入れることが可能な部屋であれば、どのような部屋であっても良い。急患を受け入れる部屋とは、例えば、病院の救急病棟の、処置室や、ベッドルームや、手術室や、ＩＣＵ等の部屋である。病院施設情報は、各部屋の用途を示す情報を有していても良い。また、病院施設情報や、病院の設備等に関する情報を更に含んでいてもよい。なお、急患とは、急病の患者であり、例えば、救急車等の救急車両で搬送される患者である。 The hospital facility information storage unit 100 is information related to hospital facilities, and can store hospital facility information having at least the number of beds in a room that accepts emergency cases. Specifically, the hospital facility information is static information related to hospital facilities. The hospital facility information is, for example, information on the number of hospital beds. The number of beds is specifically the number of beds. The number of beds in the hospital may be the number of beds in each department of the hospital such as internal medicine and surgery, etc., and each room in the hospital, for example, a bedroom, an ICU (intensive care unit), or a bed in a treatment room It may be a number. The information on the number of beds may be information in which the number of beds is managed for each room, each department, or each use, or information indicating the total number of beds in some or all of these is managed. It may be information. Further, it may be hospital facility information or information on the number of operating rooms of the hospital. The room for receiving emergency cases may be any room as long as it can receive emergency cases at each hospital. The room for receiving an emergency patient is, for example, a treatment room, a bedroom, an operating room, a room of an ICU, or the like in an emergency ward of a hospital. The hospital facility information may include information indicating the use of each room. Further, it may further include information on hospital facility information and hospital equipment. In addition, an emergency patient is a patient with a sudden illness, for example, a patient conveyed by an ambulance vehicle such as an ambulance.
　病院施設情報格納部１００に病院施設情報が記憶される過程は問わない。例えば、記録媒体を介して病院施設情報が病院施設情報格納部１００に蓄積されても良い。また、通信回線等を介して送信された病院施設情報が病院施設情報格納部１００に蓄積されても良い。また、キーボード等の入力デバイスを介して入力された病院施設情報が病院施設情報格納部１００に蓄積されても良い。 The process of storing hospital facility information in the hospital facility information storage unit 100 does not matter. For example, hospital facility information may be accumulated in the hospital facility information storage unit 100 via a recording medium. In addition, hospital facility information transmitted via a communication line or the like may be accumulated in the hospital facility information storage unit 100. Also, hospital facility information input via an input device such as a keyboard may be accumulated in the hospital facility information storage unit 100.
　病院施設情報格納部１００は、不揮発性の記録媒体が好適であるが、揮発性の記録媒体でも実現可能である。 The hospital facility information storage unit 100 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
　患者情報受付部１０１は、急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の数を含む患者情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する。患者情報受付部１０１は、例えば図示しない入力デバイス等を介して入力された患者情報を受け付けても良い。また、患者情報受付部１０１は、結果的に病院内の急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の数を含む患者情報を受け付けることができれば、どのように患者情報を取得しても良い。例えば、患者情報受付部１０１は、病院内の急患を受け入れる各部屋にいる1以上の患者にそれぞれ装着された1以上の各無線通信装置、ここでは、例えば、ＲＦＩＤタグ等の後述する患者用無線通信装置４から、少なくとも患者であることを示す情報を受信し、受信した患者であることを示す情報を用いて、患者の数を含む患者情報を取得してもよい。例えば、急患を受け入れる各部屋で受信した患者であることを示す情報の数をカウントすることで、患者数を取得してもよい。 The patient information receiving unit 101 receives patient information including the number of patients in a room that accepts an emergency case, and accumulates at least temporarily. The patient information receiving unit 101 may receive patient information input via, for example, an input device (not shown). In addition, the patient information receiving unit 101 may acquire patient information as long as it can receive patient information including the number of patients in a room that receives a sudden illness in the hospital. For example, the patient information reception unit 101 includes one or more wireless communication devices, each of which is attached to one or more patients in each room that accepts an emergency in a hospital. You may receive the information which shows that it is a patient from the communication apparatus 4 at least, and may acquire patient information including the number of patients using the information which shows that it is a received patient. For example, the number of patients may be acquired by counting the number of information indicating that the patient has been received in each room that accepts an emergency.
　患者であることを示す情報は、例えば、患者あるいは患者用無線通信装置４に共通して割り当てられた、単に患者であることを示す特定の情報であってもよいし、患者別に、あるいは、患者用無線通信装置４別に割り当てられた、互いに異なる識別情報、例えば、患者識別子であっても良い。患者識別子は、患者を識別可能な識別子である。例えば、患者識別子は、患者名等であっても良いし、患者に与えられた番号やコード等であっても良い。患者識別子は、後述するような患者に装着される患者用無線通信装置４の有する識別子であっても良い。患者情報受付部１０１は、例えば、病院内の急患を受け入れる部屋の中の患者用無線通信装置４を含む通信装置から送信される識別情報を受信し、この識別情報のうちの、予め患者に割り当てられた識別情報と一致する識別情報を検索等により検出し、検出した一致する識別情報数をカウントして患者数の情報を取得しても良い。予め患者に共通して、あるいは個別に割り当てられた識別情報は、図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部等に、予め蓄積しておくようにすればよい。 The information indicating that the patient is a patient may be, for example, specific information that is commonly assigned to the patient or the patient wireless communication device 4 and simply indicates that the patient is a patient. Different identification information assigned to each wireless communication device 4 may be used, for example, a patient identifier. The patient identifier is an identifier that can identify a patient. For example, the patient identifier may be a patient name or the like, or a number or code given to the patient. The patient identifier may be an identifier included in the patient wireless communication device 4 attached to the patient as described later. The patient information reception unit 101 receives, for example, identification information transmitted from a communication device including the patient wireless communication device 4 in a room that accepts an emergency in a hospital, and assigns the identification information to a patient in advance. Identification information that matches the identified identification information may be detected by searching or the like, and the number of matching identification information detected may be counted to obtain information on the number of patients. Identification information that is commonly assigned to patients in advance or individually assigned may be stored in advance in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
　急患を受け入れる各部屋にいる１以上の患者から、患者であることを示す情報を取得する方法は、どのような方法で行うようにしても良い。例えば、急患を受け入れる部屋において出力される情報のみを受信可能となるような配置で、病院内に情報を受信するための一以上のアンテナ等を設置するようにし、このアンテナが受信した患者であることを示す情報だけを取得するようにしてもよい。また、同じアンテナを用いて患者であることを示す情報以外の情報を受信する場合には、受信した情報の中から、予め用意された患者であることを示す情報と一致する情報だけを取得するようにしても良い。あるいは、病院内の各部屋において出力される情報のみを選択的に受信可能となるように各部屋等にアンテナ等を設置して、各アンテナが患者であることを示す情報を受信した場合に、そのアンテナに予め対応付けられた各部屋の識別情報等を患者の位置の情報として受け付け、この位置の情報を用いて、急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者数を取得してもよい。つまり、患者の位置の情報として、患者の部屋の識別情報を用いても良い。かかることは以下の処理においても同様である。また、複数のアンテナで、ＲＦＩＤタグ等の患者用無線通信装置４から出力される患者であることを示す情報を受信するとともに、患者情報受付部１０１が、各アンテナにおける受信時の受信強度から、患者の位置（患者用無線通信装置４の位置）を算出し、その算出した位置が、予め設定された急患を受け入れる部屋内の位置を示すか否かを判断することで、急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者からの情報のみを取得するようにしてもよい。あるいは、急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者からの情報にのみ、予め指定した急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者からの情報であることを示すフラグ等の情報を付与するようにしてもよい。また、患者用無線通信装置４がＧＰＳ（Ｇｌｏｂａｌ　Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ）等を備えており、患者であることを示す情報とともに、ＧＰＳで取得した位置情報を送信するようにして、患者情報受付部１０１は、受け付けた位置情報が、予め設定された急患を受け入れる部屋内の位置を示す情報である場合にのみ、患者であることを示す情報を取得するようにしても良い。あるいは上記のようにフラグ等の情報を付与しても良い。なお、ＲＦＩＤタグやＧＰＳ等によって、位置を検出する処理等は公知技術であるので、ここでは、詳細な説明は省略する。 Any method may be used for acquiring information indicating that the patient is a patient from one or more patients in each room receiving the emergency patient. For example, it is a patient who has received one or more antennas for receiving information in a hospital in an arrangement that can receive only information output in a room that accepts an emergency. Only information indicating this may be acquired. When receiving information other than information indicating that the patient is the same antenna using the same antenna, only information that matches the information indicating that the patient is prepared in advance is acquired from the received information. You may do it. Alternatively, when receiving information indicating that each antenna is a patient by installing an antenna or the like in each room so that only the information output in each room in the hospital can be selectively received, Identification information or the like of each room associated with the antenna in advance may be received as patient position information, and the number of patients in the room receiving the emergency patient may be acquired using this position information. That is, patient room identification information may be used as patient position information. The same applies to the following processing. In addition, the information indicating that the patient is output from the patient wireless communication device 4 such as an RFID tag is received by a plurality of antennas, and the patient information receiving unit 101 receives from the reception intensity at the time of reception at each antenna, The position of the patient (the position of the patient wireless communication device 4) is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated position indicates a position in the room that receives a preset emergency patient. Only information from existing patients may be acquired. Or you may make it give information, such as a flag which shows that it is the information from the patient in the room which receives the sudden illness designated beforehand only to the information from the patient in the room which receives the sudden illness. In addition, the patient wireless communication device 4 includes a GPS (Global Positioning System) or the like, and transmits the position information acquired by the GPS together with the information indicating that the patient is a patient. Information indicating that the patient is a patient may be acquired only when the received position information is information indicating a preset position in the room that receives the emergency patient. Alternatively, information such as a flag may be added as described above. In addition, since the process etc. which detect a position by RFID tag, GPS, etc. are well-known techniques, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted here.
　また、患者情報受付部１０１は、患者を識別する患者識別子と、他の部屋に転送可能か否かを示す転送可否情報との組を１組以上有する患者情報を受け付け、図示しない記憶媒体等に少なくとも一時的に蓄積してもよい。他の部屋とは、具体的には急患を受け入れる部屋以外の部屋である。例えば、救急病棟以外の部屋である。他の部屋に転送可能な否かの情報は、結果的に転送可能な否かを判断可能な情報であれば、転送可能な場合にのみ入力される転送可能なことを示す情報であっても良い。転送可能な否かの情報は、例えば、転送可能な場合、もしくは転送不可の場合にのみ立てられるフラグ情報であっても良い。また、患者情報は、患者の転送先を示す情報を含むようにしてもよい。 The patient information receiving unit 101 receives patient information having one or more sets of a patient identifier for identifying a patient and transferability information indicating whether transfer is possible to another room, and stores the information in a storage medium (not shown). It may be accumulated at least temporarily. The other room is specifically a room other than the room that receives the emergency case. For example, a room other than the emergency ward. The information indicating whether transfer is possible to another room is information indicating that transfer is possible only if it is possible to determine whether transfer is possible as a result. good. The information indicating whether transfer is possible may be flag information that is set only when transfer is possible or transfer is impossible. The patient information may include information indicating the transfer destination of the patient.
　なお、上述した患者情報は、患者情報受付部１０１が受け付けた患者識別子の集合と考えても良く、この場合、患者情報を構成する患者識別子の数が、患者の数となる。 The patient information described above may be considered as a set of patient identifiers received by the patient information receiving unit 101. In this case, the number of patient identifiers constituting the patient information is the number of patients.
　ここで述べる受け付けとは、キーボードやマウス、タッチパネルなどの入力デバイスから入力された情報の受け付け、有線もしくは無線の通信回線を介して送信された情報の受信、光ディスクや磁気ディスク、半導体メモリなどの記録媒体から読み出された情報の受け付けなどを含む概念である。患者情報受付部１０１は、通信手段や受信手段のドライバーや、テンキーやキーボード等の入力手段のデバイスドライバーや、メニュー画面の制御ソフトウェア等で実現され得る。また、患者情報受付部１０１は、情報を受信するための１以上のアンテナや、ＲＦＩＤタグリーダ、またはＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタ等を備えていても良い。 The reception described here refers to reception of information input from an input device such as a keyboard, mouse, touch panel, reception of information transmitted via a wired or wireless communication line, recording on an optical disk, magnetic disk, semiconductor memory, or the like. It is a concept including reception of information read from a medium. The patient information reception unit 101 can be realized by a driver of a communication unit or a reception unit, a device driver of an input unit such as a numeric keypad or a keyboard, a menu screen control software, or the like. The patient information receiving unit 101 may include one or more antennas for receiving information, an RFID tag reader, an RFID tag reader / writer, or the like.
　転送先候補施設情報格納部１０２は、患者の転送先の部屋の空きベッドに関する情報である転送先候補施設情報を格納し得る。ここで述べる患者は、具体的には急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者である。ここで述べる転送先は、急患を受け入れる部屋以外の部屋である。転送先候補施設情報は、患者の転送先を示す情報に対応した転送先の候補となり得る部屋における空きベッドに関する情報である。空きベッドに関する情報とは、空きベッドの有無を示す情報であっても良いし、空きベッド数を示す情報であっても良い。転送先候補施設情報は、転送先の候補となる部屋を示す情報と、空きベッドに関する情報とが対応付けられた情報である。転送先の候補となる部屋を示す情報は、例えば、部屋の名前や、部屋が属する科や、部屋の用途等を示す部屋の識別情報である。転送先の候補となりうる部屋を示す情報は、上述した患者情報に含まれる転送先を示す情報と対応関係を有する情報である。転送先の候補となりうる部屋を示す情報の一つを、上述した患者情報に含まれる転送先を示す情報として利用するようにしても良い。 The transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 can store transfer destination candidate facility information, which is information related to vacant beds in a patient transfer destination room. The patient described here is specifically a patient in a room that accepts an emergency. The forwarding destination described here is a room other than the room for receiving the emergency case. The transfer destination candidate facility information is information regarding an empty bed in a room that can be a transfer destination candidate corresponding to information indicating the transfer destination of a patient. The information related to the vacant beds may be information indicating the presence or absence of vacant beds or information indicating the number of vacant beds. The transfer destination candidate facility information is information in which information indicating a room that is a transfer destination candidate is associated with information related to an empty bed. The information indicating the transfer destination candidate room is, for example, room identification information indicating a room name, a department to which the room belongs, a use of the room, and the like. The information indicating the room that can be a transfer destination candidate is information having a correspondence relationship with the information indicating the transfer destination included in the patient information described above. One piece of information indicating a room that can be a transfer destination candidate may be used as information indicating the transfer destination included in the patient information described above.
　転送先候補施設情報格納部１０２に転送先候補施設情報が蓄積される過程は問わない。例えば、通信回線等を介して送信された転送先候補施設情報が転送先候補施設情報格納部１０２に蓄積されても良く、あるいは、入力デバイスを介して入力された転送先候補施設情報が転送先候補施設情報格納部１０２に蓄積されてもよい。転送先候補施設情報格納部１０２は、不揮発性の記録媒体が好適であるが、揮発性の記録媒体でも実現可能である。 The process of storing the transfer destination candidate facility information in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 does not matter. For example, transfer destination candidate facility information transmitted via a communication line or the like may be accumulated in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102, or transfer destination candidate facility information input via an input device is transferred to the transfer destination The candidate facility information storage unit 102 may accumulate the information. The transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
　受入要請受信部１０３は、急患の受け入れの要請を示す情報である受入要請を、外部の装置から受信する。受入要請とは、急患の受入可否を問う情報と考えても良い。受入要請は、障害の部位を識別する情報である障害部位識別子を含んでも良い。障害部位識別子は、障害の部位を特定可能な急患の症状を示す情報であっても良い。外部の装置とは、受入要請を送信可能な装置である。受入要請は、例えば、無線の通信回線や無線のネットワーク等を介して、外部の装置から送信される。外部の装置とは、例えば、救急車両等に設置された装置や、救急隊が保持している装置等である。本実施の形態においては、外部の装置が、後述する受入要請装置５である場合を例に挙げて説明する。受入要請受信部１０３は、通常、無線または有線の通信手段で実現されるが、放送を受信する手段で実現されても良い。 The acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives an acceptance request, which is information indicating a request for accepting an emergency patient, from an external device. The acceptance request may be considered as information asking whether or not an emergency patient can be accepted. The acceptance request may include a faulty part identifier that is information for identifying the faulty part. The fault site identifier may be information indicating a symptom of an emergency that can specify the fault site. An external device is a device that can transmit an acceptance request. The acceptance request is transmitted from an external device via, for example, a wireless communication line or a wireless network. The external device is, for example, a device installed in an ambulance vehicle or the like, a device held by an ambulance team, and the like. In the present embodiment, a case where an external device is an acceptance requesting device 5 described later will be described as an example. The acceptance request receiving unit 103 is usually realized by a wireless or wired communication means, but may be realized by a means for receiving a broadcast.
　ベッド判断部１０４は、病院施設情報および患者情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断する。例えば、ベッド判断部１０４は、受入要請受信部１０３が受入要請を受信した場合に、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断する。あるいは、定期的や不定期にベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断しても良い。また、ベッド判断部１０４は、病院施設情報および患者情報が有する患者の数と転送可否情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断してもよい。 The bed determination unit 104 determines whether there is a bed available using the hospital facility information and the patient information. For example, the bed determination unit 104 determines whether there is a bed available when the reception request reception unit 103 receives the reception request. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the bed is available regularly or irregularly. Further, the bed determination unit 104 may determine whether there is a bed available using the number of patients included in the hospital facility information and the patient information and the transfer availability information.
　具体的には、ベッド判断部１０４は、病院施設情報に含まれるベッドの数が、患者情報から取得される患者数より多いか否かを判断し、多い場合に、ベッドに空きがあると判断する。さらに、ベッド判断部１０４は、病院施設情報に含まれるベッドの数と、患者情報から取得される患者数とが同じ場合、移動（転送）させることができる患者がいるか否かを、患者情報に含まれる転送可否情報を用いて判断する。具体的には、転送が可能であることを示す転送可否情報が１以上格納されている場合、ベッド判断部１０４は、ベッドに空きがあると判断する。例えば、転送可能であることを示す転送可否情報と対応付けられた患者識別子が示す患者を受け入れる部屋以外の部屋、例えば、一般病棟等に移動させることで、急患を受け入れる部屋にベッドの空きができるからである。 Specifically, the bed determination unit 104 determines whether or not the number of beds included in the hospital facility information is larger than the number of patients acquired from the patient information. To do. Furthermore, when the number of beds included in the hospital facility information is the same as the number of patients acquired from the patient information, the bed determination unit 104 determines whether there is a patient that can be moved (transferred) in the patient information. Judgment is made using the included transfer enable / disable information. Specifically, when one or more pieces of transfer permission / prohibition information indicating that transfer is possible are stored, the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is an empty bed. For example, by moving to a room other than the room that accepts the patient indicated by the patient identifier associated with the transferability information indicating that transfer is possible, for example, a general ward, a room is available in the room that accepts the emergency case. Because.
　また、ベッド判断部１０４は、病院施設情報および患者情報が有する患者の数と転送可否情報と転送先候補施設情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断してもよい。 Further, the bed determination unit 104 may determine whether there is a vacant bed using the number of patients included in the hospital facility information and the patient information, transferability information, and transfer destination candidate facility information.
　具体的には、上記のように移動させることができる患者がいる場合でも、移動先の部屋のベッドに空きがあるか否かを判断するようにしても良い。例えば、転送が可能であることを示す転送可否情報のなかに、空きベッドを有する転送先を転送先に指定する転送可否情報が１以上含まれる場合に、ベッドに空きがあると判断してもよい。転送先に空きベッドがあるか否かは、転送可否情報に含まれる転送先を示す情報に対応した転送先候補施設情報が、空きベッドがあることを示すか否かにより判断可能である。 Specifically, even when there is a patient that can be moved as described above, it may be determined whether or not there is an empty bed in the destination room. For example, even if it is determined that there is a vacancy in the bed when the transfer availability information indicating that transfer is possible includes one or more transfer availability information that designates a transfer destination having an empty bed as the transfer destination. Good. Whether there is an empty bed at the transfer destination can be determined by whether the transfer destination candidate facility information corresponding to the information indicating the transfer destination included in the transfer enable / disable information indicates that there is an empty bed.
　ベッド判断部１０４は、通常、ＭＰＵやメモリ等から実現され得る。ベッド判断部１０４の処理手順は、通常、ソフトウェアで実現され、当該ソフトウェアはＲＯＭ等の記録媒体に記録されている。但し、ハードウェア（専用回路）で実現しても良い。 The bed determination unit 104 can be usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing procedure of the bed determination unit 104 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
　医師等静的情報格納部１０５は、医師を識別する１以上の医師識別子を有する医師識別子群を有する医師等静的情報を格納し得る。 The static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor can store static information such as a doctor having a group of doctor identifiers having one or more doctor identifiers for identifying a doctor.
　医師等静的情報は、医師等についての静的な情報であり、例えば、医師により構成される医療チームを示すための情報である。医師等静的情報は、例えば、１以上の医療チームに対応した１以上の医師識別子群を有している。一の医療チームに対応した医師識別子群に含まれる医師識別子が示す医師は、例えば、一の医療チームに属する医師である。医療チームは、例えば、急患に対応可能な医療チームである。なお、医師等静的情報は、医師の静的情報に加えて、さらに看護士等についての静的な情報を含むと考えても良い。この場合、医療チームは、医師に加えて看護士も含む医療チームと考えても良い。なお、看護士の静的情報は、対象が医師でない点を除けば、医師の静的情報と同様である。医師等静的情報は、１以上の医師識別子を有する医師識別子群と、この医師識別子群で識別される１以上の医師を含む医療チームが行える医療行為を識別する１以上の医療行為識別子を有していても良い。医療行為識別子は、具体的には、医療チームが行うことのできる医療行為を識別する情報である。医療行為識別子は、医療チームの医療における専門分野等を示す情報を示す情報と考えても良い。また、医療行為識別子は、当該医療チームが対応可能な障害部位を示す情報と考えても良い。医療行為識別子は、例えば、上述した受入要請に含まれる障害部位識別子と対応関係を有している。医療行為識別子は、上述した障害部位識別子と同じものでもよい。同じものでない場合、障害部位識別子と医療行為識別子との対応関係を管理する情報が、例えば、図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に蓄積される。この管理情報は、例えば「脳」という障害部位識別子と、「脳外科」という医療行為識別子とを対応付ける情報である。医療行為識別子は、医師識別子または医師識別子群と対応付けて格納される。 The static information such as doctors is static information about the doctors, for example, information for indicating a medical team composed of doctors. The static information such as a doctor has, for example, one or more doctor identifier groups corresponding to one or more medical teams. The doctor indicated by the doctor identifier included in the doctor identifier group corresponding to one medical team is, for example, a doctor belonging to one medical team. The medical team is, for example, a medical team that can deal with emergency cases. The static information such as a doctor may be considered to include static information about a nurse or the like in addition to the static information of the doctor. In this case, the medical team may be considered as a medical team including a nurse in addition to a doctor. The static information of the nurse is the same as the static information of the doctor except that the subject is not a doctor. The static information such as a doctor has a doctor identifier group having one or more doctor identifiers and one or more medical action identifiers for identifying medical actions that can be performed by a medical team including one or more doctors identified by the doctor identifier group. You may do it. Specifically, the medical practice identifier is information for identifying a medical practice that can be performed by a medical team. The medical practice identifier may be considered as information indicating information indicating a specialized field in medical care of the medical team. In addition, the medical practice identifier may be considered as information indicating a faulty part that can be handled by the medical team. The medical practice identifier has a correspondence relationship with the fault site identifier included in the acceptance request described above, for example. The medical practice identifier may be the same as the above-described obstacle site identifier. If they are not the same, information for managing the correspondence relationship between the fault site identifier and the medical practice identifier is accumulated in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown), for example. This management information is information for associating, for example, a failure site identifier “brain” and a medical practice identifier “brain surgery”. The medical practice identifier is stored in association with a doctor identifier or a doctor identifier group.
　医師等静的情報格納部１０５に医師等静的情報が記憶される過程は問わない。例えば、記録媒体を介して医師等静的情報が医師等静的情報格納部１０５に蓄積されてもよく、通信回線等を介して送信された医師等静的情報が医師等静的情報格納部１０５に蓄積されてもよく、あるいは、入力デバイスを介して入力された医師等静的情報が医師等静的情報格納部１０５で記憶されるようになってもよい。 The process of storing static information such as doctors in the static information storage unit 105 is not limited. For example, static information such as a doctor may be accumulated in the static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor via a recording medium, and the static information such as a doctor transmitted via a communication line is stored in the static information storage unit such as a doctor. Alternatively, static information such as a doctor input via an input device may be stored in the static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor.
　医師等静的情報格納部１０５は、不揮発性の記録媒体が好適であるが、揮発性の記録媒体でも実現可能である。 The static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor is preferably a nonvolatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
　医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、急患を受け入れる部屋を含む、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる１以上の各医師に装着された無線通信装置から、１以上の医師識別子を含む医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも図示しない記憶媒体等に一時的に蓄積する。ここで述べる無線通信装置とは、例えば、無線通信装置３である。医師等動的情報は、例えば医師の動的な状態を示す情報である。例えば、医師等動的情報は、医師識別子と、医師がいる位置を示す位置情報との組を１組以上有していてもよい。また、医師のスケジュール情報等を有していても良い。位置情報やスケジュール情報については後述する。なお、医師等動的情報は、さらに看護士の動的な情報を含んでいるようにしても良い。なお、看護士の動的な情報は、対象が異なる点を除けば医師の動的情報と同様のものと考えて良い。 The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor is a doctor including one or more doctor identifiers from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors in a region where a medical practice is performed for an emergency patient, including a room for receiving an emergency patient. Isodynamic information is received and at least temporarily stored in a storage medium (not shown). The wireless communication device described here is, for example, the wireless communication device 3. Dynamic information such as a doctor is information indicating a dynamic state of a doctor, for example. For example, the dynamic information such as a doctor may have one or more sets of a doctor identifier and position information indicating a position where the doctor is located. Moreover, you may have a doctor's schedule information etc. The position information and schedule information will be described later. The dynamic information such as a doctor may further include dynamic information of the nurse. The dynamic information of the nurse may be considered to be the same as the dynamic information of the doctor except that the subject is different.
　急患に対して医療行為を行う領域は、例えば、急患に対して医療行為を行い得る状態にある医師が存在する領域と考えても良い。急患に対して医療行為を行う領域のうちの、急患を受け入れる部屋以外の部屋とは、例えば、レントゲン室や、廊下、事務室や、スタッフルーム等である。急患を受け入れる部屋以外の急患に対して医療行為を行う領域は、救急病棟内の全ての領域としても良い。ここでは、例として、無線通信装置として医師状態管理用カード３０を用いた場合を例に挙げて説明する。無線通信装置を、カード形状としたことにより、医師への装着が容易となる。ただし、医師状態管理用カード３０を用いる代わりに、カード型以外の形状の、同様の機能を有する、例えば携帯情報端末や携帯電話やＰＨＳやスマートフォン等の医師の状態を管理するために利用される携帯可能な端末である医師状態管理用端末を無線通信装置として用いても良いことはいうまでもない。 The area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient may be considered as, for example, an area where there is a doctor who is ready to perform medical care for an emergency patient. Of the area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient, the room other than the room for receiving the emergency patient is, for example, an X-ray room, a corridor, an office room, a staff room, or the like. The area where medical treatment is performed on an emergency patient other than the room that receives the emergency patient may be all areas in the emergency ward. Here, as an example, a case where the doctor state management card 30 is used as a wireless communication device will be described as an example. Since the wireless communication device has a card shape, it can be easily attached to a doctor. However, instead of using the doctor status management card 30, it is used for managing the status of a doctor such as a portable information terminal, a mobile phone, a PHS, or a smartphone having a similar function in a shape other than a card type. It goes without saying that a doctor state management terminal, which is a portable terminal, may be used as a wireless communication device.
　急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる医師に装着された無線通信装置からの、医師等動的情報の取得は、どのような方法で行うようにしても良い。例えば、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域において出力される情報のみを受信可能となるような配置で、病院内に情報を受信するための１以上のアンテナ等を設置し、このアンテナで受信した医師等動的情報だけを医師等動的情報受付部１０６が受け付けるようにしてもよい。また、予め、複数のアンテナとアンテナが設けられている位置の情報、例えば座標や、部屋や領域の名称等を対応付けておくようにし、無線通信装置から情報を受信したアンテナ、もしくは無線通信装置から受信した情報の強度が最も高いアンテナの位置の情報を、医師等動的情報受付部１０６が取得するようにし、この位置の情報が、予め指定された急患に対して医療行為を行う領域内の位置を示している場合にのみ、受信した情報を受け付けるようにしてもよい。あるいは、受信した情報に、予め指定された急患に対して医療行為を行う領域内にいる医師からの情報であることを示すフラグ等の情報を付与するようにしてもよい。また、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域を含む領域に予め配置されている位置が決まっている複数のアンテナを設けるようにし、無線通信装置から送信される情報を受信した１以上のアンテナの受信強度と、その位置の情報とを用いて三点測位等で無線通信装置の位置を算出し、この位置の情報が、予め指定された急患に対して医療行為を行う領域内の位置を示している場合にのみ、受信した情報を受け付けるようにしてもよい。また、上記と同様にフラグの情報を付与しても良い。なお、同じアンテナを用いて医師等動的情報以外の情報、例えば患者識別子等を受信する場合には、受信した情報の中から、予め用意された医師識別子と一致する医師識別情報を含む医師等動的情報だけを取得するようにしても良い。予め用意された医師識別子は、例えば上述した医師等静的情報格納部１０５に格納された医師等静的情報に含まれる医師識別子である。特定のアンテナだけが受信した情報を取得することは、ＲＦＩＤタグ等の技術においては公知である。かかることは以下の処理においても同様である。また、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、病院内等に設けられた複数のアンテナで、無線通信装置から出力される患者であることを示す情報を受信するとともに、医師等動的情報受付部１０６が、各アンテナにおける受信時の受信強度から、無線通信装置を装着した医師の位置（即ち無線通信装置の位置）を算出し、その算出した位置が、予め設定された急患に対して医療行為を行う領域内の位置を示すか否かを判断することで、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる医師からの医師等動的情報のみを取得するようにしてもよい。また、この医師等動的情報に上記と同様にフラグ等の情報を付与しても良い。ここでの位置は、例えば、緯度経度の情報や、任意に設定された座標等の座標情報である。また、無線通信装置がＧＰＳ等を備えており、医師等動的情報等とともに、ＧＰＳで取得した位置情報を送信するようにして、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、受け付けた位置情報が、予め設定された急患に対して医療行為を行う領域内の位置を示す場合にのみ、医師等動的情報を取得するようにしても良い。また、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域を構成する各部屋や領域に、各部屋や領域等の位置を識別するための識別子等の位置の情報を予め指定されたタイミングで送信する情報送信装置（図示せず）等を設け、医師が、各部屋や領域に入った際に、情報送信装置が送信する位置の情報を、医師が装着した無線通信装置が受信し、受信した位置の情報を含む医師等動的情報等を、無線通信装置が送信するようにしても良い。この場合、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、受け付けた医師等動的情報に含まれる位置情報が、予め設定された急患に対して医療行為を行う領域内の位置を示す場合にのみ、医師等動的情報を取得するようにしても良い。なお、ＲＦＩＤタグやＧＰＳ等によって、位置を検出する処理等は公知技術であるので、ここでは、詳細な説明は省略する。 The acquisition of dynamic information such as a doctor from a wireless communication device attached to a doctor in an area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient may be performed by any method. For example, one or more antennas for receiving information are installed in a hospital in such an arrangement that only information output in an area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient can be received. Only dynamic information such as a doctor may be received by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor. Also, a plurality of antennas and information on positions where the antennas are provided, for example, coordinates, names of rooms and areas, etc., are associated with each other, and an antenna that receives information from a wireless communication device, or a wireless communication device The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor obtains information on the position of the antenna having the highest intensity of information received from the information, and the position information is within the region where medical treatment is performed for a pre-specified emergency patient. The received information may be accepted only when the position is indicated. Or you may make it provide information, such as a flag which shows that it is the information from the doctor who exists in the area | region which performs medical practice with respect to the emergency designated beforehand, to the received information. In addition, a plurality of antennas whose positions are determined in advance are provided in a region including a region where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient, and reception of one or more antennas that receive information transmitted from the wireless communication device The position of the wireless communication device is calculated by three-point positioning or the like using the strength and the position information, and the position information indicates the position in the region where the medical action is performed for the pre-specified emergency patient. The received information may be accepted only when it is present. Further, flag information may be added in the same manner as described above. In addition, when receiving information other than dynamic information such as a doctor, such as a patient identifier, using the same antenna, a doctor including doctor identification information that matches a doctor identifier prepared in advance from the received information Only dynamic information may be acquired. The doctor identifier prepared in advance is, for example, a doctor identifier included in static information such as a doctor stored in the static information storage unit 105 described above. Obtaining information received only by a specific antenna is well known in the art of RFID tags and the like. The same applies to the following processing. The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor receives information indicating that the patient is output from the wireless communication device with a plurality of antennas provided in a hospital or the like, and the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor. 106 calculates the position of the doctor wearing the wireless communication device (that is, the position of the wireless communication device) from the reception intensity at the time of reception at each antenna, and the calculated position is a medical practice for a preset emergency. Only dynamic information such as a doctor from a doctor in a region performing medical action for an emergency patient may be acquired by determining whether or not the position in the region to be performed is indicated. Moreover, you may give information, such as a flag, to this dynamic information, such as a doctor similarly to the above. The position here is, for example, information on latitude and longitude, or coordinate information such as arbitrarily set coordinates. In addition, the wireless communication device includes a GPS and the like, and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor transmits the positional information acquired by the GPS together with the dynamic information such as the doctor, Dynamic information such as a doctor may be acquired only when a position in a region where medical action is performed on a pre-set emergency case is indicated. Also, an information transmission device that transmits position information such as an identifier for identifying the position of each room or region to each room or region that constitutes a region where medical practice is performed for an emergency patient at a predetermined timing. (Not shown), etc., and when a doctor enters each room or area, information on the position transmitted by the information transmitting device is received by the wireless communication device worn by the doctor, and information on the received position is received. The wireless communication device may transmit dynamic information and the like including the doctor. In this case, the dynamic information accepting unit 106 such as a doctor is a doctor only when the position information included in the received dynamic information such as a doctor indicates a position in a region where medical action is performed on a pre-set emergency case. Isodynamic information may be acquired. In addition, since the process etc. which detect a position by RFID tag, GPS, etc. are well-known techniques, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted here.
　医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、さらに、入力手段を用いて入力された医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する。入力手段を用いた入力される医師等動的情報は、例えば後述するスケジュール情報等である。 The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor further receives dynamic information such as a doctor input using the input means, and accumulates at least temporarily. The dynamic information such as a doctor input using the input means is, for example, schedule information described later.
　また、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、１以上の医師に装着された無線通信装置から、医師識別子、および対応可または対応不可の少なくとも２種類以上の状態を識別する状態識別子とを有する１以上の情報である医師等動的情報を受信し、蓄積してもよい。対応可、または対応不可とは、医師が急患に対する医療行為に対応可であるか否かを示す情報である。状態識別子は、例えば、対応可または対応不可の状態を示す状態識別子に加えて、さらに、対応可能か否かが分からない状況を示す不明という状態識別子を含んでもよい。 Further, the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor has a doctor identifier and a state identifier for identifying at least two types of states that can or cannot be handled from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors. Dynamic information such as a doctor, which is the above information, may be received and accumulated. “Available” or “impossible” is information indicating whether or not a doctor can deal with a medical action for an emergency patient. The status identifier may include, for example, a status identifier of unknown indicating a situation in which it is not known whether or not it can be handled, in addition to a status identifier that indicates a status of handling or not handling.
　医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、１以上の各医師に装着された無線通信装置から、１以上の医師識別子と、医師がいる位置を示す位置情報との組を１組以上有する医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積してもよい。ここで述べる位置情報とは、医師の位置を示す情報であり、例えば、無線通信装置の位置、例えば座標や無損通信装置が存在する部屋や領域等を示す情報である。なお、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、受け付けた無線通信装置の位置を示す座標情報を用いて、無線通信装置の位置を含む部屋等の領域の名前等の識別情報を示す位置情報を取得して蓄積も良い。例えば、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域を含む領域を構成する１以上の各領域、例えば部屋等の輪郭を定義する座標の情報等を、各領域を示す情報である領域識別子や部屋識別子（例えば部屋名や領域名）と対応付けて予め用意しておき、無線通信装置の位置を示す座標が、いずれの領域に位置するかを検出し、検出した領域に対応した領域識別子や部屋識別子を取得するようにしてもよい。 The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor moves from one or more wireless communication devices attached to one or more doctors and includes one or more pairs of one or more doctor identifiers and position information indicating the position where the doctor is located. Target information may be received and stored at least temporarily. The position information described here is information indicating the position of the doctor, for example, information indicating the position of the wireless communication device, for example, the room or area where the coordinates and the lossless communication device exist. The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor obtains position information indicating identification information such as the name of an area such as a room including the position of the wireless communication device using the received coordinate information indicating the position of the wireless communication device. And accumulation is also good. For example, information on coordinates that define an outline of one or more areas, for example, a room, etc. that constitute an area including an area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient, such as an area identifier or room identifier ( For example, a room name or an area name) is prepared in advance, and it is detected in which area the coordinates indicating the position of the wireless communication apparatus are located, and an area identifier or a room identifier corresponding to the detected area is determined. You may make it acquire.
　なお、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、以下のように位置情報を取得しても良い。予め、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域を構成する１以上の各領域、例えば各部屋等に、各領域内において無線通信装置から送信される医師等動的情報等の情報だけを受信可能となるようにアンテナを配置しておくようにするとともに、各アンテナに、アンテナが配置されている領域や部屋の識別子を対応付けておくようにし、それぞれのアンテナが無線通信装置からの情報を受信した場合に、送信元の無線通信装置の位置情報として、受信したアンテナに対応付けられた各領域または各部屋の識別子を取得するようにしても良い。なお、一の領域内の無線通信装置から送信された情報だけを受信するようにするためには、例えば、指向性の高いアンテナを、一の領域の四隅に、領域の中央に向けて配置しても良いし、１以上のアンテナを、受信範囲を組み合わせた範囲が、一の領域を超えないように複数配置しても良い。また、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域を含む領域の予め決められた複数の位置に、複数のアンテナを設置し、無線通信装置からの情報をアンテナが受信した場合に、受信したアンテナの位置の情報（例えば、座標情報）、あるいは、受信強度が最も強かったアンテナの位置の情報を、医師の位置情報として取得するようにしても良い。 Note that the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor may acquire position information as follows. In advance, it is possible to receive only information such as a doctor's dynamic information transmitted from the wireless communication device in each area in one or more areas, for example, rooms, etc. that constitute an area where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient in advance. The antennas are arranged in such a way that each antenna is associated with an identifier of the area or room in which the antenna is arranged, and each antenna receives information from the wireless communication device. In this case, an identifier of each region or each room associated with the received antenna may be acquired as the position information of the transmission source wireless communication device. In order to receive only information transmitted from wireless communication devices in one area, for example, highly directional antennas are arranged at the four corners of one area toward the center of the area. Alternatively, a plurality of one or more antennas may be arranged so that the range combining the reception ranges does not exceed one region. In addition, when a plurality of antennas are installed at a plurality of predetermined positions in a region including a region where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient, and the antenna receives information from the wireless communication device, the position of the received antenna (For example, coordinate information) or information on the position of the antenna having the strongest reception intensity may be acquired as the position information of the doctor.
　医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、医師等動的情報と、時刻を示す時刻情報とを対応付けた複数の情報である医師等動的履歴情報を、少なくとも一時的に蓄積してもよい。例えば医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、医師等動的情報を受け付けた時刻の時刻情報を取得し、医師等動的情報と対応付けて蓄積する。時刻情報は、例えば、図示しない時計等の計時手段等から取得可能である。 The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor may at least temporarily accumulate dynamic history information such as a doctor, which is a plurality of information in which dynamic information such as a doctor is associated with time information indicating time. For example, the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor acquires time information of the time when the dynamic information such as the doctor is received, and stores the time information in association with the dynamic information such as the doctor. The time information can be acquired from, for example, time measuring means such as a clock (not shown).
　医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、医師等動的情報として、さらに、医師のスケジュール情報を受け付けて、医師識別子と対応付けて蓄積しても良い。 The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor may further receive the schedule information of the doctor as the dynamic information such as the doctor, and store it in association with the doctor identifier.
　ここで述べる受け付けとは、キーボードやマウス、タッチパネルなどの入力デバイスから入力された情報の受け付け、有線もしくは無線の通信回線を介して送信された情報の受信、光ディスクや磁気ディスク、半導体メモリなどの記録媒体から読み出された情報の受け付けなどを含む概念である。医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、通信手段や受信手段のドライバーや、テンキーやキーボード等の入力手段のデバイスドライバーや、メニュー画面の制御ソフトウェア等で実現され得る。 The reception described here refers to reception of information input from an input device such as a keyboard, mouse, touch panel, reception of information transmitted via a wired or wireless communication line, recording on an optical disk, magnetic disk, semiconductor memory, or the like. It is a concept including reception of information read from a medium. The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor can be realized by a driver of a communication unit or a reception unit, a device driver of an input unit such as a numeric keypad or a keyboard, a menu screen control software, or the like.
　また、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、情報を受信するための１以上のアンテナや、ＲＦＩＤタグリーダ、またはＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタ等を備えていても良い。 The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor may include one or more antennas for receiving information, an RFID tag reader, an RFID tag reader / writer, or the like.
　なお、ここでは、医師等動的情報受付部１０６が、スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１と、位置情報受付手段１０６２とを備えた場合について説明する。 Here, a case where the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor is provided with a schedule information receiving unit 1061 and a position information receiving unit 1062 will be described.
　スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１は、医師識別子と医師識別子で識別される医師のスケジュールに関するスケジュール情報とを受け付ける。スケジュール情報は、例えば、医師の予定と、日時とを対応付けた情報である。例えば医師の予定の開始時刻と終了時刻とを示すことが可能な情報である。スケジュール情報は、例えば、医師の勤務時間を示す情報であっても良いし、医師が急患に対する医療行為を行う時間帯や、医療行為を行わない時間帯等を示す情報であっても良いし、医師が行う手術や、回診等の予定等を示す情報であっても良い。スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１は、例えば、医師識別子と対応付けられたスケジュール情報を受け付ける。受け付けたスケジュール情報を、医師識別子と対応付けて医師等動的情報として図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。 The schedule information accepting means 1061 accepts a doctor identifier and schedule information related to the doctor's schedule identified by the doctor identifier. The schedule information is, for example, information in which a doctor's schedule is associated with a date and time. For example, it is information that can indicate the start time and end time of a doctor's schedule. The schedule information may be, for example, information indicating a doctor's working hours, information indicating a time period in which a doctor performs a medical action for an emergency patient, a time period in which a medical action is not performed, or the like, It may be information indicating a schedule or the like for an operation performed by a doctor or a round-trip. The schedule information receiving unit 1061 receives schedule information associated with a doctor identifier, for example. The received schedule information is stored in a storage medium (not shown) as dynamic information such as a doctor in association with the doctor identifier.
　ここで述べる受け付けは、キーボードやマウス、タッチパネルなどの入力デバイスから入力された情報の受け付け、有線もしくは無線の通信回線を介して送信された情報の受信、光ディスクや磁気ディスク、半導体メモリなどの記録媒体から読み出された情報の受け付けなどを含む概念である。スケジュール情報の入力手段は、テンキーやキーボードやマウスやメニュー画面によるものや、有線や無線の通信手段等、何でも良い。スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１は、テンキーやキーボード等の入力手段のデバイスドライバーや、メニュー画面の制御ソフトウェア等で実現され得る。 The reception described here is reception of information input from an input device such as a keyboard, mouse, touch panel, reception of information transmitted via a wired or wireless communication line, a recording medium such as an optical disk, a magnetic disk, or a semiconductor memory. This is a concept including reception of information read out from. The schedule information input means may be anything such as a numeric keypad, a keyboard, a mouse, a menu screen, or a wired or wireless communication means. The schedule information receiving unit 1061 can be realized by a device driver of an input unit such as a numeric keypad or a keyboard, control software for a menu screen, or the like.
　位置情報受付手段１０６２は、医師識別子と、医師識別子で識別される医師の位置情報とを受け付ける。位置情報受付手段１０６２は、無線通信装置から送信される医師識別子と、医師の位置情報とを受け付ける。医師の位置情報については、上述したのでここでは詳細な説明は省略する。位置情報受付手段１０６２は、無線通信装置から送信される情報に、位置情報が含まれる場合、この位置情報を受け付けてもよい。また、無線通信装置から送信される情報を用いて位置情報を取得して受け付けても良い。例えば、予め、複数のアンテナとアンテナが設けられている位置の情報、例えば座標や、部屋や領域の名称等の識別子を対応付けておくようにし、無線通信装置から情報を受信したアンテナ、もしくは無線通信装置から受信した情報の強度が最も高いアンテナの位置の情報を、医師等動的情報受付部１０６が取得するようにし、この位置の情報を、医師の位置情報として受け付けるようにしてもよい。また、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域を含む領域に予め配置されている位置が決まっている複数のアンテナを設けるようにし、無線通信装置から送信される情報を受信した１以上のアンテナの受信強度と、その位置の情報とを用いて三点測位等で無線通信装置の位置を算出し、この位置の情報を、医師の位置情報として受け付けるようにしても良い。また、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域を含む領域を構成する各部屋や領域に、各部屋や領域等の位置を識別するための識別子等の位置の情報を、予め指定されたタイミングで送信する情報送信装置（図示せず）等を設け、医師が、各部屋や領域に入った際に、情報送信装置が送信する位置の情報を、医師が装着した無線通信装置が受信し、受信した位置の情報を含む医師等動的情報等を、無線通信装置が送信するようにしても良い。この場合、位置情報受付手段１０６２は、無線通信装置から送信される医師等動的情報に含まれる位置の情報を医師の位置情報として受け付けても良い。位置情報受付手段１０６２は、受け付けた位置情報を、医師識別子と対応付けて医師等動的情報として図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。 The position information receiving means 1062 receives the doctor identifier and the position information of the doctor identified by the doctor identifier. The position information receiving unit 1062 receives the doctor identifier and the doctor position information transmitted from the wireless communication apparatus. Since the doctor's position information has been described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. When the position information is included in the information transmitted from the wireless communication apparatus, the position information receiving unit 1062 may receive the position information. Further, position information may be acquired and received using information transmitted from the wireless communication device. For example, information on positions where a plurality of antennas and antennas are provided, for example, coordinates, identifiers such as names of rooms and areas, are associated with each other, and an antenna that receives information from a wireless communication device, or a wireless The information on the position of the antenna having the highest intensity of information received from the communication device may be acquired by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor, and the position information may be received as the position information of the doctor. In addition, a plurality of antennas whose positions are determined in advance are provided in a region including a region where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient, and reception of one or more antennas that receive information transmitted from the wireless communication device The position of the wireless communication device may be calculated by three-point positioning or the like using the strength and the position information, and the position information may be received as doctor position information. Also, location information such as an identifier for identifying the location of each room or region is transmitted to each room or region constituting the region including the region where medical treatment is performed for an emergency patient at a predetermined timing. An information transmission device (not shown) is provided, and when the doctor enters each room or area, the wireless communication device worn by the doctor receives and receives information on the position transmitted by the information transmission device. The wireless communication device may transmit dynamic information such as a doctor information including position information. In this case, the position information receiving unit 1062 may receive position information included in dynamic information such as a doctor transmitted from the wireless communication apparatus as the position information of the doctor. The position information receiving means 1062 accumulates the received position information in association with a doctor identifier as a dynamic information such as a doctor in a storage medium (not shown).
　ここで述べる受け付けは、例えば、無線の通信回線やネットワーク等を介して送信された情報の受信である。スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１は、無線通信のドライバーや、メニュー画面の制御ソフトウェア等で実現され得る。また、スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１は、情報を受信するための１以上のアンテナや、ＲＦＩＤタグリーダ、またはＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタ等を備えていても良い。 The acceptance described here is, for example, reception of information transmitted via a wireless communication line or a network. The schedule information receiving means 1061 can be realized by a wireless communication driver, control software for a menu screen, or the like. Further, the schedule information receiving means 1061 may include one or more antennas for receiving information, an RFID tag reader, an RFID tag reader / writer, or the like.
　表示制御情報格納部１０７は、医師識別子と位置情報とを表示する、または表示しない領域に関する情報である表示制御情報を格納し得る。表示する領域に医師の位置を示す位置情報が位置する場合、この位置情報およびこれに対応付けられた医師識別情報が表示対象であることとなる。表示しない領域に医師の位置を示す位置情報が位置する場合、この位置情報およびこれに対応付けられた医師識別情報が非表示の対象であることとなる。表示制御情報は、結果的に、表示する領域と表示しない領域とが指定できる情報であればよく、表示する領域だけを指定する情報であってもよいし、表示しない領域だけを指定する情報であっても良い。表示制御情報の領域に関する情報は、例えば、領域の輪郭を示す座標情報等であっても良いし、上述したような領域名や部屋名等の領域識別子や部屋識別子であっても良い。 The display control information storage unit 107 can store display control information that is information related to a region that displays or does not display a doctor identifier and position information. When position information indicating the position of the doctor is located in the area to be displayed, this position information and doctor identification information associated with the position information are to be displayed. When position information indicating the position of the doctor is located in a region not to be displayed, this position information and doctor identification information associated with the position information are to be hidden. As a result, the display control information may be information that can specify a display area and a non-display area. The display control information may be information that specifies only a display area or information that specifies only a non-display area. There may be. The information regarding the area of the display control information may be, for example, coordinate information indicating the outline of the area, or may be an area identifier such as the area name or the room name as described above, or a room identifier.
　表示制御情報格納部１０７に表示制御情報が記憶される過程は問わない。表示制御情報格納部１０７は、不揮発性の記録媒体が好適であるが、揮発性の記録媒体でも実現可能である。 The process in which the display control information is stored in the display control information storage unit 107 does not matter. The display control information storage unit 107 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
　表示部１０８は、表示制御情報に従って、表示する領域にいる医師識別子のみ表示する。具体的には、表示部１０８は、医師等動的情報受付部１０６が受け付けた医師識別子と位置情報との組の中から、対応する位置情報が、表示制御情報が表示する領域に指定している領域内の位置情報であることを示している医師識別子を検出し、この医師識別子を表示する。あるいは、医師等動的情報受付部１０６が受け付けた医師識別子と位置情報との組の中から、対応する位置情報が、表示制御情報が表示しない領域に指定している領域内の位置情報であることを示している医師識別子以外の医師識別子を検出し、この医師識別子を表示しても良い。表示部１０８は、例えば、医師識別子を、当該医師識別子と対応する位置情報と対応付けて表示しても良い。また、位置情報が、座標の情報である場合、この座標が含まれる領域や部屋を、領域や部屋の輪郭等を定義する座標情報等を用いて検出し、検出した領域や部屋の識別子を医師識別子と対応付けて表示するようにしても良い。また、位置情報が、領域識別子や部屋識別子である場合、この領域識別子や部屋識別子が示す領域や部屋の間取り図等を用意し、位置情報が示す領域識別子や部屋識別子と対応する間取り図上の領域内に、位置情報に対応する医師識別子を配置した画像を表示しても良い。また、位置情報が座標の情報である場合、急患に対応可能な領域を縮尺して示した間取り図等を用意し、この間取り図上の位置情報が示す座標上に、医師識別子を表示するようにしてもよい。なお、表示部１０８は、医師等動的情報に状態識別子が含まれる場合、状態識別子に応じて、表示する医師識別子を選択するようにしても良い。例えば、表示部１０８は、対応可である表示識別子に対応付けられた医師識別子のみを、医師等動的情報から取得し、この取得した医師識別子のうちの、表示する領域にいる医師の医師識別子のみを表示するようにしてもよい。あるいは、対応不可である表示識別子に対応付けられた医師識別子のみを、医師等動的情報から取得し、この取得した医師識別子のうちの、表示する領域にいる医師の医師識別子のみを表示するようにしてもよい。また、状態識別子が不明である場合、即ち対応が不明であることを示している場合、この状態識別子に対応した医師識別子を表示に利用するように設定しておいても良いし、表示に利用しないように設定しておいても良い。 The display unit 108 displays only the doctor identifier in the display area according to the display control information. Specifically, the display unit 108 designates the corresponding position information as an area to be displayed by the display control information from the combination of the doctor identifier and the position information received by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor. The doctor identifier indicating that the position information is within the area is detected, and the doctor identifier is displayed. Alternatively, the corresponding position information is the position information in the area designated as the area that is not displayed by the display control information from the set of the doctor identifier and the position information received by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor. A doctor identifier other than the doctor identifier indicating this may be detected, and this doctor identifier may be displayed. For example, the display unit 108 may display a doctor identifier in association with position information corresponding to the doctor identifier. When the position information is coordinate information, the area or room including the coordinates is detected using coordinate information that defines the area or the outline of the room, and the identifier of the detected area or room is determined by the doctor. It may be displayed in association with the identifier. In addition, when the position information is an area identifier or a room identifier, an area or room floor plan or the like indicated by the area identifier or the room identifier is prepared, and on the floor plan corresponding to the area identifier or the room identifier indicated by the position information. You may display the image which has arrange | positioned the doctor identifier corresponding to position information in an area | region. Further, when the position information is coordinate information, a floor plan or the like showing a scaled area corresponding to the emergency patient is prepared, and a doctor identifier is displayed on the coordinates indicated by the position information on the floor plan. It may be. Note that when the state identifier is included in the dynamic information such as the doctor, the display unit 108 may select the doctor identifier to be displayed according to the state identifier. For example, the display unit 108 acquires only the doctor identifier associated with the display identifier that can be handled from the dynamic information such as the doctor, and among the acquired doctor identifiers, the doctor identifier of the doctor in the display area May be displayed. Alternatively, only the doctor identifier associated with the display identifier that cannot be handled is acquired from the dynamic information such as a doctor, and only the doctor identifiers of the doctors in the display area of the acquired doctor identifiers are displayed. It may be. If the state identifier is unknown, that is, if the correspondence is unknown, the doctor identifier corresponding to the state identifier may be set to be used for display or used for display. It may be set not to.
　表示部１０８は、ディスプレイデバイスを含むと考えても含まないと考えても良い。表示部１０８は、ディスプレイデバイスのドライバーソフトまたは、ディスプレイデバイスのドライバーソフトとディスプレイデバイス等で実現され得る。 The display unit 108 may be considered as including or not including a display device. The display unit 108 can be realized by display device driver software or display device driver software and a display device.
　医療チーム判断部１０９は、受入要請受信部１０３が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断する。医療チーム判断部１０９は、例えば、医師等静的情報と医師等動的情報とが、予め指定された条件を満たすか否かを判断し、条件を満たすと判断した場合に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断する。なお、受入要請受信部１０３が受入要請を受信した場合に、結果的に、医療チーム判断部１０９が、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かの判断結果を出力可能であれば、上記のように、受入要請受信部１０３が受入要請を受信した場合に、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを医療チーム判断部１０９が判断したと考えても良い。例えば、医療チーム判断部１０９が、常に、あるいは一定または不定の時間間隔毎に、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報とを用いて、医療チーム判断部１０９が急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かの判断を繰り返して行い、受入要請受信部１０３が受入要請を受信した場合に、その直前の判断結果を出力することも、上記のように、受入要請受信部１０３が受入要請を受信した場合に、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断することであると考えても良い。 When the acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives the acceptance request, the medical team determination unit 109 uses the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor to determine whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling the emergency case. Determine whether. For example, the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor satisfy a predetermined condition, and if the medical team determination unit 109 determines that the condition is satisfied, the response to the emergency patient is determined. Determine that there is a medical team available. As a result, when the acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives the acceptance request, the medical team determination unit 109 can output a determination result as to whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency case. For example, as described above, when the acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives an acceptance request, is there a medical team capable of handling a sudden illness using static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor? It may be considered that the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not. For example, the medical team determination unit 109 can respond to a sudden illness by using static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor at all times or at fixed or indefinite time intervals. It is also possible to repeatedly determine whether or not a medical team is present, and when the acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives the acceptance request, outputting the judgment result immediately before the acceptance request is also received as described above. Even if a doctor receives an acceptance request, it may be considered to determine whether or not there is a medical team that can respond to an emergency case using static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor. good.
　予め指定された条件は、受入要求に応じた急患に応じた医療処置が可能な医療チームが存在することを判断可能な条件であれば、どのような条件であっても良い。予め指定された条件は、例えば、医師等静的情報が示す各医療チーム別の医師識別子群の中に、予め指定された割合以上の医師識別子が、医師等動的情報が示す急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子と一致する医師識別子群があること、という条件である。急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子とは、ここでは、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる１以上の医師の医師識別子である。例えば、医療チーム判断部１０９は、医師等動的情報が示す急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる医師を示す１以上の医師識別子が、医師等静的情報が示す一の医療チームを構成する医師の医師識別子の全てと一致するか否かを判断する。そして、全ての医師識別子が一致する医療チームが一以上あった場合、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断し、ない場合、医療チームが存在しないと判断する。また、予め指定された条件は、例えば、医師等静的情報が示す各医療チーム別の医師識別子群の中に、予め指定された割合以上、あるいは人数以上の医師識別子が、医師等動的情報が示す医師識別子と一致し、なおかつその一致する医師識別子の中に、各医療チームのリーダや責任者等の主たる医師の医師識別子が含まれる医師識別子群があること、という条件等であっても良い。 The conditions designated in advance may be any conditions as long as it is possible to determine that there is a medical team capable of performing medical treatment according to the emergency case according to the acceptance request. Pre-designated conditions are available, for example, in physician identifier groups for each medical team indicated by static information such as doctors. The condition is that there is a group of doctor identifiers that matches one or more doctor identifiers of doctors. Here, the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency case are doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in a region where medical treatment is performed for the emergency case. For example, in the medical team determination unit 109, one or more doctor identifiers indicating doctors in a region where medical action is performed on the emergency case indicated by the dynamic information such as a doctor constitutes one medical team indicated by the static information such as the doctor. It is determined whether or not all of the doctor identifiers of the doctors to be matched. If there is one or more medical teams that match all the doctor identifiers, it is determined that there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency, and if there is no medical team, it is determined that there is no medical team. In addition, the predesignated condition is, for example, in a group of doctor identifiers for each medical team indicated by static information such as doctors. Even if there is a condition that there is a doctor identifier group that includes the doctor identifiers of the main doctors such as the leaders and responsible persons of each medical team in the corresponding doctor identifiers good.
　また、医療チーム判断部１０９は、受入要請受信部１０３が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等静的情報が有する医療行為識別子および受入要請が有する障害部位識別子とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームの中で、医師等動的情報を用いて、現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する。医療チーム判断部１０９は、例えば、医師等静的情報と医師等動的情報と障害部位識別子とが、予め指定された条件を満たすか否かを判断し、条件を満たすと判断した場合に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断する。ここでの予め指定された条件は、例えば、医師等静的情報が示す各医療チーム別の医師識別子群の中に、障害部位識別子に対応した医療行為が可能な医療チームの医師識別子群があり、かつ、この医療チームの医師識別子群のうちの、予め指定された割合以上の医師識別子が、医師等動的情報が示す急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる１以上の医師の医師識別子と一致する、という条件である。 In addition, when the acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives the acceptance request, the medical team determination unit 109 can handle an emergency using the medical action identifier included in the static information such as a doctor and the disordered part identifier included in the acceptance request. Among the medical teams, using the dynamic information such as a doctor, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency case at present. For example, the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not static information such as a doctor, dynamic information such as a doctor, and a faulty part identifier satisfy a predetermined condition. Judge that there is a medical team that can handle emergency cases. The predesignated condition here includes, for example, a doctor identifier group of a medical team capable of performing a medical action corresponding to an obstacle site identifier in a doctor identifier group for each medical team indicated by static information such as a doctor. In addition, doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in a region in which medical identifiers of the medical team's doctor identifier group that are preliminarily specified or higher perform medical practice on emergency cases indicated by dynamic information such as doctors. It is a condition that matches.
　具体的には、受入要請が有する障害部位識別子と対応する医療行為識別子と対応付けられた医師識別子群がある場合、この医師識別子群が、障害部位識別子に対応した医療行為が可能な医療チームの医師識別子群であると判断することができる。そして、この医師識別子群について、予め指定された割合以上の医師識別子が、医師等動的情報が示す急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる１以上の医師の医師識別子と一致するか否かを判断するようにしてもよい。受入要請が有する障害部位識別子と対応する医療行為識別子と対応付けられた医師識別子群がない場合や、予め指定された割合以上の医師識別子が一致しない場合には、医療チームが存在しないと判断し、その他の場合には、医療チームが存在すると判断する。 Specifically, when there is a doctor identifier group associated with the medical practice identifier corresponding to the obstacle part identifier included in the acceptance request, this doctor identifier group is the medical team capable of performing the medical action corresponding to the obstacle part identifier. It can be judged that it is a doctor identifier group. In this group of doctor identifiers, whether or not a predetermined number or more of doctor identifiers match the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in the area where medical action is performed on the emergency illness indicated by the dynamic information such as a doctor. May be determined. When there is no doctor identifier group associated with the medical practice identifier corresponding to the obstacle part identifier included in the acceptance request, or when there is no coincidence of doctor identifiers of a predetermined ratio or more, it is determined that there is no medical team. In other cases, it is determined that a medical team exists.
　また、予め指定された条件に、各障害部位識別子に対応した医療行為が可能な医療チームの医師識別子群を指定する情報を加えておくようにし、この予め指定された条件を用いて、受入要請が有する障害部位識別子に応じた医師識別子群を取得し、この医師識別子群について、予め指定された割合以上の医師識別子が、医師等動的情報が示す急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる１以上の医師の医師識別子と一致するか否かを判断するようにしてもよい。予め指定された条件を用いて、受入要請が有する障害部位識別子に応じた医師識別子群が取得できない場合や、予め指定された割合以上の医師識別子が一致しない場合には、医療チームが存在しないと判断し、その他の場合には、医療チームが存在すると判断する。 In addition, information specifying a doctor identifier group of a medical team capable of performing a medical action corresponding to each obstacle part identifier is added to a predesignated condition, and an acceptance request is made using the predesignated condition. The doctor identifier group corresponding to the obstacle part identifier possessed by the doctor is acquired, and for this doctor identifier group, more than a predetermined proportion of doctor identifiers are in a region where medical action is performed for emergency cases indicated by dynamic information such as doctors. You may make it judge whether it corresponds with the doctor identifier of one or more doctors. If the doctor identifier group corresponding to the faulty part identifier included in the acceptance request cannot be acquired using the predesignated conditions, or if the doctor identifiers of the predesignated ratio or more do not match, there is no medical team Judgment, otherwise it is determined that a medical team exists.
　また、医療チーム判断部１０９は、医師等静的情報および医師等動的履歴情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断してもよい。医療チーム判断部１０９は、例えば、医師等静的情報と医師等動的履歴情報とが、予め指定された条件を満たすか否かを判断し、条件を満たすと判断した場合に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断する。 Further, the medical team determination unit 109 may determine whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency case using static information such as a doctor and dynamic history information such as a doctor. For example, the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether the static information such as a doctor and the dynamic history information such as a doctor satisfy a predetermined condition, and if the medical team determines that the condition is satisfied, Judge that there is a medical team that can.
　予め指定された条件は、受入要求に応じた医療処置が可能な医療チームが存在することを判断可能な条件であれば、どのような条件であっても良い。予め指定された条件は、例えば、医師等静的情報が示す各医療チーム別の医師識別子群の中に、予め指定された割合以上の医師識別子が、医師等動的履歴情報が示す急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子と一致する医師識別子群があること、という条件である。急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子とは、ここでは、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる１以上の医師の医師識別子、および医師等動的履歴情報を用いて医療チーム判断部１０９により、急患に対応可能な医師の医師識別子であると判断された医師識別子である。なお、急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子を判断する場合において、医師等動的履歴情報を用いた判断は、ここでは、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる医師であるか否かの判断よりも優先するものとする。条件を満たすか否かの判断処理は、上記と同様である。 The conditions specified in advance may be any conditions as long as it is possible to determine that there is a medical team capable of performing medical treatment according to the acceptance request. The predesignated condition corresponds to, for example, a doctor identifier group for each medical team indicated by static information such as a doctor, and a doctor identifier more than a predesignated ratio corresponds to an emergency case indicated by the dynamic history information such as a doctor. The condition is that there is a group of doctor identifiers that matches one or more possible doctor identifiers. Here, the doctor identifier of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency case is a medical team judgment using the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in the area where medical action is performed for the emergency case and the dynamic history information such as a doctor. The doctor identifier determined by the unit 109 to be a doctor identifier of a doctor capable of handling an emergency. When determining the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency case, the determination using the dynamic history information such as a doctor is here a doctor who is in the area of performing medical treatment for the emergency case. It shall have priority over the judgment of no. The process for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied is the same as described above.
　例えば、医師等動的履歴情報が、ある医師が手術室に入っていることを示しており、なおかつ、医師等動的履歴情報から算出される現在までの医師の手術室に入っている時間が、所定時間以上である場合、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する際に、この医師の医師識別子を、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる医師の医師識別子から除外して扱うようにしても良い。また、例えば、医師等動的履歴情報が、ある医師が手術室以外の、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいることを示していた場合においても、その前の所定時間内、例えば現在から５分前までの間に、手術室にいたことを医師等動的履歴情報が示しており、かつその前の所定時間内、例えば５分前から１０分前までの間には、手術室に入っていなかったことを示している場合には、この医師は、手術開始時に一時的に手術室の外に出ていると判断できることから、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する際に、この医師の医師識別子を、急患に対応が可能な医師の医師識別子から除外する。逆に、例えば５分前から１０分前までの間に手術室内にいることを示していれば、この医師の医師識別子を、急患に対応が可能な医師の医師識別子とする。 For example, the dynamic history information such as a doctor indicates that a doctor is in the operating room, and the time in the operating room of the doctor up to the present time calculated from the dynamic history information such as the doctor is When it is over a predetermined time, when determining whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency, the doctor identifier of this doctor is used as the doctor identifier of the doctor in the area where medical action is taken for the emergency You may make it exclude and handle. Also, for example, even when the dynamic history information such as a doctor indicates that a doctor is in an area where he / she performs medical treatment for an emergency case other than the operating room, within a predetermined time before that, for example, from the present Dynamic history information such as a doctor shows that he was in the operating room 5 minutes before, and within a predetermined time before that, for example, from 5 minutes to 10 minutes before, If this is not the case, the doctor can determine that he / she is temporarily out of the operating room at the start of the surgery, so there is a medical team that can handle the emergency. In this determination, the doctor identifier of this doctor is excluded from the doctor identifiers of doctors capable of handling emergency cases. On the other hand, for example, if it is indicated that the user is in the operating room between 5 minutes and 10 minutes before, the doctor identifier of this doctor is set as the doctor identifier of the doctor who can handle the emergency case.
　また、医療チーム判断部１０９は、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報が有するスケジュール情報と位置情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断してもよい。医療チーム判断部１０９は、例えば、医師等静的情報と医師等動的情報が有するスケジュール情報と位置情報とが、予め指定された条件を満たすか否かを判断し、条件を満たすと判断した場合に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断する。 In addition, the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the schedule information and the position information included in the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor. Also good. For example, the medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not the schedule information and the position information included in the static information such as a doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor satisfy a predetermined condition, and determines that the condition is satisfied. In this case, it is determined that there is a medical team capable of handling the emergency case.
　予め指定された条件は、例えば、医師等静的情報が示す各医療チーム別の医師識別子群の中に、予め指定された割合以上の医師識別子が、医師等動的情報が示す急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子と一致する医師識別子群があること、という条件である。急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子とは、ここでは、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる１以上の医師の医師識別子、および、急患に対して医療行為を行うことが可能な状態であることを示しているスケジュール情報に対応した医師識別子である。なお、急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子を判断する場合において、医師等動的履歴情報を用いた判断は、ここでは、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいる医師であるか否かの判断よりも優先するものとする。条件を満たすか否かの判断処理は、上記と同様である。 Pre-designated conditions are available, for example, in physician identifier groups for each medical team indicated by static information such as doctors. The condition is that there is a group of doctor identifiers that matches one or more doctor identifiers of doctors. The doctor identifiers of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency case are the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors in the area where the medical action is performed for the emergency case, and the medical action can be performed for the emergency case. This is a doctor identifier corresponding to the schedule information indicating that the state is in a proper state. When determining the doctor identifiers of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency case, the determination using the dynamic history information such as a doctor is here a doctor who is in the area of performing medical treatment for the emergency case. It shall have priority over the judgment of no. The process for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied is the same as described above.
　例えば、医療チーム判断部１０９は、ある医師の位置情報が、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域内の位置を示していなくても、その医師の医師識別子に対応したスケジュール情報が、その医師が、急患に対応が可能な状態であることを示す場合、例えば、その位置が、勤務時間内であることを示している場合、この医師の医師識別子を、急患に対して対応可能な医師の医師識別子として用いるようにしてもよい。逆に、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域内の位置を示していても、その医師の医師識別子に対応したスケジュール情報が、その医師が、急患に対応が可能な状態でないことを示す場合、例えば、医師の勤務時間外であることを示している場合、この医師の医師識別子を、急患に対して対応可能な医師の医師識別子として用いるようにしてもよい。 For example, even if the position information of a certain doctor does not indicate the position in the area where the medical action is performed on the emergency case, the medical team determination unit 109 displays the schedule information corresponding to the doctor identifier of the doctor. When indicating that it is possible to respond to an emergency case, for example, when the position indicates that it is within working hours, the doctor identifier of this doctor is indicated as a doctor doctor who can respond to the emergency case. It may be used as an identifier. Conversely, if the schedule information corresponding to the doctor identifier of the doctor indicates that the doctor is not in a state capable of handling the emergency case even though the position in the area where the medical action is performed for the emergency patient is indicated, For example, when it is indicated that the doctor is out of working hours, the doctor identifier of the doctor may be used as a doctor identifier of a doctor capable of handling an emergency patient.
　また、医療チーム判断部１０９は、受入要請受信部１０３が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等動的情報が有する各医師の状態識別子を用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断してもよい。 In addition, when the acceptance request receiving unit 103 receives the acceptance request, the medical team determination unit 109 has a medical team that can deal with an emergency using the doctor's status identifier of the dynamic information. It may be determined whether or not.
　医療チーム判断部１０９は、例えば、医師等静的情報と医師等動的情報が有する各医師の状態識別子とが、予め指定された条件を満たすか否かを判断し、条件を満たすと判断した場合に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断する。 The medical team determination unit 109 determines, for example, whether or not the static information such as the doctor and the state identifier of each doctor included in the dynamic information such as the doctor satisfy a predetermined condition, and determines that the condition is satisfied. In this case, it is determined that there is a medical team capable of handling the emergency case.
　予め指定された条件は、例えば、医師等静的情報が示す各医療チーム別の医師識別子群の中に、予め指定された割合以上の医師識別子が、医師等動的情報が示す急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子と一致する医師識別子群があること、という条件である。急患に対応可能な１以上の医師の医師識別子とは、ここでは、例えば、対応する状態識別子が、対応可、即ち急患に対する対応が可能であることを示している医師識別子である。条件を満たすか否かの判断処理は、上記と同様である。 Pre-designated conditions are available, for example, in physician identifier groups for each medical team indicated by static information such as doctors. The condition is that there is a group of doctor identifiers that matches one or more doctor identifiers of doctors. Here, the doctor identifier of one or more doctors capable of handling an emergency patient is, for example, a doctor identifier indicating that the corresponding state identifier can be handled, that is, the emergency patient can be handled. The process for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied is the same as described above.
　なお、医療チーム判断部１０９は、上述した組合せ以外の、位置情報や、スケジュール情報や、状態識別子や、医療行為識別子や、医師等動的履歴情報等の２以上の組合せを用いて、適宜急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを適宜判断しても良い。 The medical team determination unit 109 uses a combination of two or more of position information, schedule information, state identifiers, medical action identifiers, dynamic history information such as doctors, etc., other than the above-described combinations, as appropriate. It may be appropriately determined whether or not there is a medical team that can handle this.
　医療チーム判断部１０９は、通常、ＭＰＵやメモリ等から実現され得る。医療チーム判断部１０９の処理手順は、通常、ソフトウェアで実現され、当該ソフトウェアはＲＯＭ等の記録媒体に記録されている。但し、ハードウェア（専用回路）で実現しても良い。 The medical team determination unit 109 can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing procedure of the medical team determination unit 109 is usually realized by software, and the software is recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. However, it may be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
　対応可否送信部１１０は、ベッド判断部１０４がベッドの空きがあると判断し、かつ、医療チーム判断部１０９が急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断した場合、対応可能である旨の情報を外部の装置（図示せず）に送信する。また、対応可否送信部１１０は、例えば、ベッド判断部１０４がベッドの空きがないと判断した、もしくは、医療チーム判断部１０９が急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在しないと判断した場合に、対応が不可である旨の情報を送信しても良い。外部の装置とは、通常、受入要請を送信した装置であるが、他の外部の装置でも良い。他の外部の装置である場合、例えば、上述した受入要請に、他の外部の装置と通信するための通信先のアドレス情報等の情報（ＩＰアドレス）が含まれているようにし、この受入要請に含まれる通信先の情報を用いて、他の外部の装置に対応可能である旨の情報を送信する。対応可否送信部１１０は、通常、無線または有線の通信手段で実現されるが、放送手段で実現されても良い。 Correspondence propriety transmission unit 110 is able to respond when the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is an available bed and the medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is a medical team capable of handling a sudden illness. Is transmitted to an external device (not shown). For example, the response transmission / reception unit 110 determines that the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is no vacant bed, or the medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is no medical team capable of handling an emergency case. Information indicating that the response is not possible may be transmitted. An external device is usually a device that has transmitted an acceptance request, but may be another external device. In the case of another external device, for example, the acceptance request described above includes information (IP address) such as address information of a communication destination for communicating with the other external device, and this acceptance request. Is used to transmit information indicating that it is compatible with other external devices. The supportability transmission unit 110 is usually realized by wireless or wired communication means, but may be realized by broadcasting means.
　無線通信装置３は、医師識別子を含む情報を、上述した救急医療支援装置１に無線で送信する装置である。無線通信装置３は、医師に装着される無線通信装置である。上述した医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、この無線通信装置３から送信される医師識別子を含む情報を受信する。無線通信装置３は、例えば、アクティブ型のＲＦＩＤタグである。あるいはパッシブ型のＲＦＩＤタグであっても良い。また、無線通信装置３は、ＧＰＳを備えた専用装置や、携帯電話やＰＨＳやスマートフォン等であってもよい。無線通信に用いられる電波は、医療行為に支障のない周波数帯や出力となるよう調整する。この具体例においては、とくに、カード形状の無線通信装置３を用いる場合を例に挙げて説明する。ここでは、このようなカード形状の無線通信装置３を医師状態管理用カード３０と呼ぶ。ただし、カード形状ではない携帯情報端末や、携帯電話や、ＰＨＳや、スマートフォン等の医師状態管理用端末等を無線通信装置３として用いても良い。 The wireless communication device 3 is a device that wirelessly transmits information including a doctor identifier to the emergency medical support device 1 described above. The wireless communication device 3 is a wireless communication device worn by a doctor. The above-described dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor receives information including a doctor identifier transmitted from the wireless communication device 3. The wireless communication device 3 is, for example, an active RFID tag. Alternatively, a passive RFID tag may be used. The wireless communication device 3 may be a dedicated device equipped with GPS, a mobile phone, a PHS, a smartphone, or the like. Radio waves used for wireless communication are adjusted so as to have a frequency band and output that do not interfere with medical practice. In this specific example, a case where the card-shaped wireless communication device 3 is used will be described as an example. Here, such a card-shaped wireless communication device 3 is referred to as a doctor state management card 30. However, a portable information terminal that does not have a card shape, a mobile phone, a PHS, a doctor state management terminal such as a smartphone, or the like may be used as the wireless communication device 3.
　医師識別子格納部３０１には、医師識別子が格納され得る。医師識別子格納部３０１に格納される医師識別子は、無線通信装置３を装着する医師に対応した医師識別子である。医師識別子格納部３０１に医師識別子が記憶される過程は問わない。医師識別子格納部３０１は、不揮発性の記録媒体が好適であるが、揮発性の記録媒体でも実現可能である。なお、医師識別子格納部３０１には、医師識別子以外の医師等動的情報等の情報も格納されていてもよい。 The doctor identifier storage unit 301 can store a doctor identifier. The doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301 is a doctor identifier corresponding to the doctor wearing the wireless communication device 3. The process in which a doctor identifier is memorize | stored in the doctor identifier storage part 301 is not ask | required. The doctor identifier storage unit 301 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium. The doctor identifier storage unit 301 may also store information such as dynamic information such as a doctor other than the doctor identifier.
　状態識別子受付部３０２は、医師により入力される状態識別子を受け付ける。状態識別子は、上述したように、対応可であるか対応不可であるかを示す情報である。状態識別子を入力する手段は、テンキーやキーボードやメニュー画面によるもの等、何でも良い。例えば、カード形状の無線通信装置の場合、入力手段は、ディップスイッチやスライドスイッチ等のスイッチや、ボタン等であってもよい。 The state identifier receiving unit 302 receives a state identifier input by a doctor. As described above, the state identifier is information indicating whether or not correspondence is possible. The means for inputting the state identifier may be anything such as a numeric keypad, a keyboard, or a menu screen. For example, in the case of a card-shaped wireless communication device, the input means may be a switch such as a dip switch or a slide switch, a button, or the like.
　無線送信部３０３は、医師識別子格納部３０１に格納されている医師識別子を送信する。また、無線送信部３０３は、医師識別子格納部３０１に格納されている医師識別子と、状態識別子受付部３０２が受け付けた状態識別子とを含む医師等動的情報等の情報を送信しても良い。無線送信部３０３が医師用識別子を送信するタイミングは問わない。例えば、定期的あるいは不定期に送信する。無線送信部３０３は、例えば予め指定された一定又は不定のタイミングで患者識別子を送信する。無線送信部３０３は、通信手段等で実現可能である。 The wireless transmission unit 303 transmits the doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301. In addition, the wireless transmission unit 303 may transmit information such as dynamic information such as a doctor including a doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301 and the state identifier received by the state identifier reception unit 302. There is no limitation on the timing at which the wireless transmission unit 303 transmits the doctor identifier. For example, it is transmitted regularly or irregularly. For example, the wireless transmission unit 303 transmits a patient identifier at a predetermined or indefinite timing designated in advance. The wireless transmission unit 303 can be realized by communication means or the like.
　なお、無線通信装置３は、医師識別子あるいは医師等動的情報を送信する指示等を救急医療支援装置１等から受信する受信部（図示せず）等を有していても良く、この指示に応じて医師識別子を送信しても良い。また、無線通信装置３は、自装置の位置を示す情報を取得するためのＧＰＳ等の取得部（図示せず）等を有していても良く、この取得部が取得した位置の情報を、医師識別子と対応付けて送信してもよい。 The wireless communication device 3 may include a receiving unit (not shown) that receives an instruction to transmit dynamic information such as a doctor identifier or a doctor from the emergency medical support device 1 or the like. The doctor identifier may be transmitted accordingly. Further, the wireless communication device 3 may have an acquisition unit (not shown) such as a GPS for acquiring information indicating the position of the own device, and the information on the position acquired by the acquisition unit is It may be transmitted in association with the doctor identifier.
　患者用無線通信装置４は、患者であること示す情報を、上述した救急医療支援装置１に無線で送信する装置である。なお、ここでは、患者であることを示す情報が、患者識別子である場合を例に挙げて説明する。無線通信装置３は、患者に装着される無線通信装置である。患者用無線通信装置４は、例えば、アクティブ型のＲＦＩＤタグである。あるいはパッシブ型のＲＦＩＤタグであっても良い。また、無線通信装置３は、ＧＰＳを備えた専用装置や、携帯電話やＰＨＳやＰＤＡやスマートフォン等であってもよい。無線通信に用いられる電波は、医療行為に支障のない周波数帯とする。患者用無線通信装置４の形状は、例えば、ベッドに入っている状態で、動作の邪魔等にならない形状であることが好ましい。例えば、患者用無線通信装置４は、リストバンド形状等であることが好ましい。 The patient wireless communication device 4 is a device that wirelessly transmits information indicating that the patient is a patient to the emergency medical support device 1 described above. Here, a case where the information indicating a patient is a patient identifier will be described as an example. The wireless communication device 3 is a wireless communication device worn by a patient. The patient wireless communication device 4 is, for example, an active RFID tag. Alternatively, a passive RFID tag may be used. The wireless communication device 3 may be a dedicated device equipped with GPS, a mobile phone, a PHS, a PDA, a smartphone, or the like. Radio waves used for wireless communication are in a frequency band that does not interfere with medical practice. The shape of the patient wireless communication device 4 is preferably, for example, a shape that does not interfere with the operation in the state of being in a bed. For example, the patient wireless communication device 4 preferably has a wristband shape or the like.
　患者識別子格納部４０１には、患者識別子が格納され得る。患者識別子格納部４０１に格納される患者識別子は、例えば、当該装置を装着した患者に対応した患者識別子である。患者識別子格納部４０１に患者識別子が記憶される過程は問わない。患者識別子格納部４０１は、不揮発性の記録媒体が好適であるが、揮発性の記録媒体でも実現可能である。 The patient identifier storage unit 401 can store a patient identifier. The patient identifier stored in the patient identifier storage unit 401 is, for example, a patient identifier corresponding to the patient wearing the device. The process in which a patient identifier is memorize | stored in the patient identifier storage part 401 is not ask | required. The patient identifier storage unit 401 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but can also be realized by a volatile recording medium.
　患者用無線送信部４０２は、患者識別子格納部４０１に格納されている患者識別子を送信する。患者用無線送信部４０２が患者用識別子を送信するタイミングは問わない。患者用無線送信部４０２は、例えば予め指定された一定又は不定のタイミングで患者識別子を送信する。患者識別子送信部４０２は、通信手段等で実現可能である。 The patient wireless transmission unit 402 transmits the patient identifier stored in the patient identifier storage unit 401. The timing at which the patient wireless transmission unit 402 transmits the patient identifier does not matter. The patient wireless transmission unit 402 transmits the patient identifier at a predetermined or indefinite timing designated in advance, for example. The patient identifier transmission unit 402 can be realized by communication means or the like.
　なお、患者用無線通信装置４は、患者識別子を送信する指示等を救急医療支援装置１等から受信する受信部（図示せず）等を有していても良く、この指示に応じて医師識別子を送信しても良い。また、無線通信装置３は、自装置の位置を示す情報を取得するための取得部（図示せず）等を有していても良く、この取得部が取得した位置の情報を、患者識別子と対応付けて送信してもよい。 The patient wireless communication device 4 may include a receiving unit (not shown) that receives an instruction to transmit a patient identifier from the emergency medical support device 1 or the like. May be sent. Further, the wireless communication device 3 may include an acquisition unit (not shown) for acquiring information indicating the position of the own device, and the position information acquired by the acquisition unit is used as a patient identifier. You may transmit in association.
　受入要請装置５は、受入要請を無線通信により救急医療支援装置１に送信する。受入要請装置５は、例えば、救急車両に載置されたり、救急隊員が携行する装置である。受入要請装置５は、携帯型のコンピュータや、携帯電話や、ＰＨＳや、ＰＤＡや、スマートフォンや、カーナビゲーションシステム等であっても良い。 The acceptance request device 5 transmits an acceptance request to the emergency medical assistance device 1 by wireless communication. The acceptance request device 5 is, for example, a device that is placed on an ambulance vehicle or carried by an ambulance crew. The acceptance requesting device 5 may be a portable computer, a mobile phone, a PHS, a PDA, a smartphone, a car navigation system, or the like.
　受入要請受付部５０１は、受入要請を受け付ける。例えば、救急隊員等が入力する受入要請を受け付ける。受入要請は、例えば、受入の可否を問うための情報である。あるいは、受け入れ先を問い合わせるための情報と考えても良い。受入要請受付部５０１は、障害部位識別子を有する受入要請を受け付けても良い。障害部位識別子は、例えば救急隊員が、急患の状態から判断した障害部位を示す情報である。また、受入要請は、急患の意識レベルや呼吸の有無や頻度、脈の程度、血圧、外傷の有無等の情報を含むようにしても良い。例えば、入力画面等にこれらの情報の入力のための入力フィールド等を表示することで、これらの情報の入力を、救急隊員等に促すことが可能である。なお、ここでは、図示しない格納部等に予め格納されている受入要請を送信のために読み出す指示を受け付けることも、受入要請の受け付けと考えても良い。受入要請を入力する手段は、テンキーやキーボードやメニュー画面によるもの等、何でも良い。受入要請受付部５０１は、テンキーやキーボード等の入力手段のデバイスドライバーや、メニュー画面の制御ソフトウェア等で実現され得る。 The acceptance request accepting unit 501 accepts acceptance requests. For example, an acceptance request input by an ambulance crew or the like is accepted. The acceptance request is information for inquiring whether acceptance is possible, for example. Alternatively, it may be considered as information for inquiring about the recipient. The acceptance request accepting unit 501 may accept an acceptance request having a fault site identifier. The fault site identifier is information indicating the fault site determined by, for example, an emergency crew member from the state of emergency. In addition, the acceptance request may include information such as the consciousness level of sudden illness, presence / absence / frequency of breathing, degree of pulse, blood pressure, presence / absence of trauma. For example, by displaying an input field or the like for inputting such information on an input screen or the like, it is possible to prompt an emergency worker or the like to input such information. Here, accepting an instruction to read an acceptance request stored in advance in a storage unit (not shown) for transmission may also be considered acceptance of the acceptance request. The means for inputting the acceptance request may be anything such as a numeric keypad, a keyboard, or a menu screen. The acceptance request acceptance unit 501 can be realized by a device driver for input means such as a numeric keypad or a keyboard, control software for a menu screen, and the like.
　受入要請送信部５０２は、受入要請受付部５０１が受入要請を受け付けた場合に、この受け付けた受入要請を救急医療支援装置１に送信する。受入要請送信部５０２は、通信手段等で実現可能である。 When the acceptance request receiving unit 501 accepts the acceptance request, the acceptance request transmitting unit 502 transmits the accepted acceptance request to the emergency medical assistance device 1. The acceptance request transmission unit 502 can be realized by communication means or the like.
　対応可否受信部５０３は、救急医療支援装置１から送信される、急患に対する対応が可能である旨の情報を受け付ける。また、対応可否受信部５０３は、対応が不可である旨の情報を受け付けてもよい。対応可否受信部５０３は、通信手段等で実現可能である。 The response availability receiving unit 503 receives information from the emergency medical support device 1 indicating that it is possible to handle an emergency patient. Further, the response availability receiving unit 503 may accept information indicating that the response is not possible. The availability receiving unit 503 can be realized by a communication unit or the like.
　対応可否出力部５０４は、対応可否受信部５０３が受信した対応が可能である旨の情報を出力する。また、対応可否受信部５０３が受信した対応が不可である旨の情報を出力する。ここで述べる出力とは、ディスプレイへの表示、プリンタへの印字、音出力、外部の装置への送信、記録媒体への蓄積、他の処理装置や他のプログラム等への処理結果の引渡し等を含む概念である。対応可否出力部５０４は、ディスプレイやプリンタ等の出力デバイスを含むと考えても含まないと考えても良い。出力部は、出力デバイスのドライバーソフトまたは、出力デバイスのドライバーソフトと出力デバイス等で実現され得る。 The correspondence availability output unit 504 outputs information indicating that the correspondence received by the correspondence availability receiving unit 503 is possible. Also, information indicating that the correspondence received by the correspondence availability receiving unit 503 is impossible is output. Output described here includes display on a display, printing on a printer, sound output, transmission to an external device, storage in a recording medium, delivery of processing results to another processing device or other program, etc. It is a concept that includes. The correspondence output unit 504 may be considered as including or not including an output device such as a display or a printer. The output unit may be realized by output device driver software, or output device driver software and an output device.
　次に、救急医療支援システム１０の救急医療支援装置１の動作について図２のフローチャートを用いて説明する。ここでは、無線通信装置３から医師識別子を含む情報を受信し、患者用無線通信装置４から患者であることを示す情報である患者識別子を含む情報を受信する場合を例に挙げて説明する。 Next, the operation of the emergency medical support device 1 of the emergency medical support system 10 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. Here, a case where information including a doctor identifier is received from the wireless communication device 3 and information including a patient identifier that is information indicating a patient is received from the patient wireless communication device 4 will be described as an example.
　（ステップＳ１０１）受入要請受信部１０３は、外部の装置、ここでは、受入要請装置５から、受入要請を受信したか否かを判断する。受信した場合、ステップＳ１０２に進み、受信していない場合、ステップＳ１０３に進む。 (Step S101) The acceptance request receiving unit 103 determines whether an acceptance request has been received from an external device, here, the acceptance request device 5. If received, the process proceeds to step S102. If not received, the process proceeds to step S103.
　（ステップＳ１０２）救急医療支援装置１は、受け入れが対応可であるか否かの判断を行う。この処理の詳細については、後述する。そして、ステップＳ１０１に戻る。 (Step S102) The emergency medical assistance device 1 determines whether or not the acceptance is possible. Details of this processing will be described later. Then, the process returns to step S101.
　（ステップＳ１０３）位置情報受付手段１０６２は、無線通信装置３から送信される医師識別子を含む情報を受け付けたか否かを判断する。医師識別子を含む情報は例えば状態識別子を含む医師等動的情報である。受け付けた場合、ステップＳ１０４に進み、受け付けていない場合、ステップＳ１０８に進む。なお、例えば、医師識別子を含む情報と、患者識別子を含む情報とを受信するアンテナを共用する場合、受信した情報に含まれる識別子が、医師識別子であるか否かを判断することで、医師識別子を受け付けたことを判断しても良い。医師識別子であるか否かは、例えば、識別子の先頭等の所定の箇所に、予め指定した医師識別子に固有の文字列を有するか否かを判断したり、識別子の値が、予め医師識別子に割り当てられた、もしくは割り当て可能な値と一致するか否かを判断することで判断可能である。 (Step S103) The position information receiving unit 1062 determines whether or not information including a doctor identifier transmitted from the wireless communication device 3 has been received. The information including a doctor identifier is dynamic information such as a doctor including a state identifier, for example. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S104. If not accepted, the process proceeds to step S108. Note that, for example, when an antenna that receives information including a doctor identifier and information including a patient identifier is shared, the doctor identifier is determined by determining whether or not the identifier included in the received information is a doctor identifier. It may also be determined that has been accepted. Whether or not the identifier is a doctor identifier is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the predetermined identifier such as the head of the identifier has a character string unique to the doctor identifier specified in advance, This can be determined by determining whether or not the value matches the assigned or assignable value.
　（ステップＳ１０４）位置情報受付手段１０６２は、ステップＳ１０３で受け付けた情報を用いて医師の位置情報を取得する。例えば、ステップＳ１０３で受け付けた情報に位置情報が含まれる場合、そのままその位置情報を取得する。また、ステップＳ１０３で受け付けた情報に情報を受信したアンテナを識別する情報やアンテナの位置等の情報が含まれる場合、この情報を用いて演算等を行って得られたアンテナの位置情報を医師の位置情報として取得する。 (Step S104) The position information receiving means 1062 acquires the doctor's position information using the information received in Step S103. For example, when the position information is included in the information received in step S103, the position information is acquired as it is. In addition, when the information received in step S103 includes information for identifying the antenna that has received the information and information such as the antenna position, the position information of the antenna obtained by performing calculations or the like using this information is obtained. Obtained as location information.
　（ステップＳ１０５）位置情報受付手段１０６２は、ステップＳ１０４で取得した位置情報が、急患に対して医療処置を行う領域内の位置を示すか否かを判断する。急患に対して医療処置を行う領域内の位置を示す場合、ステップＳ１０６に進み、示さない場合、ステップＳ１０１に戻る。 (Step S105) The position information receiving means 1062 determines whether or not the position information acquired in step S104 indicates a position in the region where the medical treatment is performed on the emergency patient. When the position in the region where the medical treatment is performed for the emergency patient is indicated, the process proceeds to step S106, and when not indicated, the process returns to step S101.
　（ステップＳ１０６）医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、ステップＳ１０３で受け付けた医師識別子と、ステップＳ１０４で取得した位置情報とを含む医師等動的情報を、図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。また、医師識別子を受け付けた時刻の情報等も、これらの情報と対応付けて蓄積しても良い。なお、医師識別子が一致する医師等動的情報が既に蓄積されている場合、上書き等により、新たな医師等動的情報で更新する。 (Step S106) The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor accumulates dynamic information such as a doctor including the doctor identifier received in step S103 and the position information acquired in step S104 in a storage medium (not shown). Further, information on the time when the doctor identifier is received may be stored in association with these pieces of information. When dynamic information such as a doctor with a matching doctor identifier has already been accumulated, it is updated with new dynamic information such as a doctor by overwriting or the like.
　（ステップＳ１０７）医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、時刻情報を取得し、当該時刻情報と、ステップ１０６で蓄積した医師等動的情報とを対応付けた医師等動的履歴情報を、図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。ここでの蓄積は追記である。そして、ステップＳ１０１に戻る。 (Step S107) The dynamic information accepting unit 106 such as a doctor acquires time information, and the dynamic history information such as a doctor that associates the time information with the dynamic information such as the doctor accumulated in Step 106 is not illustrated. Accumulate in storage media. The accumulation here is additional writing. Then, the process returns to step S101.
　（ステップＳ１０８）患者情報受付部１０１は、患者用無線通信装置４から送信される患者識別子を含む情報を受け付けたか否かを判断する。受け付けた場合、ステップＳ１０９に進み、受け付けていない場合、ステップＳ１１２に進む。 (Step S108) The patient information receiving unit 101 determines whether information including a patient identifier transmitted from the patient wireless communication device 4 has been received. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S109. If not accepted, the process proceeds to step S112.
　（ステップＳ１０９）患者情報受付部１０１は、ステップＳ１０８で受け付けた情報を用いて患者の位置の情報を取得する。例えば、ステップＳ１０８で受け付けた情報に位置の情報が含まれる場合、そのままその位置の情報を取得する。また、ステップＳ１０８で受け付けた情報に、情報を受信したアンテナを識別する情報やアンテナの位置等の情報が含まれる場合、この情報を用いて得られるアンテナの位置の情報や、アンテナに対応付けられた部屋や領域の識別情報等を患者の位置の情報として取得してもよい。ここで述べる患者の位置情報は、患者の位置を示す座標情報等であっても良いし、患者のいる部屋や領域の識別情報等であってもおい。 (Step S109) The patient information receiving unit 101 acquires information on the position of the patient using the information received in Step S108. For example, if the information received in step S108 includes position information, the position information is acquired as it is. Further, when the information received in step S108 includes information for identifying the antenna that received the information and information such as the antenna position, the information on the antenna position obtained using this information and the information associated with the antenna. The identification information of the room or area may be acquired as the patient position information. The patient position information described here may be coordinate information or the like indicating the position of the patient, or identification information or the like of the room or region where the patient is located.
　（ステップＳ１１０）患者情報受付部１０１は、ステップＳ１０９で取得した位置の情報が、患者を受け入れる部屋内の位置を示すか否かを判断する。患者を受け入れる部屋内の位置を示す場合、ステップＳ１１１に進み、示さない場合、ステップＳ１０１に戻る (Step S110) The patient information receiving unit 101 determines whether or not the position information acquired in Step S109 indicates the position in the room where the patient is received. If the position in the room where the patient is received is shown, the process proceeds to step S111. If not, the process returns to step S101.
　（ステップＳ１１１）患者情報受付部１０１は、ステップＳ１０８で受け付けた患者識別子と、ステップＳ１０９で取得した位置の情報とを対応付けて、図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。なお、患者識別子が一致する情報が既に蓄積されている場合、上書き等により新たな患者識別子と位置情報とを対応付けた情報で更新する。 (Step S111) The patient information receiving unit 101 associates the patient identifier received in Step S108 with the position information acquired in Step S109, and stores them in a storage medium (not shown). In addition, when the information in which a patient identifier corresponds is already accumulate | stored, it updates with the information which matched a new patient identifier and position information by overwrite etc.
　（ステップＳ１１２）患者情報受付部１０１は、これまでにステップＳ１１１により蓄積された患者識別子の数をカウントし、カウント結果を患者情報として受け付け、図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。そして、ステップＳ１０１に戻る。 (Step S112) The patient information accepting unit 101 counts the number of patient identifiers accumulated so far in step S111, accepts the count result as patient information, and accumulates it in a storage medium or the like (not shown). Then, the process returns to step S101.
　（ステップＳ１１３）スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１は、医師識別子と対応付けられたスケジュール情報を受け付けたか否かを判断する。受け付けた場合、ステップＳ１１４に進み、受け付けていない場合、ステップＳ１１５に進む。 (Step S113) The schedule information receiving means 1061 determines whether or not the schedule information associated with the doctor identifier has been received. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S114. If not accepted, the process proceeds to step S115.
　（ステップＳ１１４）スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１は、ステップＳ１１３で受け付けたスケジュール情報を医師識別子と対応付けて、図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。そして、ステップＳ１０１に戻る。 (Step S114) The schedule information receiving means 1061 stores the schedule information received in step S113 in a storage medium (not shown) in association with the doctor identifier. Then, the process returns to step S101.
　（ステップＳ１１５）患者情報受付部１０１は、患者情報と対応付けられた転送可否情報を受け付けたか否かを判断する。受け付けた場合、ステップＳ１１６に進み、受け付けていない場合、ステップＳ１１７に進む。 (Step S115) The patient information receiving unit 101 determines whether or not the transfer enable / disable information associated with the patient information has been received. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S116. If not accepted, the process proceeds to step S117.
　（ステップＳ１１６）患者情報受付部１０１は、ステップＳ１１５で受け付けた患者情報と転送可否情報とを対応付けて図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。そして、ステップＳ１０１に戻る。 (Step S116) The patient information receiving unit 101 stores the patient information received in Step S115 and the transfer availability information in association with each other in a storage medium (not shown). Then, the process returns to step S101.
　（ステップＳ１１７）救急医療支援装置１は、図示しない受付部を介して、転送先候補施設情報を受け付ける。 (Step S117) The emergency medical assistance device 1 accepts transfer destination candidate facility information via a not-shown accepting unit.
　（ステップＳ１１８）救急医療支援装置１は、ステップＳ１１６において受け付けた転送先候補施設情報を用いて、図示しない記憶媒体等に格納されている転送先候補施設情報を更新する。そして、ステップＳ１０１に戻る。 (Step S118) The emergency medical assistance device 1 updates the transfer destination candidate facility information stored in a storage medium (not shown) using the transfer destination candidate facility information received in Step S116. Then, the process returns to step S101.
　（ステップＳ１１９）表示部１０８は、表示する指示を受け付けたか否かを判断する。受け付けた場合、ステップＳ１１９に進み、受け付けていない場合、ステップ１０１に戻る。 (Step S119) The display unit 108 determines whether an instruction to display is accepted. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S119. If not accepted, the process returns to step 101.
　（ステップＳ１２０）表示部１０８は、表示制御情報格納部１０７内の表示制御情報を読み出し、この表示制御情報が示す領域内の位置を示す位置情報と対応付けられた医師識別子とその位置情報を、ステップＳ１０６において蓄積した医師等動的情報から取得する。 (Step S120) The display unit 108 reads the display control information in the display control information storage unit 107, and displays the doctor identifier associated with the position information indicating the position in the region indicated by the display control information and the position information. Obtained from the dynamic information such as the doctor accumulated in step S106.
　（ステップＳ１２１）表示部１０８は、ステップＳ１２１において取得した医師識別子を示す画像を、表示する。例えば、取得した医師識別子に対応した位置情報が示す位置に、医師識別子に対応した医師が配置された、急患に対する医療行為を行う領域の間取り図等の画像を構成し、表示する。そして、ステップＳ１０１に戻る。 (Step S121) The display unit 108 displays an image indicating the doctor identifier acquired in step S121. For example, an image such as a floor plan of a region where a medical action for an emergency patient is performed in which a doctor corresponding to the doctor identifier is arranged at a position indicated by position information corresponding to the acquired doctor identifier is configured and displayed. Then, the process returns to step S101.
　なお、図１のフローチャートにおいて、電源オフや処理終了の割り込みにより処理は終了する。 In the flowchart of FIG. 1, the process ends when the power is turned off or the process is terminated.
　つぎに、図２のステップＳ１０２において説明した受け入れの可否を決定する処理の詳細について図３のフローチャートを用いて説明する。 Next, the details of the process for determining acceptance / rejection described in step S102 in FIG. 2 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
　（ステップＳ２０１）ベッド判断部１０４は、患者情報受付部１０１が蓄積した急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者数と、病院施設情報格納部１００に格納されている病院施設情報が示す急患を受け入れる部屋の病床数、即ちベッド数とを比較して、ベッド数よりも患者数が少ないか否かを判断する。少ない場合、ステップＳ２０２に進み、少なくない場合、即ち同じ場合、ステップＳ２２０に進む。 (Step S <b> 201) The bed determination unit 104 includes the number of patients in the room that receives the emergency cases accumulated by the patient information reception unit 101 and the bed in the room that receives the emergency cases indicated by the hospital facility information stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 100. The number, ie, the number of beds, is compared to determine whether the number of patients is less than the number of beds. If not, the process proceeds to step S202. If not, that is, if they are the same, the process proceeds to step S220.
　（ステップＳ２０２）医療チーム判断部１０９は、カウンターｎに１を加える。 (Step S202) The medical team determination unit 109 adds 1 to the counter n.
　（ステップＳ２０３）医療チーム判断部１０９は、医師等動的情報受付部１０６が蓄積した医師等動的情報に、ｎ番目の医師識別子に対応した医師等動的情報（以下、ｎ番目の医師等動的情報と称す）が含まれているか否かを判断する。含まれている場合、ステップＳ２０４に進み、含まれていない場合、ステップＳ２０９進む。 (Step S203) The medical team determination unit 109 adds dynamic information such as a doctor corresponding to the nth doctor identifier to the dynamic information such as the doctor accumulated by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 (hereinafter referred to as the nth doctor or the like). It is determined whether or not (referred to as dynamic information) is included. If it is included, the process proceeds to step S204. If it is not included, the process proceeds to step S209.
　（ステップＳ２０４）医療チーム判断部１０９は、ｎ番目の医師等動的情報に含まれる状態識別子が、対応可を示しているか否かを判断する。対応可を示している場合、ステップＳ２０５に進み、示していない場合、ステップＳ２０８に進む。 (Step S204) The medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not the state identifier included in the dynamic information such as the nth doctor indicates that it can be handled. If the response is indicated, the process proceeds to step S205. If not indicated, the process proceeds to step S208.
　（ステップＳ２０５）医療チーム判断部１０９は、ｎ番目の医師識別子に対応付けて図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積されたスケジュール情報が、医師の現在の予定が急患に対して対応可の状態であることを示しているか否かを判断する。対応可である場合、ステップＳ２０５に進み、対応可でない場合、ステップＳ２０８に進む。 (Step S205) The medical team determination unit 109 indicates that the schedule information accumulated in a storage medium (not shown) in association with the nth doctor identifier indicates that the doctor's current schedule is available for emergency cases. Whether or not is indicated. If the response is possible, the process proceeds to step S205. If the response is not possible, the process proceeds to step S208.
　（ステップＳ２０６）医療チーム判断部１０９は、ｎ番目の医師識別子に対応付けて図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積された医師等動的履歴情報が、ｎ番目の医師が急患に対応可能な状態であることを示す履歴を示しているか否かを判断する。例えば、医師等動的履歴情報が示す医師の直前一時間以内の履歴において、医師が４０分以上手術室にいたことを示している場合、急患に対応できない状態であると判断し、それ以外の場合は、対応可能な状態と判断しても良い。医師等同的履歴情報を判断するための条件は、どのような条件を設定しても良い。急患に対応可能な状態であることを示す履歴を示している場合、ステップＳ２０７に進み、示していない場合、ステップＳ２０８に進む。 (Step S206) The medical team determination unit 109 is in a state where the dynamic history information such as a doctor stored in a storage medium (not shown) in association with the nth doctor identifier is capable of handling an emergency patient by the nth doctor. It is determined whether or not a history indicating the above is shown. For example, in the history within one hour immediately before the doctor indicated by the dynamic history information, such as a doctor, if the doctor indicates that he / she has been in the operating room for 40 minutes or more, it is determined that the patient cannot respond to the emergency case In such a case, it may be determined that the state is compatible. Any condition may be set as a condition for determining similar history information such as a doctor. If a history indicating that the patient is ready for an emergency is shown, the process proceeds to step S207. If not, the process proceeds to step S208.
　（ステップＳ２０７）医療チーム判断部１０９は、ｎ番目の医師の医師識別子を取得し、図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。なお、ｎ番目の医師の医師識別子や、医師等動的情報に、対応可能であることを示すフラグ等の情報を付与しても良い。 (Step S207) The medical team determination unit 109 acquires the doctor identifier of the nth doctor and stores it in a storage medium (not shown). It should be noted that information such as a flag indicating that it is possible to respond to the doctor identifier of the nth doctor or dynamic information such as a doctor may be given.
　（ステップＳ２０８）医療チーム判断部１０９は、カウンターｎの値を１インクリメントする。そして、ステップＳ２０３に戻る。 (Step S208) The medical team determination unit 109 increments the value of the counter n by 1. Then, the process returns to step S203.
　（ステップＳ２０９）医療チーム判断部１０９は、ステップＳ１０１において受け付けた受入要請に含まれる障害部位識別子に対応した医療行為識別子と対応する医師識別子群を、医師等静的情報格納部１０５において検出し、取得する。障害部位識別子と医療行為識別子との対応関係を示す情報は、例えば図示しない記憶媒体等に予め蓄積しておく。 (Step S209) The medical team determination unit 109 detects a doctor identifier group corresponding to the medical practice identifier corresponding to the disordered part identifier included in the acceptance request received in step S101 in the static information storage unit 105 such as a doctor, get. Information indicating the correspondence between the faulty part identifier and the medical practice identifier is stored in advance in, for example, a storage medium (not shown).
　（ステップＳ２１０）医療チーム判断部１０９は、カウンターｍに１を代入する。 (Step S210) The medical team determination unit 109 assigns 1 to the counter m.
　（ステップＳ２１１）医療チーム判断部１０９は、ステップＳ２０７において蓄積した医師識別子において、ステップＳ２０９において取得したｍ番目の医師識別子群を構成する医師識別子と一致する医師識別子を検出し、取得する。 (Step S211) The medical team determination unit 109 detects and acquires a doctor identifier that matches the doctor identifier constituting the m-th doctor identifier group acquired in Step S209 in the doctor identifier accumulated in Step S207.
　（ステップＳ２１２）医療チーム判断部１０９は、ステップＳ２１１において取得した医師識別子の数をカウントする。 (Step S212) The medical team determination unit 109 counts the number of doctor identifiers acquired in step S211.
　（ステップＳ２１３）医療チーム判断部１０９は、ステップＳ２１２のカウント結果が、予め指定された値以上であるか否かを判断する。予め指定された値は、固定値であっても良いし、受入要請に含まれる障害部位識別子を用いて検索により取得される、１以上の障害部位識別子に対応づけられて予め用意された値であっても良い。また、この値は、入り識別子群を構成する医師識別子の数に対する比率等を示す値でも良い。予め指定された値以上である場合、ステップＳ２１４に進み、値以上でない場合、ステップＳ２１６に進む。 (Step S213) The medical team determination unit 109 determines whether or not the count result in step S212 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The value designated in advance may be a fixed value, or a value prepared in advance in association with one or more faulty part identifiers obtained by a search using the faulty part identifier included in the acceptance request. There may be. Further, this value may be a value indicating a ratio or the like to the number of doctor identifiers constituting the incoming identifier group. If it is greater than or equal to the value specified in advance, the process proceeds to step S214, and if not greater than the value, the process proceeds to step S216.
　（ステップＳ２１４）医療チーム判断部１０９は、対応可能な医療チームがあることを判断する。 (Step S214) The medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is a compatible medical team.
　（ステップＳ２１５）対応可否送信部１１０は、急患に対して対応可である旨の情報を、外部の装置、ここでは受入要請装置５に送信する。そして、上位の処理にリターンする。 (Step S215) The response propriety transmitting unit 110 transmits information indicating that it is possible to respond to the emergency case to an external device, here, the acceptance requesting device 5. Then, the process returns to the upper process.
　（ステップＳ２１６）対応可否送信部１１０は、ｍの値を１インクリメントする。 (Step S216) The correspondence propriety transmission unit 110 increments the value of m by 1.
　（ステップＳ２１７）ステップＳ２０９で取得した医師識別子群に、ｍ番目の医師識別子群があるか否かを判断する。ある場合、ステップＳ２１１に戻り、ない場合、ステップ２１８に進む。 (Step S217) It is determined whether or not the doctor identifier group acquired in Step S209 includes the mth doctor identifier group. If there is, the process returns to step S211; otherwise, the process proceeds to step 218.
　（ステップＳ２１８）対応可否送信部１１０は、対応可能な医療チームがないと判断する。 (Step S218) The correspondence transmission / reception unit 110 determines that there is no medical team that can be handled.
　（ステップＳ２１９）対応可否送信部１１０は、急患に対して対応不可である旨の情報を、外部の装置、ここでは受入要請装置５に送信する。そして、上位の処理にリターンする。 (Step S219) The response propriety transmission unit 110 transmits information indicating that it is impossible to respond to the emergency case to an external device, here, the acceptance requesting device 5. Then, the process returns to the upper process.
　（ステップＳ２２０）ベッド判断部１０４は、患者情報受付部１０１が患者識別子と対応付けて蓄積した転送可否情報から、急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の患者識別子と対応した転送可否情報を検出し、その中に、転送可であることを示す転送可否情報があるか否かを検出する。急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の患者識別子とは、具体的には、ステップＳ１１１で蓄積した患者識別子である。転送可であることを示すものがある場合、ステップＳ２２１に進み、ない場合、ステップＳ２１９に進む。 (Step S220) The bed determination unit 104 detects transferability information corresponding to the patient identifier of the patient in the room receiving the emergency patient from the transferability information stored in association with the patient identifier by the patient information reception unit 101, and It is detected whether there is transfer enable / disable information indicating that transfer is possible. Specifically, the patient identifier of the patient in the room receiving the emergency patient is the patient identifier accumulated in step S111. If there is a message indicating that transfer is possible, the process proceeds to step S221.
　（ステップＳ２２１）ベッド判断部１０４は、転送先候補施設情報を用いて、転送可であることを示す転送可否情報に対応した転送先に、空きベッドがあるか否かを判断する。具体的には、ベッド判断部１０４は、転送先候補施設情報から、ステップＳ２２０で検出した転送可であることを示す一以上の転送可否情報が示す転送先のベッドの空きを示す情報を、転送先を示す情報を検索キー等として検索により順次取得する。そして、ベッドの空きがあることを示す情報が一以上検出された場合、ステップＳ２０２に戻り、検出されなかった場合、ステップＳ２１９に進む。 (Step S221) The bed determination unit 104 uses the transfer destination candidate facility information to determine whether there is an empty bed at the transfer destination corresponding to the transfer enable / disable information indicating that transfer is possible. Specifically, the bed determination unit 104 transfers, from the transfer destination candidate facility information, information indicating the availability of the transfer destination bed indicated by one or more transfer enable / disable information indicating that transfer is possible detected in step S220. Information indicating the destination is sequentially acquired by searching using a search key or the like. If one or more pieces of information indicating that a bed is available are detected, the process returns to step S202, and if not detected, the process proceeds to step S219.
　無線通信装置３の動作を簡単に説明すると以下の通りである。即ち、無線送信部３０３は、医師識別格納部３０１に格納されている医師識別子と、状態識別子受付部３０２が受け付けた状態識別子とを読み出し、予め指定された一定又は不定のタイミングで送信する。 The operation of the wireless communication device 3 will be briefly described as follows. That is, the wireless transmission unit 303 reads the doctor identifier stored in the doctor identification storage unit 301 and the state identifier received by the state identifier reception unit 302, and transmits them at a predetermined or indefinite timing specified in advance.
　患者用無線通信装置４の動作を簡単に説明すると、以下の通りである。即ち、患者用無線送信部４０２は、患者識別格納部４０１に格納されている患者識別子を読み出し、予め指定された一定又は不定のタイミングで送信する。 The operation of the patient wireless communication device 4 will be briefly described as follows. That is, the patient wireless transmission unit 402 reads out the patient identifier stored in the patient identification storage unit 401 and transmits it at a predetermined or indefinite timing designated in advance.
　次に、受入要請装置５の動作について、図４のフローチャートを用いて説明する。 Next, the operation of the acceptance requesting apparatus 5 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.
　（ステップＳ３０１）受入要請受付部５０１は、受入要請を受け付けたか否かを判断する。ここで受け付ける受入要請は、例えば、障害部位識別子を含む受入要請である。受け付けた場合、ステップＳ３０２に進み、受け付けていない場合、ステップＳ３０１に戻る。 (Step S301) The acceptance request receiving unit 501 determines whether or not an acceptance request has been accepted. The acceptance request accepted here is, for example, an acceptance request including a fault site identifier. If accepted, the process proceeds to step S302. If not accepted, the process returns to step S301.
　（ステップＳ３０２）受入要請送信部５０２は、ステップＳ３０１で受け付けた受入要請を救急医療支援装置１に送信する。 (Step S302) The acceptance request transmitting unit 502 transmits the acceptance request received in Step S301 to the emergency medical assistance device 1.
　（ステップＳ３０３）受入要請送信部５０２は、救急医療支援装置１から送信される急患に対する対応の可否を示す情報を受信したか否かを判断する。受信した場合、ステップＳ３０４に進み、受信していない場合、ステップＳ３０３に戻る。 (Step S303) The acceptance request transmission unit 502 determines whether or not information indicating whether or not the emergency medical support device 1 is transmitted from the emergency medical assistance device 1 has been received. If received, the process proceeds to step S304. If not received, the process returns to step S303.
　（ステップＳ３０４）対応可否出力部５０４は、ステップＳ３０３で受け付けた対応の可否を示す情報を出力する。そして処理を終了する。 (Step S304) The correspondence availability output unit 504 outputs information indicating availability of the correspondence accepted in Step S303. Then, the process ends.
　以下、本実施の形態における救急医療支援システム１０の具体的な動作について説明する。 Hereinafter, a specific operation of the emergency medical support system 10 in the present embodiment will be described.
　図５は、救急医療支援システム１０の概念図である。救急医療支援装置１は、ここでは一例として、一の病院である病院α内の救急病棟に配置されているものとする。病院α内の救急病棟の各部屋の壁には、アンテナ１２１～１２８が設置されている。アンテナ１２１は、ＩＣＵ６０１に配置されている。アンテナ１２２は、ベッドルーム６０２に配置されている。アンテナ１２３は、待合室６０３に配置されている。アンテナ１２４は、手術室６０４に配置されている。アンテナ１２５は、処置室６０５に配置されている。アンテナ１２６はスタッフルームに配置されている。アンテナ１２７および１２８は通路に配置されている。ここでは、各アンテナにはＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタ（図示せず）が取り付けられ、各ＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタは、救急医療支援装置１の患者情報受付部１０１および医師等動的情報受付部１０６とネットワークを介して接続されているものとする。各アンテナ１２１～１２８やＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタは、救急医療支援システム１の一部、例えば、患者情報受付部１０１や医師等動的情報受付部１０６の一部等と考えても良い。なお、ＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタの代わりに、ＲＦＩＤタグリーダを用いても良い。各アンテナ１２１～１２６は、配置されているそれぞれが配置されている部屋においてアクティブ型のＲＦＩＤタグから送信される信号を受信可能な位置に配置されているものとする。また、アンテナ１２７、１２８は、通路においてアクティブ型のＲＦＩＤタグから送信される信号を受信可能な位置に配置されているものとする。 FIG. 5 is a conceptual diagram of the emergency medical support system 10. Here, as an example, the emergency medical support device 1 is assumed to be disposed in an emergency ward in the hospital α which is one hospital. Antennas 121 to 128 are installed on the walls of the rooms of the emergency ward in the hospital α. The antenna 121 is disposed in the ICU 601. The antenna 122 is disposed in the bedroom 602. The antenna 123 is disposed in the waiting room 603. The antenna 124 is disposed in the operating room 604. The antenna 125 is disposed in the treatment room 605. The antenna 126 is arranged in the staff room. Antennas 127 and 128 are disposed in the passage. Here, an RFID tag reader / writer (not shown) is attached to each antenna, and each RFID tag reader / writer is connected to the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor of the emergency medical support apparatus 1 via a network. It shall be connected. The antennas 121 to 128 and the RFID tag reader / writer may be considered as a part of the emergency medical support system 1, for example, a part of the patient information receiving unit 101 or the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor. Note that an RFID tag reader may be used instead of the RFID tag reader / writer. It is assumed that each of the antennas 121 to 126 is disposed at a position where a signal transmitted from an active RFID tag can be received in a room where the antennas are disposed. Further, it is assumed that the antennas 127 and 128 are disposed at positions where signals transmitted from the active RFID tag can be received in the passage.
　医師状態管理用カード３０、すなわちカード型の無線通信装置３は、名札の裏面側に添付されており、病院内の各医師の胸等に取り付けられているものとする。医師状態管理用カード３０には、各医師に対応づけられた医師識別子が格納されている。医師状態管理用カードは、ここでは、電源を有するアクティブ型のＲＦＩＤタグであるとする。 Suppose that the doctor status management card 30, that is, the card-type wireless communication device 3, is attached to the back side of the name tag and attached to the chest of each doctor in the hospital. The doctor status management card 30 stores a doctor identifier associated with each doctor. Here, it is assumed that the doctor state management card is an active RFID tag having a power source.
　図６は、医師状態管理用カード３０を裏面側に取り付けた名札を裏面側からみた場合の図である。医師状態管理用カード３０は、状態識別子を受け付けるためのスライドスイッチを有している。医師によってこのスライドスイッチを「○」側にずらしてある場合は、状態識別子受付部３０２は、医師が急患に対応可能な状態であることを示す状態識別子「ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」を受け付ける。また、「×」側にずらしてある場合は、急患に対応不可な状態であることを示す状態識別子「ｕｎａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」を受け付ける。 FIG. 6 is a view of the name tag with the doctor state management card 30 attached to the back side as viewed from the back side. The doctor state management card 30 has a slide switch for receiving a state identifier. When the slide switch is shifted to the “◯” side by the doctor, the state identifier receiving unit 302 receives a state identifier “available” indicating that the doctor is ready to handle an emergency. In addition, when it is shifted to the “x” side, a state identifier “unavailable” indicating that it is in a state incapable of handling an emergency is accepted.
　患者用無線通信装置４は、腕輪形状を有しており、各患者の腕にはめられている。患者用無線通信装置４には、各患者に対応づけられた患者識別子が格納されている。患者用無線通信装置４は、ここでは、アクティブ型のＲＦＩＤタグであるとする。 The patient wireless communication device 4 has a bracelet shape and is fitted on each patient's arm. The patient wireless communication device 4 stores a patient identifier associated with each patient. Here, it is assumed that the patient wireless communication device 4 is an active RFID tag.
　受入要請装置５は、救急車両である救急車内に配置されており、無線ＬＡＮや携帯電話等の無線通信回線等により救急医療支援装置１と通信可能となっている。なお、受入要請装置５は、救急車両等からの情報をもとに、急患の移送先を決定するための司令センター等に配置されていても良い。 The acceptance request device 5 is disposed in an ambulance which is an ambulance vehicle, and can communicate with the emergency medical support device 1 through a wireless communication line such as a wireless LAN or a mobile phone. The acceptance requesting device 5 may be arranged at a command center or the like for determining a transfer destination of an emergency patient based on information from an emergency vehicle or the like.
　以下、医師等動的情報等が蓄積される処理等について説明する。例えば、医師識別子が「Ａ００１」である医師（以下、各医師を医師の識別情報を後ろに並べて表示する。例えば、医師識別子が「Ａ００１」である医師を、以下、医師Ａ００１と呼ぶ）が、救急病棟内の処置室６０５にいたとする。医師が胸につけた医師状態管理用カード３０の無線送信部３０３は、予め指定された一定の時間間隔で、医師識別子格納部３０１に格納されている医師識別子、ここでは、「Ａ００１」と、状態識別子受付部３０２が受け付けた状態識別子「ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」とを読み出し、読み出した医師識別子と状態識別子とを含む信号を送信する。 In the following, the process of accumulating dynamic information etc. of doctors will be described. For example, a doctor whose doctor identifier is “A001” (hereinafter, each doctor is displayed side by side with identification information of the doctor. For example, a doctor whose doctor identifier is “A001” is hereinafter referred to as doctor A001). Assume that you are in the treatment room 605 in the emergency ward. The wireless transmission unit 303 of the doctor state management card 30 attached to the chest by the doctor is a doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301 at a predetermined time interval, in this case, “A001” The state identifier “available” received by the identifier receiving unit 302 is read, and a signal including the read doctor identifier and the state identifier is transmitted.
　処置室６０５に設置されたアンテナ１２５は、医師Ａ００１の医師状態管理用カード３０が送信する医師識別子を状態識別子とを含む信号を受信する。そして、アンテナ１２５と接続されたＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタは、受信した信号から、医師識別子「Ａ００１」と状態識別子「ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」を取り出す。そして、取り出した情報に、自装置に割り当てられた装置識別子を付与して、救急医療支援装置１に送信する。装置識別子は、他のアンテナと接続されたＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタと識別可能な情報であれば、どのような情報であっても良く、例えば、シリアルナンバー等でも良いし、ネットワーク上のＩＰアドレスやＭＡＣアドレス等であっても良い。このＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタの装置識別子は文字列「ＲＦ１２５」であるとする。 The antenna 125 installed in the treatment room 605 receives a signal including a doctor identifier transmitted by the doctor state management card 30 of the doctor A001 and a state identifier. Then, the RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna 125 extracts the doctor identifier “A001” and the state identifier “available” from the received signal. Then, a device identifier assigned to the device itself is assigned to the extracted information and transmitted to the emergency medical assistance device 1. The device identifier may be any information as long as it can be identified from an RFID tag reader / writer connected to another antenna. For example, the device identifier may be a serial number, an IP address on the network, or a MAC address. Etc. The device identifier of the RFID tag reader / writer is assumed to be a character string “RF125”.
　ここでは、患者情報受付部１０１と、医師等動的情報受付部１０６がＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタから送信される情報を受け付け可能であるが、ここでは、患者情報受付部１０１と医師等動的情報受付部１０６とのそれぞれが、送信された情報に含まれる識別子が医師識別子か、患者識別子であるか否かを判断し、患者情報受付部１０１は、識別子が患者識別子である場合にだけ、情報を受け付けるようにし、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、識別子が医師識別子である場合にのみ、情報を受け付けるように予め設定しておく。ここでは、患者識別子は、すべて「Ｐ」で始まる文字列であるとし、その他の文字で始まる識別子は、医師識別子であるとし、患者情報受付部１０１と、医師等動的情報受付部１０６とは、それぞれ、識別子の先頭の文字がＰで始まるか否かにより医師識別子であるか患者識別子であるかを判断する。ここでは、受信した識別子が「Ｐ」以外の文字で始まるため、医師識別子であると判断して、送信された情報を受信する。 Here, the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor can receive information transmitted from the RFID tag reader / writer, but here, the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor 106 determines whether the identifier included in the transmitted information is a doctor identifier or a patient identifier, and the patient information reception unit 101 receives information only when the identifier is a patient identifier. Thus, the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor is set in advance so as to receive information only when the identifier is a doctor identifier. Here, it is assumed that the patient identifier is a character string that starts with “P”, the identifiers that start with other characters are doctor identifiers, and the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor are , It is determined whether the identifier is a doctor identifier or a patient identifier depending on whether or not the first character of the identifier starts with P. Here, since the received identifier starts with a character other than “P”, it is determined that the identifier is a doctor identifier, and the transmitted information is received.
　医師等動的情報受付部１０６は受信した情報に含まれるＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタの装置識別子を用いて、情報を受信したアンテナの位置を示す情報を取得する。ここでは、この情報を受信したアンテナの位置の情報を、医師の位置情報として取得する。 The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor acquires information indicating the position of the antenna that has received the information, using the device identifier of the RFID tag reader / writer included in the received information. Here, the information on the position of the antenna that has received this information is acquired as the position information of the doctor.
　図７は、アンテナに取り付けられた各ＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタの装置識別子と、アンテナが取り付けられた領域名との対応関係を示す受信位置管理表である。受信位置管理表は、「装置識別子」と「領域名」という項目を有している。「装置識別子」は、アンテナに取り付けられた各ＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタの識別子である。「領域名」は、アンテナが設置された領域の名称であり、例えば部屋名等である。「領域名」は、医師のいる領域名と考えてもよい。この管理表は、図示しない記憶媒体等に予め蓄積されているものとする。 FIG. 7 is a reception position management table showing the correspondence between the device identifier of each RFID tag reader / writer attached to the antenna and the area name to which the antenna is attached. The reception position management table has items of “device identifier” and “area name”. The “device identifier” is an identifier of each RFID tag reader / writer attached to the antenna. The “area name” is the name of the area where the antenna is installed, for example, a room name. The “area name” may be considered as the area name where the doctor is located. This management table is assumed to be stored in advance in a storage medium (not shown).
　ここでは、医師等動的情報受付部１０６が受け付けた情報に含まれる装置識別子は、「ＲＦ１２５」であるため、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、この値と「装置識別子」の値が一致するレコードを受信位置管理表で検索し、検索したレコードの「領域名」の値である「処置室」を、医師の位置情報として取得する。 Here, since the device identifier included in the information received by the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as the doctor is “RF125”, the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as the doctor matches the value of the “device identifier”. A record to be searched is searched in the reception position management table, and “treatment room” which is a value of “area name” of the searched record is acquired as position information of the doctor.
　つぎに、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、医師が急患に対して医療行為を行う領域にいるか否かを判断する。 Next, the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor determines whether or not the doctor is in an area where he / she performs medical treatment for an emergency patient.
　図８は、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域を管理する医療領域管理表である。医療領域管理表は、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域の領域名のリストである。 FIG. 8 is a medical area management table for managing an area where medical action is performed on an emergency patient. The medical area management table is a list of area names of areas where medical treatment is performed for emergency patients.
　医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、取得した医師の位置情報である「処置室」と一致する領域名が医療領域管理表にあるか否かを判断する。ここでは一致するものがあるため、医師の位置情報が、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域内であると判断する。このため、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、受け付けた医師識別子および状態識別子と、位置情報とを含む医師等動的情報を、図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に蓄積する。なお、ここでは、既に、同じ医師識別子「Ａ００１」を含む医師等動的情報が格納されていたため、この医師等動的情報が、新たな医師等動的情報を用いて更新されたとする。 The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor determines whether or not there is an area name in the medical area management table that matches the “treatment room” that is the position information of the acquired doctor. Here, since there is a match, it is determined that the position information of the doctor is within the area where medical treatment is performed for the emergency patient. For this reason, the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor accumulates dynamic information such as a doctor including the received doctor identifier and state identifier and position information in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown). Here, since dynamic information such as a doctor including the same doctor identifier “A001” has already been stored, it is assumed that the dynamic information such as a doctor has been updated using new dynamic information such as a doctor.
　図９は、図示しない格納部に蓄積された医師等動的情報を示す図である。ここでは、既に複数の医師の最新の医師等動的情報が格納されていたとする。 FIG. 9 is a diagram showing dynamic information such as a doctor accumulated in a storage unit (not shown). Here, it is assumed that dynamic information such as the latest doctors of a plurality of doctors has already been stored.
　また、医師等動的情報受付部１０６は、時刻情報を時計やＮＴＰ（ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ　ｔｉｍｅ　ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）等を介して取得し、医師等動的情報と対応づけて医師等動的履歴情報として図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に蓄積する。医師等動的履歴情報は履歴を示す情報であるため、ここでの蓄積は追記である。ここでは例えば、医師識別子毎のファイルとして医師等動的履歴情報を蓄積していく。 The dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor acquires time information via a clock, NTP (network time protocol), etc., and associates with the dynamic information such as the doctor as a storage medium (not shown) as dynamic history information such as a doctor. And so on. Since the dynamic history information such as a doctor is information indicating a history, the accumulation here is an additional note. Here, for example, dynamic history information such as a doctor is accumulated as a file for each doctor identifier.
　図１０は、医師識別子「Ａ００１」に対応づけられた医師等動的履歴情報の一例を示す図である。医師等動的履歴情報は、ファイル名が、「Ａ００１」であり、時刻情報と位置情報と状態識別子との組のリストが格納されている情報であるとする。ここでの時刻情報は日時の情報も含みうる概念であるとする。 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of dynamic history information such as a doctor associated with the doctor identifier “A001”. It is assumed that the dynamic history information such as a doctor has a file name “A001” and stores a list of sets of time information, position information, and a state identifier. The time information here is a concept that may include date and time information.
　次に、患者情報等が蓄積される処理等について具体的に説明する。例えば、患者識別子が「Ｐ００１」である患者（以下、各患者を患者の識別情報を後ろに並べて表示する。例えば、患者識別子が「Ｐ００１」である患者を、以下、患者Ｐ００１と呼ぶ）が、救急病棟内のベッドルーム６０２にいたとする。患者が手首につけた患者用無線通信装置４の患者用無線送信部４０２は、予め指定された一定の時間間隔で、患者識別子格納部４０１に格納されている患者識別子、ここでは、「Ｐ００１」を読み出し、読み出した患者識別子を含む信号を送信する。 Next, processing for storing patient information and the like will be described in detail. For example, a patient whose patient identifier is “P001” (hereinafter, each patient is displayed side by side with patient identification information. For example, a patient whose patient identifier is “P001” is hereinafter referred to as patient P001). Suppose you are in the bedroom 602 in the emergency ward. The patient wireless transmission unit 402 of the patient wireless communication device 4 attached to the wrist of the patient receives the patient identifier stored in the patient identifier storage unit 401 at a predetermined time interval, in this case, “P001”. A signal including the read patient identifier is transmitted.
　ベッドルーム６０２に設置されたアンテナ１２２は、患者Ｐ００１の患者用無線通信装置４が送信する患者識別子とを含む信号を受信する。そして、アンテナ１２２と接続されたＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタは、受信した信号から、患者識別子「Ｐ００１」を取り出す。そして、取り出した情報に、自装置の装置識別子「ＲＦ１２２」を付与して、救急医療支援装置１に送信する。ここでは、送信された情報に含まれる識別子が「Ｐ」で始まる識別子であるため、患者識別子であると判断して、患者情報受付部１０１は送信された情報を受信する。 The antenna 122 installed in the bedroom 602 receives a signal including the patient identifier transmitted by the patient wireless communication device 4 of the patient P001. Then, the RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna 122 extracts the patient identifier “P001” from the received signal. Then, the device identifier “RF122” of the device itself is assigned to the extracted information and transmitted to the emergency medical assistance device 1. Here, since the identifier included in the transmitted information is an identifier beginning with “P”, it is determined that the identifier is a patient identifier, and the patient information receiving unit 101 receives the transmitted information.
　上述した医師等動的情報受付部１０６と同様に、受信した情報に含まれるＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタのＩＰアドレス「ＲＦ１２２」を用いて、図７に示した受信位置管理表から、アンテナの位置を示す情報を取得する。ここでは、この情報を受信したアンテナの位置の情報を、患者の位置の情報として取得する。ここでは、患者の位置の情報を患者位置情報と呼ぶ。ここでは、患者情報受付部１０１は、「ベッドルーム」という患者位置情報を取得する。 As with the above-described dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor, information indicating the antenna position from the reception position management table shown in FIG. 7 using the IP address “RF122” of the RFID tag reader / writer included in the received information. To get. Here, information on the position of the antenna that has received this information is acquired as information on the position of the patient. Here, the patient position information is referred to as patient position information. Here, the patient information reception unit 101 acquires patient position information “bedroom”.
　図１１は、急患を受け入れる部屋を管理する急患用部屋管理表である。急患用部屋管理表は、急患を受け入れる部屋の領域名のリストである。 FIG. 11 is an emergency room management table for managing rooms for receiving emergency patients. The emergency room management table is a list of area names of rooms that receive emergency patients.
　患者情報受付部１０１は、取得した患者位置情報である「ベッドルーム」と一致する領域名が急患用部屋管理表にあるか否かを判断する。ここでは一致するものがあるため、患者位置情報が示す位置が、急患を受け入れる部屋内であると判断する。このため、患者情報受付部１０１は、受け付けた患者識別子と患者位置情報とを対応づけた患者情報を、図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に蓄積する。なお、ここでは、患者識別子「Ｐ００１」と同じ患者識別子が既に格納されていたため、既に格納されていた患者識別子と患者位置情報とが、新たな患者識別子と患者位置情報とを用いて更新されたとする。 The patient information receiving unit 101 determines whether or not an area name that coincides with “bedroom” that is the acquired patient position information is in the emergency room management table. Here, since there is a match, it is determined that the position indicated by the patient position information is in the room that receives the emergency patient. Therefore, the patient information receiving unit 101 accumulates patient information in which the received patient identifier is associated with the patient position information in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown). Here, since the same patient identifier as the patient identifier “P001” has already been stored, the already stored patient identifier and patient position information are updated using the new patient identifier and patient position information. To do.
　図１２は、図示しない格納部に蓄積された患者情報を示す図である。患者情報は、「患者識別子」、「患者位置情報」、「転送可否」、および「転送先」という項目を有する。「患者識別子」は患者識別子である。「患者位置情報」は、患者位置情報であり、ここでは、図７に示した領域名と同じ領域名を用いている。「転送可否」および「転送先」は、転送可否情報であり、「転送可否」は、転送が可能であるか否かを示す情報である。ここでは、値「○」は転送が可能であることを示し、値「×」は転送が不可であることを示す。「転送先」は、転送先となる病院内の施設を指定する情報である。転送可否情報は、例えば、病院の医師等により、図示しない受付部等を介して適宜入力されるものであるとする。なお、この患者情報には、既に複数の患者の最新の情報が格納されていたとする。 FIG. 12 is a diagram showing patient information accumulated in a storage unit (not shown). The patient information includes items of “patient identifier”, “patient position information”, “transferability”, and “transfer destination”. “Patient identifier” is a patient identifier. “Patient position information” is patient position information, and here, the same area name as that shown in FIG. 7 is used. “Transferability” and “Transfer destination” are transfer enable / disable information, and “Transfer enable / disable” is information indicating whether transfer is possible. Here, the value “◯” indicates that transfer is possible, and the value “×” indicates that transfer is not possible. “Forwarding destination” is information for designating a facility in a hospital that is a forwarding destination. It is assumed that the transfer permission / prohibition information is appropriately input by, for example, a hospital doctor or the like via a reception unit (not shown). It is assumed that the latest information on a plurality of patients has already been stored in this patient information.
　さらに、患者情報受付部１０１は、図１２に示した患者管理表において、患者識別子の数をカウントする。ここでは、例えばカウント数が「１７」であったとする。すなわち患者が１７人急患を受け入れる部屋にいることを示している。患者情報受付部１０１は、このカウント結果をさらなる患者情報として、図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に蓄積する。 Further, the patient information receiving unit 101 counts the number of patient identifiers in the patient management table shown in FIG. Here, for example, it is assumed that the count number is “17”. That is, the patient is in a room that accepts 17 urgent patients. The patient information receiving unit 101 accumulates this count result as further patient information in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
　図１３は、患者情報受付部１０１が蓄積した急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者数を示す患者情報を示す図である。 FIG. 13 is a diagram showing patient information indicating the number of patients in a room that accepts emergency cases accumulated by the patient information receiving unit 101.
　ここで、図示しない受付部等を介して、表示部１０８が医師の位置を示す画像の表示を行う指示を受け付けた場合の処理を、以下に、具体的に説明する。 Here, the processing when the display unit 108 receives an instruction to display an image indicating the position of the doctor via a receiving unit or the like (not shown) will be specifically described below.
　図１４は、表示制御情報格納部１０７に格納されている表示制御情報を示す図である。表示制御情報は、表示を拒否する領域を指定する情報である。 FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the display control information stored in the display control information storage unit 107. The display control information is information that designates an area for which display is refused.
　表示部１０８は、表示の指示に従って、図９に示したような医師等動的情報受付部１０６が蓄積した医師等動的情報から、対応する位置情報が、図１４に示した表示制御情報が示す位置情報と一致しない医師識別子（図９では医師ＩＤ）と、位置情報との組み合わせを取得する。ここでは、対応する位置情報が表示制御情報が示す「スタッフルーム」以外の医師識別子と位置情報との組み合わせを取得する。そして、表示部１０８は、予め用意した救命病棟の間取り図上の、各医師等動的情報から取得した位置情報が示す部屋上に、医師がいることを示す画像を配置した画像を構成する。この画像は、医師の展開状態を示す画像と考えてもよい。医師がいることを示す画像は、通常は、医師がいる領域や位置に医師識別子等を表示するが、医師識別子を示さずに、単に医師が存在していることのみを示すようにして、医師同士を識別できないようにしても良い。そして、表示部１０８は構成した画像を、図示しないモニタ等に表示する。 In accordance with the display instruction, the display unit 108 obtains the corresponding position information from the dynamic information such as the doctor's dynamic information accumulating unit 106 as shown in FIG. 9 and the display control information shown in FIG. A combination of the doctor identifier (doctor ID in FIG. 9) that does not match the position information shown and the position information is acquired. Here, the combination of the doctor identifier other than the “staff room” indicated by the display control information and the position information corresponding to the position information is acquired. And the display part 108 comprises the image which has arrange | positioned the image which shows that there exists a doctor on the room which the positional information acquired from dynamic information, such as each doctor on the floor plan prepared beforehand. This image may be considered as an image showing a developed state of the doctor. The image indicating that a doctor is present usually displays a doctor identifier or the like in the area or position where the doctor is present, but does not indicate the doctor identifier, but merely indicates that the doctor exists, You may make it impossible to identify each other. The display unit 108 displays the configured image on a monitor or the like (not shown).
　図１５は、表示部１０８による表示例を示す図である。図においては、各領域にいる医師の医師識別子を各領域上に配置して表示している。 FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a display example by the display unit 108. In the figure, the doctor identifiers of doctors in each area are arranged and displayed on each area.
　なお、ここでは、表示の指示に応じて画像を表示するようにしたが、予め指定された一定または不定のタイミングにより、最新の医師等動的情報を用いて内容を更新しながら表示をおこなってもよい。 Here, the image is displayed according to the display instruction. However, at a predetermined or indefinite timing designated in advance, the image is displayed while updating the content using the latest dynamic information such as a doctor. Also good.
　また、医師の位置と同様に、患者の位置についての表示を行うようにしてもよいし、医師の表示と患者の表示とを同じ間取り図上に同時に表示するようにしてもよい。 Also, the patient position may be displayed in the same manner as the doctor position, or the doctor display and the patient display may be simultaneously displayed on the same floor plan.
　以下、受入要請が送信された場合の処理の具体例について説明する。 Hereinafter, a specific example of processing when an acceptance request is transmitted will be described.
　図１６は、受入要請装置５の受入要請を入力するための入力画面である。 FIG. 16 is an input screen for inputting an acceptance request of the acceptance requesting device 5.
　まず救命隊員が、急患を救急車に乗せるとともに、図１６に示すような受入要請装置５の入力画面から、急患の症状に応じた障害部位の指定を含む受入要請を入力したとする。ここでは、患者の心臓に障害があると判断し、障害部位として心臓を指定したとする。 First, it is assumed that a lifesaving member places an emergency patient on an ambulance and inputs an acceptance request including designation of a faulty part according to the symptom of the emergency patient from the input screen of the acceptance requesting apparatus 5 as shown in FIG. Here, it is assumed that the patient's heart is determined to be defective, and the heart is designated as the damaged part.
　受入要請受付部５０１は、障害部位の指定に応じて、心臓を障害部位に示すための障害部位識別子である「心臓」を含む受入要請を受け付ける。そして、受入要請送信部５０２は、障害部位識別子を含む受入要請を無線ネットワーク等で、救急医療支援装置１に送信する。 The acceptance request accepting unit 501 accepts an acceptance request including “heart”, which is an obstacle part identifier for indicating the heart as the obstacle part, according to the designation of the obstacle part. Then, the acceptance request transmitting unit 502 transmits an acceptance request including the fault site identifier to the emergency medical assistance device 1 via a wireless network or the like.
　救急医療支援装置１の受入要請受信部１０３は、無線ネットワーク等を介して障害部位識別子を含む受入要請装置５から送信される受入要請を受け付ける。受け付けた受入要請は、図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に一時記憶する。 The acceptance request receiving unit 103 of the emergency medical assistance device 1 accepts an acceptance request transmitted from the acceptance requesting device 5 including the fault site identifier via a wireless network or the like. The accepted acceptance request is temporarily stored in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
　図１７は、病院αの病院施設情報の一例を示す図である。病院施設情報は、「部屋名」と「ベッド数」という項目を有している。「部屋名」は、急患を受け入れる部屋名であり、ここでは、図７に示したような領域名を用いている。 FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of hospital facility information of the hospital α. The hospital facility information has items of “room name” and “number of beds”. The “room name” is a room name for receiving the emergency case, and here, the area name as shown in FIG. 7 is used.
　ベッド判断部１０４は、病院施設情報格納部１００に格納されている病院施設情報が示す急患を受け入れる部屋全てのベッド数の合計と、患者情報が示す急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者数とを比較する。ベッド数の合計は、図１７に示した病院施設情報の「合計」欄の値であり、ここでは、「１７」である。また、患者情報が示す患者数は、図１３に示したように「１７」であるため、患者数とベッド数が同じであると判断する。 The bed determination unit 104 compares the total number of beds of all the rooms receiving the emergency case indicated by the hospital facility information stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 100 with the number of patients in the room receiving the emergency case indicated by the patient information. . The total number of beds is the value in the “total” column of the hospital facility information shown in FIG. 17, and is “17” here. Further, since the number of patients indicated by the patient information is “17” as shown in FIG. 13, it is determined that the number of patients and the number of beds are the same.
　ここで、ベッド数よりも患者数が少ない場合、ベッド判断部１０４が、急患を受け入れる部屋に空きがあると判断し、医療チーム判断部１０９は、急患の対応が可能である医療チームを検出する処理を開始する。しかし、ここでは、ベッド数よりも患者数が少なくないため、ベッド判断部１０４は、現在の患者に、転送が可能な患者がいるか否かの判断を行う。 Here, when the number of patients is smaller than the number of beds, the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is a vacant room for receiving an emergency case, and the medical team determination unit 109 detects a medical team that can handle the emergency case. Start processing. However, since the number of patients is not smaller than the number of beds here, the bed determination unit 104 determines whether there is a patient that can be transferred to the current patient.
　図１８は、転送先候補施設情報格納部１０２に予め格納されている転送先候補施設情報である。転送先候補施設情報は、「転送先」と「空き」という項目を有している。「転送先」は、転送先となる病院内の施設を示す項目であり、ここでは、その値として、図１２に示した患者情報の「転送先」と同じ値が用いられている。「空き」は各施設におけるベッドの空きの有無を示す。例えば値「○」は、空きがあることを示し、値「×」は空きがないことを示す。 FIG. 18 shows transfer destination candidate facility information stored in advance in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102. The transfer destination candidate facility information has items of “transfer destination” and “empty”. The “transfer destination” is an item indicating a hospital facility as a transfer destination, and here, the same value as the “transfer destination” of the patient information shown in FIG. 12 is used. “Availability” indicates whether a bed is available in each facility. For example, the value “◯” indicates that there is a vacancy, and the value “x” indicates that there is no vacancy.
　ベッド判断部１０４は、まず、図１２に示した患者情報において、「転送可否」の値が「○」であるレコード、即ち転送が可能な患者であることを示すレコードを検出する。ここでは、「患者識別子」が「Ｐ００２」のレコードが、「転送可否」の値が「○」であるレコードとして検出されたとする。次に、ベッド判断部１０４は、図１８に示した転送先候補情報において、「転送先」の値が、図１２から検出したレコードの「転送先」の項目の値である「一般病棟Ａ」と一致するレコードを検出し、そのレコードの「空き」項目の値が、「○」即ち転送可であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、図１８に示した転送先候補施設情報の「転送先」の値が「一般病棟Ａ」であるレコードの「空き」項目の値が「○」であるため、転送先にベッドの空きがあることから、ベッド判断部１０４は、急患を受け入れる部屋に転送可能な患者がいると判断する。このため、ベッド判断部１０４は、急患を受け入れる部屋に空きがあると判断する。そして、医療チーム判断部１０９が、急患の対応が可能である医療チームを検出する処理を開始する。 First, the bed determination unit 104 detects a record in which the value of “transferability” is “◯” in the patient information shown in FIG. 12, that is, a record indicating that the patient can be transferred. Here, it is assumed that a record with “P002” as “patient identifier” is detected as a record with “◯” as the value of “transferability”. Next, in the transfer destination candidate information illustrated in FIG. 18, the bed determination unit 104 determines that the “transfer destination” value is the value of the “transfer destination” item of the record detected from FIG. Is detected, and it is determined whether the value of the “free” item of the record is “◯”, that is, transfer is possible. Here, since the value of the “empty” item of the record in which the “transfer destination” value of the transfer destination candidate facility information shown in FIG. 18 is “general ward A” is “◯”, the bed empty at the transfer destination. Therefore, the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is a patient that can be transferred to the room that receives the emergency case. For this reason, the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is a vacancy in the room for receiving the emergency case. Then, the medical team determination unit 109 starts a process of detecting a medical team that can deal with an emergency case.
　ここで、図１２に示した患者情報において、「転送可否」の値が「○」であるレコードが検出できない場合や、「転送可否」の値が「○」である全てのレコ－ドの転送先にベッドの空きがないことを転送先候補施設情報が示す場合、急患を受け入れる部屋にベッドの空きがなく、今いる患者のなかにも転送可能な患者がいないため、ベッドに空きをつくることができないこととなる。このため、対応可否送信部１１０は、急患に対して対応不可である旨の情報を受入要請装置５に送信する。 Here, in the patient information shown in FIG. 12, when a record whose “transferability” value is “◯” cannot be detected, or all records whose “transferability” value is “◯” are transferred. If the transfer destination candidate facility information indicates that there is no bed available first, there is no bed available in the room to receive the emergency case, and there is no patient that can be transferred among the patients who are present, so make a bed available. It will not be possible. For this reason, the response transmission / reception unit 110 transmits information indicating that it is impossible to respond to the emergency case to the acceptance requesting device 5.
　ここでは、ベッド判断部１０４が、急患を受け入れる部屋に空きがあると判断し、医療チーム判断部１０９が、急患の対応が可能である医療チームを検出する処理を開始する。 Here, the bed determination unit 104 determines that there is a room in the room for receiving an emergency, and the medical team determination unit 109 starts a process of detecting a medical team that can handle the emergency.
　以下、医療チームを検出する処理について説明する。医療チーム判断部１０９は、図９に示したような図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に格納されている医師等動的情報のうちの一のレコードを読み出す。ここでは、まず、「医師ＩＤ」が「Ａ００１」であるレコードを読み出す。 Hereinafter, processing for detecting a medical team will be described. The medical team determination unit 109 reads one record of the dynamic information such as a doctor stored in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown) as illustrated in FIG. Here, first, a record whose “doctor ID” is “A001” is read.
　次に、このレコードの「状態識別子」の値が対応可であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、「状態識別子」の値が「ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」であるか否かを判断する。ここでは「ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」であるため、対応可であると判断する。 Next, it is determined whether or not the “state identifier” value of this record is compatible. Here, it is determined whether or not the value of “state identifier” is “available”. Here, since it is “available”, it is determined that it can be handled.
　対応可であると判断したため、医療チーム判断部１０９は、この「医師ＩＤ」が示す医師の予定が、対応可の予定であるか否かを、スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１が受け付けたスケジュール情報を用いて判断する。 Since it is determined that the response is possible, the medical team determination unit 109 uses the schedule information received by the schedule information reception unit 1061 to determine whether or not the schedule of the doctor indicated by the “doctor ID” is a possible response. Judgment.
　図１９は、スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１が受け付けて蓄積したスケジュール情報の一例を示す図である。スケジュール情報は、医師識別子と対応付けられて格納されている。このスケジュール情報は、医師識別子が「Ａ００１」である医師のスケジュール情報である。スケジュール情報受付手段１０６１は、任意のタイミングで医師等から受け付けたスケジュール情報を蓄積する。スケジュール情報は、時間と、行動予定を対応付けた情報である。行動予定が「救急担当」である時間は、スケジュール上は、急患に対応可能な時間であることが予め決められているものとする。 FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of schedule information received and accumulated by the schedule information receiving means 1061. The schedule information is stored in association with the doctor identifier. This schedule information is schedule information of a doctor whose doctor identifier is “A001”. The schedule information receiving unit 1061 accumulates schedule information received from a doctor or the like at an arbitrary timing. The schedule information is information in which time is associated with an action schedule. It is assumed that the time for which the action schedule is “emergency charge” is predetermined in the schedule to be a time that can deal with an emergency patient.
　例えば、時計等から取得した現在の時刻が、「１４時５１分」であったとすると、医療チーム判断部１０９は、医師識別子が「Ａ００１」である医師の現在の時刻を含む時間帯の行動予定が「救急担当」であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、図１９より、「１４時５１分」を含む時間帯である１４時３０分から１８時までの間の行動予定が「救急担当」であるため、スケジュール上は、医師ＡＳ００１が現在急患に対応可能な状態であると判断する。 For example, if the current time acquired from a clock or the like is “14:51”, the medical team determination unit 109 determines the action schedule in the time zone including the current time of the doctor whose doctor identifier is “A001”. Is determined to be “emergency officer”. Here, from FIG. 19, since the action plan between 14:30 and 18:00, which is the time zone including “14:51”, is “emergency charge”, the doctor AS001 is currently in emergency on the schedule. It is determined that it can be handled.
　つぎに、スケジュール上の現在の予定が対応可能であると判断されたため、医療チーム判断部１０９は、図１０に示した医師等動的履歴情報を用いて、医師Ａ００１が、急患に対応可能な状態であるか否かの判断を行う。ここでは、一例として、最新の時刻の履歴において、位置情報が「手術室」以外であって、その直前の５分前までの間の時刻の履歴に、位置情報が「手術室」である履歴が有り、なおかつ、その位置情報が「手術室」である履歴の前の、位置情報が同じ「手術室」である連続した履歴を検出し、その検出した履歴が示す最も遅い時刻と最も早い時刻との差が、５分未満であるか否かを判断する。そして、５分未満である場合には、履歴上は、医師が対応不可の状態であることを示していると判断する。このような場合に対応不可とするのは、例えば、手術開始時に一時的に、医師が手術に必要な資料や用具等を探すために手術室以外の領域に退出した状態と考えられるからである。また、これ以外の場合には、急患に対応可能な状態を示していると判断する。ここでは、図１０に示す医師等動的履歴情報において、最新の時刻「１４：５０」の履歴の「位置情報」は「手術室」ではない「処置室」であり、その２分前の時刻「１４：４８」の履歴の位置情報は、「手術室」であり、その前には、位置情報が「手術室」である履歴が、時刻「１３：１０」にさかのぼるまで連続しているが、その位置情報が「手術室」である履歴の時間の差が、１時間３８分であって、５分未満でないため、医療チーム判断部１０９は、医師等動的履歴情報が、医師Ａ００１が急患に対応可能な状態であると示していると判断する。 Next, since it is determined that the current schedule on the schedule is available, the medical team determination unit 109 uses the dynamic history information such as the doctor shown in FIG. 10 to enable the doctor A001 to respond to the emergency case. It is determined whether or not it is in a state. Here, as an example, in the history of the latest time, the location information is other than “operating room”, the history of the time until 5 minutes before that, and the location information is “operating room” In addition, there is a continuous history in which the position information is “operating room” before the history in which the position information is “operating room”, and the latest time and the earliest time indicated by the detected history are detected. It is determined whether or not the difference is less than 5 minutes. If it is less than 5 minutes, it is determined that the doctor indicates that the doctor is incapable of handling. The reason for not being able to cope with such a case is that, for example, it is considered that the doctor has left the area other than the operating room to temporarily search for materials and tools necessary for the operation at the start of the operation. . In other cases, it is determined that a state capable of handling an emergency is indicated. Here, in the dynamic history information such as the doctor shown in FIG. 10, the “position information” in the history of the latest time “14:50” is “treatment room”, not “operating room”, and the time two minutes before that The position information of the history of “14:48” is “operating room”, and before that, the history of the position information of “operating room” continues until the time “13:10”. Since the time difference between the histories whose position information is “operating room” is 1 hour and 38 minutes and is not less than 5 minutes, the medical team determination unit 109 determines that the dynamic history information such as the doctor is the doctor A001. Judge that it indicates that the patient is ready for an emergency.
　このため、医療チーム判断部１０９は、この医師等動的情報のレコードに含まれる医師識別子「Ａ００１」を取得し、急患に対応可能な医師を示す情報として、図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。 Therefore, the medical team determination unit 109 acquires the doctor identifier “A001” included in the record of dynamic information such as a doctor, and accumulates the information in a storage medium (not shown) as information indicating a doctor who can handle an emergency patient.
　そして、医師等動的情報の他のレコードについても同様の判断処理を行う。なお、医師等動的情報の一のレコードについて、「状態識別子」の値が対応可でない場合や、スケジュール情報から現在の予定が急患に対応可でない予定であると判断された場合や、医師等動的履歴情報から、医師が急患に対応可能な状態でないと判断された場合には、そのレコードの「医師ＩＤ」が示す医師は、現在急患に対応可能ではないと判断して、次のレコードについての同様の判断を繰り返し行うようにする。 And the same judgment process is performed for other records of dynamic information such as doctors. In addition, regarding one record of dynamic information such as a doctor, when the value of the “state identifier” is not available, or when it is determined from the schedule information that the current schedule is a schedule that is not available for emergency cases, a doctor, etc. If it is determined from the dynamic history information that the doctor is not in a state capable of handling an emergency, the doctor indicated by the “doctor ID” of the record determines that the doctor cannot currently handle the emergency, and the next record Repeat the same judgment for.
　図２０は、医師等動的情報の全てのレコ－ドについて上記の処理を終了した時点における、医療チーム判断部１０９が急患に対応可能な医師を示す情報として蓄積した医師識別子を示す図である。 FIG. 20 is a diagram showing doctor identifiers accumulated by the medical team determination unit 109 as information indicating doctors capable of handling emergency cases at the time when the above processing is completed for all records of dynamic information such as doctors. .
　次に、医療チーム判断部１０９は、受付要請に含まれる障害部位識別子「心臓」を図示しない格納部等から読み出し、この障害部位識別子に対応する医療行為識別子と対応付けられた医療行為識別子群を、医師等静的情報から取得する。 Next, the medical team determination unit 109 reads the failure site identifier “heart” included in the acceptance request from a storage unit (not shown) or the like, and selects a medical activity identifier group associated with the medical activity identifier corresponding to the failure site identifier. Obtain from static information such as doctors.
　図２１は、医師等静的情報格納部１０５に格納されている医師等静的情報の一例を示す図である。医師等静的情報は、「チーム名」、「医療行為」、および「医師ＩＤ」という項目を有している。「チーム名」は、一の医師識別子群を構成する医師識別子に対応した医師により構成される医療チームの名称である。一の医師識別子群に一の医療チーム名が対応している。「医療行為」は、一の医師識別子群が示す医療チームが行える医療行為を識別する医療行為識別子である。医療行為識別子は、ここでは、上述した「障害部位識別子」に利用される情報と同じ情報を用いてる。例えば、「医療行為」が「心臓」であれば、心臓に対する手術等の医療行為が可能であることを示している。「医師ＩＤ」は、一の医師識別子群を構成する医師識別子である。一の医療チームを構成する医師の医師識別子であると考えてもよい。 FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of static information such as doctors stored in the static information storage unit 105 such as doctors. The static information such as a doctor has items of “team name”, “medical practice”, and “doctor ID”. “Team name” is the name of a medical team constituted by doctors corresponding to doctor identifiers constituting one doctor identifier group. One medical team name corresponds to one doctor identifier group. The “medical practice” is a medical practice identifier for identifying a medical practice that can be performed by the medical team indicated by one doctor identifier group. Here, as the medical practice identifier, the same information as the information used for the above-mentioned “failure site identifier” is used. For example, if “medical practice” is “heart”, it indicates that medical practice such as surgery on the heart is possible. The “doctor ID” is a doctor identifier constituting one doctor identifier group. You may think that it is a doctor identifier of the doctor who comprises one medical team.
　医療チーム判断部１０９は、図２１に示す医師等静的情報において、「医療行為」の値として、受付要請に含まれる障害部位識別子「心臓」と一致する値を有するレコードを検出し、そのレコードの「医師ＩＤ」の値を、チーム名別に取得する。ここでは、「チーム名」が「Ａ」であるレコードと、「B」であるレコードの「医療行為」の値が、「心臓」を含むため、この「チーム名」が「Ａ」であるレコードの「医師ＩＤ」と、「チーム名」が「Ｂ」であるレコードの「医師ＩＤ」の値をそれぞれ取得し、「チーム名」の値別にメモリ等に個別に一時的に蓄積する。 The medical team determination unit 109 detects a record having a value that matches the failure site identifier “heart” included in the reception request as the value of “medical action” in the static information such as a doctor shown in FIG. The “doctor ID” value is acquired for each team name. Here, since the value of “medical practice” of the record whose “team name” is “A” and the record of “B” includes “heart”, the record whose “team name” is “A” The “doctor ID” and the “doctor ID” of the record whose “team name” is “B” are respectively acquired and temporarily stored in a memory or the like for each “team name” value.
　図２２は、医療チーム判断部１０９が「チーム名」の値別に一時的に蓄積した「医師ＩＤ」を管理する医師ＩＤ管理表である。 FIG. 22 is a doctor ID management table for managing “doctor IDs” temporarily stored by the medical team determination unit 109 for each “team name” value.
　次に、医療チーム判断部１０９は、まず、図２２に示したような、一時記憶した「医師ＩＤ」のうちの、「Ａ」という「チーム名」の医師識別子群から取得した「医師ＩＤ」を順次読み出し、図２０に示した急患に対応可能な医師の医師識別子のなかに、読み出した医師識別子と一致するものがあるか否かを判断して、一致する「医師ＩＤ」の数をカウントしていく。ここでは、医師等静的情報の「Ａ」という「チーム名」の医師識別子群のなかの、「Ａ００１」、「Ａ００２」、および「Ａ００４」という「医師ＩＤ」と一致する医師識別子が、図２０に示した急患に対応可能な医師の医師識別子の中から検出される。このときのカウント結果は、「３」である。そして、「Ａ」という「チーム名」の医師識別子群から取得した全ての「医師ＩＤ」についての処理が終わった時点で、カウント結果が、予め指定された値以上であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、予め指定された値を、各医師識別子群を構成する医師識別子の数の半数であるとすることが、予め用意された条件に示されていたとする。即ち「Ａ」という「チーム名」の医師識別子群から取得した「医師ＩＤ」と一致する医師識別子のカウント数が、「Ａ」という「チーム名」の医師識別子群を構成する「医師ＩＤ」の総数の半分以上であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、「Ａ」という「チーム名」の医師識別子群を構成する「医師ＩＤ」の総数は、「４」であるため、カウント結果が、「２」以上であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、カウント結果が「３」であるため、予め指定された値以上であると判断する。このため、医療チーム判断部１０９は、急患に対応可能な医療チームがあると判断する。 Next, the medical team determination unit 109 first obtains the “doctor ID” acquired from the doctor identifier group of “team name” “A” among the temporarily stored “doctor IDs” as shown in FIG. 20 is sequentially read out, and it is determined whether or not there is a doctor identifier that matches the doctor ID that has been read out among the doctor identifiers of doctors that can deal with the emergency shown in FIG. 20, and the number of matching "doctor ID" is counted. I will do it. Here, the doctor identifiers that match the “doctor ID” of “A001”, “A002”, and “A004” in the group of doctor identifiers of “team name” “A” of static information such as doctors are shown in FIG. 20 is detected from the doctor identifiers of doctors capable of handling the emergency shown in FIG. The count result at this time is “3”. Then, when the processing for all “doctor IDs” acquired from the doctor identifier group of “team name” “A” is completed, it is determined whether or not the count result is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. . Here, it is assumed that the pre-specified condition indicates that the value designated in advance is half the number of doctor identifiers constituting each doctor identifier group. That is, the count number of the doctor identifier that matches the “doctor ID” acquired from the “team name” doctor identifier group “A” is the “doctor ID” that constitutes the “team name” doctor identifier group “A”. It is determined whether or not it is half or more of the total number. Here, since the total number of “doctor IDs” constituting the doctor identifier group of “team name” “A” is “4”, it is determined whether the count result is “2” or more. Here, since the count result is “3”, it is determined that the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. For this reason, the medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency case.
　ここで、カウント結果が「２未満」であれば、メモリ等に一時記憶した次の医師識別子群、即ち「Ｂ」という「チーム名」の医師識別子群から取得した「医師ＩＤ」についても同様の処理を行う。 Here, if the count result is “less than 2”, the same applies to the “doctor ID” acquired from the next doctor identifier group temporarily stored in the memory or the like, that is, the doctor identifier group of “team name” “B”. Process.
　なお、メモリ等に一時記憶した医師識別子群の全てについての上記の処理を終えた時点で、予め指定された値以上のカウント結果が得られた医師識別子群がなかった場合には、医療チーム判断部１０９は、急患に対応可能な医療チームがないと判断する。 If there is no doctor identifier group for which a count result equal to or greater than a pre-specified value has been obtained at the time when the above processing is completed for all doctor identifier groups temporarily stored in a memory or the like, the medical team determines The unit 109 determines that there is no medical team capable of handling the emergency case.
　対応可否送信部１１０は、医療チーム判断部１０９は、急患に対応可能な医療チームがあると判断したため、急患に対応可能である旨の情報を受入要請装置５に送信する。急患に対応可能である旨の情報は、例えば、「病院α：急患の受け入れ可能」等の情報である。 Since the medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency case, the response availability transmission unit 110 transmits information indicating that the emergency case can be handled to the acceptance requesting device 5. The information indicating that the emergency case can be handled is, for example, information such as “Hospital α: Acceptance of emergency case”.
　なお、医療チーム判断部１０９が、急患に対応可能な医療チームがないと判断した場合、急患に対応不可である旨の情報を受入要請装置５に送信する。急患に対応不可である旨の情報は、例えば、「病院α：急患の受け入れ不可」等の情報である。 In addition, when the medical team determination unit 109 determines that there is no medical team that can respond to the emergency case, the medical team determination unit 109 transmits information to the acceptance requesting device 5 that the emergency case cannot be handled. The information indicating that it is impossible to handle an emergency is, for example, information such as “Hospital α: Unacceptable emergency”.
　受入要請装置５の対応可否受信部５０３は、救急医療支援装置１から送信された急患に対応可能である旨の情報を受信する。そして、対応可否出力部５０４は、急患に対応可能である旨の情報を用いて画像情報を構成し、モニタ等に、対応可能である旨の情報を表示する。 The response availability receiving unit 503 of the acceptance requesting device 5 receives information indicating that the emergency request transmitted from the emergency medical support device 1 is available. The response availability output unit 504 configures image information using information indicating that it is possible to respond to a sudden illness, and displays information indicating that the response is possible on a monitor or the like.
　図２３は、対応可否出力部５０４による表示例を示す図である。 FIG. 23 is a view showing a display example by the availability output unit 504.
　以上のように、本実施の形態によれば、ベッドの空きの判断結果と、医師等静的情報と医師等動的情報との組合せにより判断した医療チームの有無の判断結果とに応じて、急患の受け入れの可否を適切に判断することができる。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, according to the determination result of bed availability and the determination result of the presence or absence of a medical team determined by a combination of static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor, It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to accept an emergency patient.
　（実施の形態２）
　本実施の形態の救急医療支援システムは、複数の病院においてそれぞれ受信した、無線通信装置３および患者用無線通信装置４からの情報を用いて、各病院が急患に対する対応が可能か否かを判断するようにして、急患の搬送についての集中管理を可能としたものである。 (Embodiment 2)
The emergency medical support system according to the present embodiment determines whether each hospital is capable of handling an emergency using information from the wireless communication device 3 and the patient wireless communication device 4 received at each of a plurality of hospitals. In this way, centralized management of the transportation of emergency cases is made possible.
　図２４は、本実施の形態にかかる救急医療支援システム２０の構成を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the emergency medical support system 20 according to the present embodiment.
　救急医療支援システム２０は、救急医療支援装置２、１以上の無線通信装置３、１以上の患者用無線通信装置４、および１以上の受入要請装置５を備える。１以上の無線通信装置３および１以上の患者用無線通信装置４は、１以上の病院に対してそれぞれ配備され、各病院の医師および患者に装着される。 The emergency medical support system 20 includes an emergency medical support device 2, one or more wireless communication devices 3, one or more patient wireless communication devices 4, and one or more acceptance requesting devices 5. The one or more wireless communication devices 3 and the one or more patient wireless communication devices 4 are respectively installed in one or more hospitals and attached to doctors and patients of each hospital.
　無線通信装置３、患者用無線通信装置４、および受入要請装置５の構成や動作については、上記実施の形態１と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 Since the configurations and operations of the wireless communication device 3, the patient wireless communication device 4, and the acceptance requesting device 5 are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.
　なお、無線通信装置３および患者用無線通信装置４は、各無線通信装置３および患者用無線通信装置４が利用される病院の識別子である病院識別子を格納する記憶媒体等の格納部（図示せず）をそれぞれ有しており、無線送信部３０３や患者用無線送信部４０２が、この病院識別子を医師識別子や患者識別子とともに、送信するようにしても良い。病院識別子については後述する。 The wireless communication device 3 and the patient wireless communication device 4 include a storage unit (not shown) such as a storage medium that stores a hospital identifier that is an identifier of a hospital in which each wireless communication device 3 and the patient wireless communication device 4 is used. And the wireless transmitter 303 and the patient wireless transmitter 402 may transmit the hospital identifier together with the doctor identifier and the patient identifier. The hospital identifier will be described later.
　救急医療支援装置２は、病院施設情報格納部２００、患者情報受付部２０１、転送先候補施設情報格納部２０２、受入要請受信部２０３、ベッド判断部２０４、医師等静的情報格納部２０５、医師等動的情報受付部２０６、表示制御情報格納部２０７、表示部２０８、医療チーム判断部２０９、および対応可否送信部２１０を備える。 The emergency medical support device 2 includes a hospital facility information storage unit 200, a patient information reception unit 201, a transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 202, an acceptance request reception unit 203, a bed determination unit 204, a static information storage unit 205 such as a doctor, a doctor An isodynamic information reception unit 206, a display control information storage unit 207, a display unit 208, a medical team determination unit 209, and a response availability transmission unit 210 are provided.
　医師等動的情報受付部２０６は、スケジュール情報受付手段２０６１および位置情報受付手段２０６２を備える。 The dynamic information receiving unit 206 such as a doctor includes a schedule information receiving unit 2061 and a position information receiving unit 2062.
　病院施設情報格納部２００は、上述した病院施設情報格納部１００において、病院を識別する病院識別子と病院施設情報との組を１以上格納するようにしたものである。病院識別子と病院施設情報との組とは、病院識別子と病院施設情報とが対応付けられていることと考えても良い。かかることは、他の情報同士の組等についても同様である。病院識別子は、具体的には、救急医療支援装置２が、急患受け入れの可否判断を支援する病院を識別するための情報である。例えば病院名であっても良いし、病院に割り当てられた文字列等であっても良い。また病院の電話番号等であっても良い。病院施設情報格納部２００に格納される病院施設情報は、具体的には、この病院施設情報と組をなす病院識別子が識別する病院についての病院施設情報である。その他の構成等については、上述した病院施設情報格納部１００と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The hospital facility information storage unit 200 stores one or more pairs of a hospital identifier for identifying a hospital and hospital facility information in the hospital facility information storage unit 100 described above. A set of a hospital identifier and hospital facility information may be considered to be associated with a hospital identifier and hospital facility information. This also applies to other information sets. Specifically, the hospital identifier is information for the emergency medical support apparatus 2 to identify a hospital that supports the determination of whether or not to accept an emergency patient. For example, it may be a hospital name or a character string assigned to a hospital. It may also be a hospital phone number. Specifically, the hospital facility information stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 200 is hospital facility information regarding a hospital identified by a hospital identifier that forms a pair with the hospital facility information. Other configurations and the like are the same as those of the hospital facility information storage unit 100 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted here.
　患者情報受付部２０１は、上述した患者情報受付部１０１において、病院識別子と患者情報との組を１組以上受け付けて、少なくとも一時的に蓄積するようにしたものである。患者情報受付部２０１は、患者情報等と対応付けられて送信される病院識別子を受け付けても良い。また、患者情報受付部２０１は、患者用無線通信装置４等から送信される情報を受け付けたアンテナ、あるいはアンテナに接続されたＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタ等が、どの病院に設置されたものであるか否かを判断して、アンテナ等が設置されている病院の病院識別子を取得してもよい。あるいは、患者用無線通信装置４等から送信される情報を受け付けたアンテナの位置等から、患者用無線通信装置４等の位置を算出し、算出した位置が含まれる領域上に建てられた病院の病院識別子を取得してもよい。ここでの患者情報は、１の組をなす病院識別子が示す病院における患者情報である。なお、その他の構成については、上述した患者情報受付部１０１と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The patient information receiving unit 201 receives at least one set of a hospital identifier and patient information in the patient information receiving unit 101 described above, and accumulates at least temporarily. The patient information receiving unit 201 may receive a hospital identifier transmitted in association with patient information or the like. In addition, the patient information reception unit 201 determines whether or not an antenna that has received information transmitted from the patient wireless communication device 4 or the like, or an RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna is installed in which hospital. And the hospital identifier of the hospital where the antenna or the like is installed may be acquired. Alternatively, the position of the patient wireless communication device 4 or the like is calculated from the position of the antenna that has received the information transmitted from the patient wireless communication device 4 or the like, and the hospital built on the area including the calculated position A hospital identifier may be acquired. The patient information here is patient information in a hospital indicated by a hospital identifier forming one set. Other configurations are the same as those of the patient information receiving unit 101 described above, and thus description thereof is omitted here.
　転送先候補施設情報格納部２０２には、上述した転送先候補施設情報格納部１０２において、病院識別子と転送先候補施設情報との組を格納するようにしたものである。転送先候補施設情報格納部２０２に格納される転送先候補施設情報は、具体的には、この転送先候補施設情報と組をなす病院識別子が識別する病院についての転送先候補施設情報である。その他の構成等については、上述した転送先候補施設情報格納部１０２と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 202 stores the set of the hospital identifier and transfer destination candidate facility information in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 described above. The transfer destination candidate facility information stored in the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 202 is specifically transfer destination candidate facility information for a hospital identified by a hospital identifier paired with the transfer destination candidate facility information. Other configurations and the like are the same as those of the transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit 102 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted here.
　受入要請受信部２０３は、構成および動作等が上述した受入要請受信部１０３と同様であるのでここでは説明を省略する。 Since the acceptance request receiving unit 203 has the same configuration and operation as the above-described acceptance request receiving unit 103, the description thereof is omitted here.
　ベッド判断部２０４は、上述したベッド判断部１０４において、受入要請受信部２０３が受入要請を受信した場合に、病院施設情報および患者情報を用いて、ベッドの空きがある病院の病院識別子を取得する。具体的には、同じ病院識別子と対応付けられた、患者情報と病院施設情報とをそれぞれ用いて、病院識別子別にベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断する。そして空きがある場合の病院識別子を取得する。また、ベッド判断部１０４は、同じ病院識別子と対応付けられた、病院施設情報および患者情報が有する患者の数と転送可否情報とを用いて、病院識別子別に、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断し、ベッドの空きがある場合の病院識別子を取得してもよい。さらには、ベッド判断部１０４は、同じ病院識別子と対応付けられた、病院施設情報および患者情報が有する患者の数と転送可否情報と転送先候補施設情報とを用いて、病院識別子別に、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断し、ベッドの空きがある場合の病院識別子を取得してもよい。なお、病院識別子別に処理を行うことを除けば、ベッドの空きの有無を判断する処理は，上記のベッド判断部１０４と同様であるので、ここでは、説明を省略する。 The bed determination unit 204 acquires a hospital identifier of a hospital having a bed available by using the hospital facility information and the patient information when the reception request reception unit 203 receives the reception request in the bed determination unit 104 described above. . Specifically, it is determined whether there is a bed available for each hospital identifier using patient information and hospital facility information associated with the same hospital identifier. And the hospital identifier when there is a vacancy is acquired. Further, the bed determination unit 104 uses the hospital facility information and the number of patients included in the patient information and the transferability information associated with the same hospital identifier to determine whether there is a bed available for each hospital identifier. It is possible to determine and acquire a hospital identifier when there is a bed available. Furthermore, the bed determination unit 104 uses the hospital facility information and the number of patients included in the patient information, transferability information, and transfer destination candidate facility information associated with the same hospital identifier, for each hospital identifier. It may be determined whether there is a vacancy, and a hospital identifier when there is a vacant bed may be acquired. Except for performing processing for each hospital identifier, the process for determining whether or not a bed is available is the same as that for the bed determination unit 104 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.
　医師等静的情報格納部２０５は、上述した医師等静的情報格納部１０５において、病院識別子と医師等静的情報との組が格納されるようにしたものである。ここで格納される医師等静的情報は、対応する病院識別子が示す病院の医師についての医師等静的情報である。その他の構成については、上述した医師等静的情報格納部１０５と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The static information storage unit 205 such as a doctor stores the set of a hospital identifier and static information such as a doctor in the static information storage unit 105 described above. The static information such as doctors stored here is static information such as doctors regarding the doctors of the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier. Since other configurations are the same as those of the static information storage unit 105 such as the doctor described above, description thereof is omitted here.
　医師等動的情報受付部２０６は、上述した医師等動的情報受付部１０６において、無線通信装置３等の無線通信装置が出力する情報を用いて、病院識別子と対応付けられた医師等動的情報を受け付けるようにしたものである。ここで受け付ける医師等動的情報は、対応する病院識別子が示す病院の医師についての医師等動的情報である。なお、病院識別子は、例えば、上述した患者情報受付部２０１と同様の処理により無線通信装置３等が出力する情報を用いて受付可能である。その他の構成については、上述した医師等動的情報受付部１０６と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The doctor etc. dynamic information receiving unit 206 uses the information output from the radio communication device such as the radio communication device 3 in the aforementioned doctor etc. dynamic information accepting unit 106 to use the doctor etc. dynamic information associated with the hospital identifier. It is designed to accept information. The dynamic information such as a doctor received here is dynamic information such as a doctor about the doctor of the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier. The hospital identifier can be received using information output from the wireless communication device 3 or the like by the same processing as the patient information receiving unit 201 described above. Since other configurations are the same as those of the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as the doctor described above, the description thereof is omitted here.
　スケジュール情報受付手段２０６１は、上述したスケジュール情報受付手段１０６１において、病院識別子と対応付けられたスケジュール情報を受け付けるようにしたものである。ここで受け付けるスケジュール情報は、対応する病院識別子が示す病院の医師についてのスケジュール情報である。その他の構成については、上述したスケジュール情報受付手段１０６１と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The schedule information receiving unit 2061 is configured to receive the schedule information associated with the hospital identifier in the schedule information receiving unit 1061 described above. The schedule information received here is schedule information for the doctor of the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier. Other configurations are the same as those of the schedule information accepting unit 1061 described above, and thus description thereof is omitted here.
　位置情報受付手段２０６２は、上述した位置情報受付手段１０６２において、病院識別子と対応付けられた位置情報を受け付けるようにしたものである。この位置情報は、例えば、上述した患者情報受付部２０１と同様の処理により無線通信装置３等が出力する情報を用いて受付可能である。この位置情報は、対応する病院識別子が示す病院における医師の位置情報である。その他の構成については、上述した位置情報受付手段１０６２と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The location information receiving unit 2062 is configured to receive the location information associated with the hospital identifier in the above-described location information receiving unit 1062. This position information can be received using, for example, information output by the wireless communication device 3 or the like by the same process as the patient information receiving unit 201 described above. This position information is the position information of the doctor in the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier. The other configuration is the same as that of the position information receiving unit 1062 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted here.
　表示制御情報格納部２０７は、上述した表示制御情報格納部１０７において、病院識別子と対応付けられた表示制御情報が格納されるようにしたものである。ここで格納される表示制御情報は、対応する病院識別子が示す病院における表示制御情報である。その他の構成については、上述した表示制御情報格納部１０７と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The display control information storage unit 207 is configured to store the display control information associated with the hospital identifier in the display control information storage unit 107 described above. The display control information stored here is display control information in the hospital indicated by the corresponding hospital identifier. Since other configurations are the same as those of the display control information storage unit 107 described above, description thereof is omitted here.
　表示部２０８は、上述した表示部１０８において、医師識別子の表示を病院識別子別に行えるようにするものである。表示対処となる医師識別子を、病院識別子別に取得することや、病院識別子別に表示制御情報を取得する点以外の、その他の構成については、上述した表示部２０８と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The display unit 208 allows the display unit 108 described above to display doctor identifiers by hospital identifier. Other configurations are the same as those of the display unit 208 described above, except that the doctor identifiers to be displayed are acquired for each hospital identifier and the display control information is acquired for each hospital identifier. Omitted.
　医療チーム判断部２０９は、上述した医療チーム判断部２０９において、受入要請受信部２０３が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得するようにしたものである。具体的には、医療チーム判断部２０９は、同じ病院識別子と対応付けられた、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報とをそれぞれ用いて、病院識別子別に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断し、医療チームが存在する病院識別子を取得する。 When the acceptance request receiving unit 203 receives the acceptance request in the above-described medical team judgment unit 209, the medical team judgment unit 209 can respond to an emergency using static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor. The hospital identifier of the hospital where the medical team exists is acquired. Specifically, the medical team determination unit 209 can perform emergency treatment for each hospital identifier using static information such as a doctor and dynamic information such as a doctor that are associated with the same hospital identifier. It is determined whether or not a team exists, and a hospital identifier in which a medical team exists is acquired.
　また、医療チーム判断部２０９は、上述した医療チーム判断部２０９において、医師等静的情報が有する医療行為識別子および受入要請が有する障害部位識別子とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得してもよい。具体的には、医療識別子別に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断し、医療チームが存在する病院識別子を取得しても良い。 In addition, the medical team determination unit 209 uses the medical action identifier included in the static information such as a doctor and the fault site identifier included in the acceptance request in the medical team determination unit 209 described above to be able to deal with an emergency case. And a hospital identifier of a hospital where a medical team capable of handling emergency cases is present. Specifically, for each medical identifier, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases and currently capable of handling emergency cases, and the hospital identifier where the medical team exists is determined. You may get it.
　また、医療チーム判断部２０９は、上述した医療チーム判断部２０９において、医師等静的情報および医師等動的履歴情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得するようにしても良い。具体的には、医療識別子別に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断し、医療チームが存在する病院識別子を取得しても良い。 In addition, the medical team determination unit 209 is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the static information such as a doctor and the dynamic history information such as a doctor in the medical team determination unit 209 described above, and currently has an emergency The hospital identifier of the hospital where the medical team that can handle this is present may be acquired. Specifically, for each medical identifier, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases and currently capable of handling emergency cases, and the hospital identifier where the medical team exists is determined. You may get it.
　また医療チーム判断部２０９は、上述した医療チーム判断部２０９において、医師等静的情報および医師等動的情報が有するスケジュール情報と位置情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得するようにしてもよい。具体的には、医療識別子別に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断し、医療チームが存在する病院識別子を取得しても良い。 In addition, the medical team determination unit 209 is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the schedule information and the position information included in the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor in the medical team determination unit 209 described above. You may make it acquire the hospital identifier of the hospital where there is a medical team that is available and can handle emergency cases. Specifically, for each medical identifier, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling emergency cases and currently capable of handling emergency cases, and the hospital identifier where the medical team exists is determined. You may get it.
　また、医療チーム判断部２０９は、上述した医療チーム判断部２０９において、医師等動的情報が有する各医師の状態識別子を用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得するようにしても良い。具体的には、医療識別子別に、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断し、医療チームが存在する病院識別子を取得しても良い。 In addition, the medical team determination unit 209 uses the state identifier of each doctor included in the dynamic information such as the doctor in the medical team determination unit 209 described above, and the hospital identifier of the hospital where the medical team capable of handling the emergency patient exists. You may make it acquire. Specifically, for each medical identifier, it may be determined whether there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency patient, and a hospital identifier in which the medical team exists may be acquired.
　なお、上記以外の構成等については、上述した医療チーム判断部２０９と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 Note that the configuration other than the above is the same as that of the medical team determination unit 209 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted here.
　対応可否送信部２１０は、上述した対応可否送信部２１０において、ベッド判断部２０４および医療チーム判断部２０９がともに取得した１以上の病院識別子を、外部の装置に送信するようにしたものである。ともに取得した１以上の病院識別子とは、それぞれが取得した病院識別子のうちの、共通して存在する病院識別子を意味する。なお、送信される病院識別子を、対応が可能である旨を示す情報と考えて良い。また、対応可否送信部２１０は、ベッド判断部２０４および医療チーム判断部２０９がともに取得した病院識別子がない場合、対応が不可である旨を示す情報を送信しても良い。なお、上記以外の構成等については、上述した対応可否送信部２１０と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 The response availability transmission unit 210 is configured to transmit one or more hospital identifiers acquired by the bed determination unit 204 and the medical team determination unit 209 to the external device in the response availability transmission unit 210 described above. The one or more hospital identifiers acquired together mean hospital identifiers that exist in common among the acquired hospital identifiers. Note that the hospital identifier to be transmitted may be considered as information indicating that correspondence is possible. In addition, the response transmission / reception unit 210 may transmit information indicating that the response is not possible when there is no hospital identifier acquired by both the bed determination unit 204 and the medical team determination unit 209. Since the configuration other than the above is the same as that of the above-described correspondence availability transmitter 210, description thereof is omitted here.
　救急医療支援装置２の動作については、図２に示した処理において、病院識別子を受け付けるようにして、この病院識別子と対応付けて医師等動的情報や患者情報等を蓄積したりするようにしたものである。また、図３に示した処理においては、同じ病院識別子と対応付けられた患者情報や、医師等静的情報や、医師等動的情報等だけを用いて、対応可能な医療チームがあるか否かを順次判断していき、対応可能な医療チームがあると判断された場合の病院識別子を、対応可否送信部２１０が、受入要請装置５に送信する用にしたものである。このため、救急医療支援装置２の動作については、ここでは詳細な説明を省略する。 Regarding the operation of the emergency medical support device 2, in the process shown in FIG. 2, a hospital identifier is accepted, and dynamic information such as a doctor, patient information, and the like are accumulated in association with the hospital identifier. Is. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 3, whether there is a medical team that can be handled using only patient information associated with the same hospital identifier, static information such as a doctor, dynamic information such as a doctor, and the like. The hospitality identifier 210 is used to transmit the hospital identifier when it is determined that there is a compatible medical team to the acceptance requesting device 5. For this reason, detailed description of the operation of the emergency medical assistance device 2 is omitted here.
　ここでは、救急医療支援装置２の受入可否決定処理の動作について図２５を用いて説明する。なお、図において、図３と同一符号は同一又は相当するステップを示している。ただし、ここでは、ステップＳ２０１からステップＳ２１９までの処理において用いられる医師等動的情報等の情報は、ステップＳ２５０１で取得されるカウンターｋの値に対応したｋ番目の病院識別子に対応付けられた情報がそれぞれ適宜用いられるものとする。 Here, the operation of acceptability determination processing of the emergency medical assistance device 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In the figure, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 3 denote the same or corresponding steps. However, here, information such as doctor dynamic information used in the processing from step S201 to step S219 is information associated with the kth hospital identifier corresponding to the value of the counter k acquired in step S2501. Are used as appropriate.
　（ステップＳ２５００）対応可否送信部２１０は、カウンターｋに１を代入する。 (Step S2500) The supportability transmission unit 210 substitutes 1 for the counter k.
　（ステップＳ２５０１）対応可否送信部２１０は、ｋ番目の病院識別子があるか否かを判断する。ある場合、ステップＳ２０１に進み、ない場合、ステップＳ２５０５に進む。なお、病院識別子数は、予め図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積しておくようにすればよい。 (Step S2501) The correspondence availability transmitter 210 determines whether there is a kth hospital identifier. If there is, the process proceeds to step S201, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2505. The number of hospital identifiers may be stored in advance in a storage medium (not shown).
　（ステップＳ２５０２）ベッド判断部２０４は、ｋ番目の病院識別子を取得し、図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。 (Step S2502) The bed determination unit 204 acquires the kth hospital identifier and stores it in a storage medium (not shown).
　（ステップＳ２５０３）医療チーム判断部２０９は、ｋ番目の病院識別子を取得し、図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に蓄積する。 (Step S2503) The medical team determination unit 209 acquires the kth hospital identifier and stores it in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
　（ステップＳ２５０４）対応可否送信部２１０は、カウンターｋの値を１インクリメントする。そして、ステップＳ２５０２に戻る。 (Step S2504) Correspondence propriety transmission section 210 increments the value of counter k by 1. Then, the process returns to step S2502.
　（ステップＳ２５０５）対応可否送信部２１０は、ステップＳ２５０２において取得した病院識別子と、ステップＳ２５０３において取得した病院識別子とに、一致する病院識別子があるか否かを判断する。ある場合、共通する病院識別子を取得して、ステップＳ２５０６に進み、取得していない場合、ステップＳ２５０７に進む。 (Step S2505) The availability transmitting unit 210 determines whether there is a hospital identifier that matches the hospital identifier acquired in step S2502 and the hospital identifier acquired in step S2503. If there is, a common hospital identifier is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S2506. If not, the process proceeds to step S2507.
　（ステップＳ２５０６）対応可否送信部２１０は、ステップＳ２５０５において取得した病院識別子を受入要請装置５に送信する。そして上位の処理にリターンする。 (Step S2506) The correspondence availability transmitting unit 210 transmits the hospital identifier acquired in Step S2505 to the acceptance requesting device 5. Then, the process returns to the upper process.
　（ステップＳ２５０７）対応可否送信部２１０は、対応不可を示す情報を受入要請装置５に送信する。そして上位の処理にリターンする。 (Step S2507) The response transmission / reception unit 210 transmits information indicating that the response is disabled to the acceptance requesting device 5. Then, the process returns to the upper process.
　以下、本実施の形態の具体例について説明する。 Hereinafter, a specific example of this embodiment will be described.
　図２６は、救急医療支援システム２０の概念図である。救急医療支援装置２は、ここでは一例として、一の救急センター等に配置されているものとする。救急医療支援装置２は、複数の病院の救急病棟の各部屋の壁等に設置されたアンテナ１２１～１２８、アンテナ１３１～１３８等とネットワーク等を介して接続されている。例えば、アンテナ１２１～１２８は病院αに、アンテナ１３１～１３８は病院βにそれぞれ設置されているとする。各アンテナにはＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタ（図示せず）が取り付けられ、各ＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタは、救急医療支援装置１の患者情報受付部１０１および医師等動的情報受付部１０６とネットワークを介して接続されているものとする。各ＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタには、装置識別子が割り当てられているとともに、同じ病院内のＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタには、各病院の病院識別子が格納されているものとする。 FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram of the emergency medical support system 20. Here, as an example, the emergency medical support device 2 is arranged in one emergency center or the like. The emergency medical support device 2 is connected to the antennas 121 to 128 and the antennas 131 to 138 installed on the walls of the rooms of the emergency wards of a plurality of hospitals via a network or the like. For example, it is assumed that the antennas 121 to 128 are installed in the hospital α and the antennas 131 to 138 are installed in the hospital β. An RFID tag reader / writer (not shown) is attached to each antenna, and each RFID tag reader / writer is connected to the patient information receiving unit 101 and the dynamic information receiving unit 106 such as a doctor of the emergency medical support apparatus 1 via a network. It shall be. A device identifier is assigned to each RFID tag reader / writer, and a hospital identifier of each hospital is stored in the RFID tag reader / writer in the same hospital.
　例えば、医師Ａ００１が、病院識別子が「Ｈ００１」である病院αの救急病棟内の処置室にいたとする。病院識別子はＩＰアドレスや、ＭＡＣアドレス等であっても良い。医師が胸につけた医師状態管理用カード３０の無線送信部３０３は、予め指定された一定の時間間隔で、医師識別子格納部３０１に格納されている医師識別子、ここでは、「Ａ００１」と、状態識別子受付部３０２が受け付けた状態識別子「ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」とを読み出し、読み出した医師識別子と状態識別子とを含む信号を送信する。 For example, it is assumed that the doctor A001 is in the treatment room in the emergency ward of the hospital α whose hospital identifier is “H001”. The hospital identifier may be an IP address, a MAC address, or the like. The wireless transmission unit 303 of the doctor state management card 30 attached to the chest by the doctor is a doctor identifier stored in the doctor identifier storage unit 301 at a predetermined time interval, in this case, “A001” The state identifier “available” received by the identifier receiving unit 302 is read, and a signal including the read doctor identifier and the state identifier is transmitted.
　病院αの救急病棟内の処置室に設置されたアンテナ、例えばアンテナ１２５は、医師Ａ００１の医師状態管理用カード３０が送信する医師識別子を状態識別子とを含む信号を受信する。そして、アンテナ１２５と接続されたＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタは、受信した信号から、医師識別子「Ａ００１」と状態識別子「ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」を取り出す。そして、取り出した情報に、自装置に割り当てられた装置識別子「ＲＦ１２５」と、病院αの病院識別子「Ｈ００１」を付与して、救急医療支援装置１に送信する。なお、病院識別子はＩＰアドレスや、ＭＡＣアドレス等であっても良い。 The antenna installed in the treatment room in the emergency ward of the hospital α, for example, the antenna 125 receives a signal including the doctor identifier transmitted by the doctor state management card 30 of the doctor A001 and the state identifier. Then, the RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna 125 extracts the doctor identifier “A001” and the state identifier “available” from the received signal. Then, the device identifier “RF125” assigned to the own device and the hospital identifier “H001” of the hospital α are assigned to the extracted information and transmitted to the emergency medical assistance device 1. The hospital identifier may be an IP address, a MAC address, or the like.
　医師等動的情報受付部２０６は、各病院のＲＦＩＤタグから送信された情報を受信する。ここでは、アンテナ１２５と接続されたＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタから送信された情報を受信する。そして受信した情報に含まれるＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタの装置識別子を用いて、上記実施の形態１と同様に、医師状態管理用カード３０が送信した情報を受信したアンテナの位置を示す情報である医師の位置情報として取得する。このとき利用する図７に示したような受信位置管理表としては、装置識別子とともに受信した病院識別子に対応づけられた受信位置管理表（図示せず）を用いる。ただし、各病院において、装置識別子と、ＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタが接続されたアンテナの位置との関係が、同じである場合は、共通した受信位置管理表を用いてもよい。また、医師等動的情報受付部２０６は、受信した情報に含まれる医師識別子や状態識別子や病院識別子も取得する。そして、取得した医師識別子や状態識別子や位置情報を、病院識別子と組にして図示しない格納部に蓄積する。 The dynamic information receiving unit 206 such as a doctor receives information transmitted from the RFID tag of each hospital. Here, information transmitted from an RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna 125 is received. Then, using the apparatus identifier of the RFID tag reader / writer included in the received information, the position of the doctor, which is information indicating the position of the antenna that has received the information transmitted by the doctor status management card 30, as in the first embodiment. Obtain as information. As the reception position management table as shown in FIG. 7 used at this time, a reception position management table (not shown) associated with the hospital identifier received together with the apparatus identifier is used. However, if the relationship between the device identifier and the position of the antenna to which the RFID tag reader / writer is connected is the same in each hospital, a common reception position management table may be used. The dynamic information receiving unit 206 such as a doctor also acquires a doctor identifier, a state identifier, and a hospital identifier included in the received information. The acquired doctor identifier, state identifier, and position information are stored in a storage unit (not shown) in combination with the hospital identifier.
　また、例えば、医師Ｃ００３が、病院識別子が「Ｈ００２」である病院ベータの救急病棟内の処置室にいたとすると、 Also, for example, if doctor C003 is in the treatment room in the emergency ward of hospital beta whose hospital identifier is “H002”,
　病院βの救急病棟内の処置室に設置されたアンテナは、医師Ｃ００３の医師状態管理用カード３０が送信する医師識別子と状態識別子とを含む信号を受信し、アンテナに接続されたＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタは、この医師識別子と状態識別子とを、ＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタの装置識別子と、病院βの病院識別子「Ｈ００２」を付与して、救急医療支援装置１に送信する。医師等動的情報受付部２０６はこのＲＦＩＤタグリーダライタから送信された情報を受信し、受信した情報のうちの装置識別子を用いて医師の位置情報を取得し、この位置情報と状態識別子と装置識別子とを組にして図示しない格納部に蓄積する。 The antenna installed in the treatment room in the emergency ward of the hospital β receives a signal including the doctor identifier and the state identifier transmitted from the doctor state management card 30 of the doctor C003, and the RFID tag reader / writer connected to the antenna is The doctor identifier and the state identifier are added to the RFID tag reader / writer device identifier and the hospital identifier “H002” of the hospital β, and transmitted to the emergency medical assistance device 1. The dynamic information receiving unit 206 such as a doctor receives the information transmitted from the RFID tag reader / writer, acquires the position information of the doctor using the apparatus identifier of the received information, and acquires the position information, the state identifier, and the apparatus identifier. Are stored in a storage unit (not shown).
　図２７は、このようにして蓄積される医師等動的情報の一例を示す図である。「病院識別子は、医師等動的情報と組をなす病院識別子である。この医師等動的情報は、病院識別子と対応づけられている点で、上記具体例において図９に示した医師等動的情報とは異なる。 FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of dynamic information such as a doctor accumulated in this way. “The hospital identifier is a hospital identifier paired with the dynamic information such as a doctor. This dynamic information such as the doctor is associated with the hospital identifier. It is different from specific information.
　なお、本具体例においては、異なる病院にいる医師の医師識別子は、重複してもよい。 In this specific example, doctor identifiers of doctors in different hospitals may be duplicated.
　患者情報についても同様にして、ＲＦＩＤタグリーダが、患者のいる病院の病院識別子と装置識別子とを付与した患者識別子等の情報を、救急医療支援装置１に送信することで、病院識別子と患者情報との組等を蓄積することが可能である。 Similarly for patient information, the RFID tag reader transmits information such as a patient identifier to which the hospital identifier and the device identifier of the hospital where the patient is located to the emergency medical support device 1 so that the hospital identifier and the patient information Can be stored.
　図２８は、このようにして蓄積された患者情報の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of patient information accumulated in this way.
　また、スケジュール情報や、転送可否情報等についても、これらの情報の対象となる医師や患者がいる病院の病院識別子が付与されて蓄積される。 In addition, schedule information, transfer permission / inhibition information, and the like are also given and stored with a hospital identifier of a hospital where doctors and patients are targets of such information.
　ここで、救急医療支援装置２の受入要請受信部２０３が、受入要請装置５からの受入要請を受け付けたとする。 Here, it is assumed that the acceptance request receiving unit 203 of the emergency medical assistance device 2 accepts the acceptance request from the acceptance request device 5.
　救急医療支援装置２は、まず、一つめの病院である病院αの病院識別子である「Ｈ００１」と対応づけられた情報を用いて、病院αが急患の対応が可能であるか否かを判断する。なお、病院識別子を選ぶ順番等は問わない。 First of all, the emergency medical support device 2 determines whether or not the hospital α can cope with an emergency using the information associated with the hospital identifier “H001” of the hospital α which is the first hospital. To do. In addition, the order etc. which select a hospital identifier are not ask | required.
　図２９は、病院施設情報格納部２００に格納されている、病院識別子と対応づけられた病院施設情報の一例を示す図である。病院施設情報は、「部屋名」と「ベッド数」と「病院識別子」という項目を有している。「病院識別子」は病院識別子である。 FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of hospital facility information associated with a hospital identifier stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 200. The hospital facility information has items of “room name”, “number of beds”, and “hospital identifier”. “Hospital identifier” is a hospital identifier.
　ベッド判断部２０４は、病院施設情報格納部２００に格納されている病院施設情報のうちの、対応する「病院識別子」の値が「Ｈ００１」であるレコードが示す急患を受け入れる部屋全てのベッド数の合計を算出し、病院識別子「Ｈ００１」と対応づけられた患者情報が示す急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者数とを比較する。ここでは、患者数がベッド数よりも少ないと判断されたとする。ベッド判断部２０４は、ベッドに空きがあると判断して病院識別子「Ｈ００１」を図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に蓄積する。 The bed determination unit 204 includes the number of beds of all the rooms that receive the emergency indicated by the record having the corresponding “hospital identifier” value “H001” in the hospital facility information stored in the hospital facility information storage unit 200. The total is calculated and compared with the number of patients in the room that receives the emergency case indicated by the patient information associated with the hospital identifier “H001”. Here, it is assumed that the number of patients is determined to be smaller than the number of beds. The bed determination unit 204 determines that there is an empty bed and accumulates the hospital identifier “H001” in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown).
　次に、医療チーム判断部２０９は、図２７に示したような図示しない記憶媒体等の格納部に格納されている病院識別子「Ｈ００１」と対応づけられた医師等動的情報のうちの一のレコードを読み出す。ここでは、まず、病院識別子が「Ｈ００１」で「医師ＩＤ」が「Ａ００１」であるレコードを読み出す。 Next, the medical team determination unit 209 selects one of the dynamic information such as a doctor associated with the hospital identifier “H001” stored in a storage unit such as a storage medium (not shown) as illustrated in FIG. Read the record. Here, first, a record in which the hospital identifier is “H001” and the “doctor ID” is “A001” is read.
　次に、このレコードの「状態識別子」の値が対応可であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、「状態識別子」の値が「ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」であるか否かを判断する。ここでは「ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ」であるため、対応可であると判断する。 Next, it is determined whether or not the “state identifier” value of this record is compatible. Here, it is determined whether or not the value of “state identifier” is “available”. Here, since it is “available”, it is determined that it can be handled.
　対応可であると判断したため、医療チーム判断部２０９は、この「医師ＩＤ」が「Ａ００１」である医師の予定が、対応可の予定であるか否かを、スケジュール情報受付手段２０６１が受け付けた各病院の病院識別子と対応づけられたスケジュール情報のうちの、病院識別子「Ｈ００１」と医師識別子「Ａ００１」とに対応づけられたスケジュールを用いて判断を行う。なお、スケジュールを用いた対応可の予定であるか否かの判断は、上記具体例と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 Since it is determined that the response is possible, the medical team determination unit 209 has received whether the schedule of the doctor whose “doctor ID” is “A001” is a schedule that can be supported or not by the schedule information reception unit 2061. Of the schedule information associated with the hospital identifier of each hospital, a determination is made using the schedule associated with the hospital identifier “H001” and the doctor identifier “A001”. Note that the determination as to whether or not the schedule is available is the same as in the above specific example, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.
　ここでは、スケジュール上の現在の予定が対応可能であると判断されたため、医療チーム判断部２０９は、各病院の病院識別子と対応づけられて格納された医師等動的履歴情報のうちのスケジュール情報のうちの病院識別子「Ｈ００１」と医師識別子「Ａ００１」とに対応づけられた医師等動的履歴情報を用いて、医師が対応可能な状態であるか否かの判断を行う。なお、医師等動的履歴情報を用いた対応可の予定であるか否かの判断は、上記具体例と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。 Here, since it is determined that the current schedule on the schedule is available, the medical team determination unit 209 determines the schedule information in the dynamic history information such as doctors stored in association with the hospital identifier of each hospital. Using the dynamic history information such as the doctor associated with the hospital identifier “H001” and the doctor identifier “A001”, it is determined whether or not the doctor is in a compatible state. Note that the determination as to whether or not it is possible to respond using the dynamic history information such as a doctor is the same as in the above specific example, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.
　ここでは、医療チーム判断部２０９は、医師等動的履歴情報が、医師Ａ００１が急患に対応可能な状態であると示していると判断したとすると、医療チーム判断部２０９は、この医師識別子「Ａ００１」を、急患に対応可能な医師を示す情報として、病院識別子「Ｈ００１」と対応づけて図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。 Here, if the medical team determination unit 209 determines that the dynamic history information such as a doctor indicates that the doctor A001 is in a state capable of handling an emergency patient, the medical team determination unit 209 determines that the doctor identifier “ "A001" is stored in a storage medium or the like (not shown) in association with the hospital identifier "H001" as information indicating a doctor capable of handling an emergency.
　そして、病院識別子「Ｈ００１」と対応づけられた医師等動的情報の「医師ＩＤ」が異なる他のレコードについても同様の判断処理を行う。 Then, the same determination process is performed for other records having different “doctor ID” of the dynamic information such as the doctor associated with the hospital identifier “H001”.
　次に、医療チーム判断部２０９は、受付要請に含まれる障害部位識別子と、病院識別子「Ｈ００１」と対応づけられた医師等静的情報に含まれる医療行為の情報とを用いて、病院識別子が「Ｈ００１」である病院に、急患の障害部位に対して医療行為が可能な医療チームがあるか否かを判断する。障害部位識別子と医療行為の情報とを用いて対応可能な医療チームの有無を判断する処理は、上記具体例と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。対応可能な医療チームがあると判断された場合、医療チーム判断部２０９は、病院識別子「Ｈ００１」を取得し、図示しない記憶媒体等に蓄積する。 Next, the medical team determination unit 209 uses the failure part identifier included in the reception request and the medical action information included in the static information such as a doctor associated with the hospital identifier “H001” to determine the hospital identifier. It is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of performing a medical action on the emergency site in the hospital that is “H001”. The process of determining the presence or absence of a medical team that can be handled using the faulty part identifier and the medical practice information is the same as in the above specific example, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. When it is determined that there is a medical team that can be handled, the medical team determination unit 209 acquires the hospital identifier “H001” and stores it in a storage medium (not shown).
　以上の処理と同様の処理を、他の病院識別子を用いて繰り返し行う。 Repeat the same process as above using other hospital identifiers.
　図３０は、すべての病院識別子を用いて上記処理を行った結果、ベッド判断部２０４が取得した病院識別子である。 FIG. 30 shows hospital identifiers acquired by the bed determination unit 204 as a result of performing the above processing using all hospital identifiers.
　また、図３１は、すべての病院識別子を用いて上記処理を行った結果、医療チーム判断部２０９が取得した病院識別子である。 FIG. 31 shows hospital identifiers acquired by the medical team determination unit 209 as a result of performing the above processing using all hospital identifiers.
　次に、対応可否送信部２１０は、図３０に示したベッド判断部２０４が取得した病院識別子と、図３１に示した医療チーム判断部２０９が取得した病院識別子とのそれぞれを比較して、一致する病院識別子を検出する。ここでは、一致する病院識別子として「Ｈ００１」と「Ｈ００４」が検出されたとする。対応可否送信部２１０は、一致する病院識別子を受入要請装置５に送信する。 Next, the availability transmission unit 210 compares the hospital identifier acquired by the bed determination unit 204 shown in FIG. 30 with the hospital identifier acquired by the medical team determination unit 209 shown in FIG. The hospital identifier to be detected is detected. Here, it is assumed that “H001” and “H004” are detected as matching hospital identifiers. The response propriety transmitting unit 210 transmits the matching hospital identifier to the acceptance requesting device 5.
　受入要請装置５は、病院識別子「Ｈ００１」および「Ｈ００４」を受信し、対応可否出力部５０４が図示しないモニタ等に、この病院識別子を表示する。 The acceptance request device 5 receives the hospital identifiers “H001” and “H004”, and the response output unit 504 displays the hospital identifier on a monitor (not shown).
　図３２は、受入要請装置５による病院識別子の表示例を示す。なお、病院識別子が病院名以外の識別子である場合、予め格納部等に用意された病院識別子と病院名との対応関係を示す情報を用いて、病院識別子を病院名に変換して表示するようにしてもよい。 FIG. 32 shows a display example of the hospital identifier by the acceptance requesting device 5. When the hospital identifier is an identifier other than the hospital name, the hospital identifier is converted into the hospital name and displayed using information indicating the correspondence between the hospital identifier and the hospital name prepared in advance in the storage unit or the like. It may be.
　以上のように、本実施の形態によれば、病院識別子と対応づけた患者情報や、医師等動的情報や、医師等静的情報を用いることで、複数の病院の中から急患に対応可能な病院を選び出すことが可能となる。 As described above, according to this embodiment, patient information associated with a hospital identifier, dynamic information such as a doctor, and static information such as a doctor can be used to handle an emergency from a plurality of hospitals. It is possible to select a suitable hospital.
　なお、上記各実施の形態において、図３３に示すように、無線通信装置３（あるいは、医師状態管理用カード３０）は、自装置の位置、言い換えれば装着している医師の位置の情報を取得するための位置情報取得部３０４を備えていても良い。この場合、無線送信部３０３は、医師識別子と状態識別子とともに、この位置の情報を含む情報を、救急医療支援装置１に送信するようにすれば良い。この位置の情報は、上述した医師の位置情報と考えてよい。なお位置情報取得部３０４は、例えばＧＰＳ等で実現可能である。このＧＰＳは、例えば、室内において微弱なＧＰＳ衛星電波等を取得するためのアンテナや集積回路等を備えたものであることが好ましい。あるいは、病院内に配置された複数のアンテナから送信されるアンテナの識別子等を含む情報を、無線通信装置３で受信するようにし、この受信した信号の受信強度とアンテナの位置の情報等から三点測位により無線通信装置３の位置を算出しても良い。この場合、例えば、受信のためのアンテナ等が必要である。このような位置検出処理は、携帯電話の位置検出処理等として公知の技術である。あるいは、無線通信装置３が、病院の各エリアにおいてアンテナ等から送信される、位置を示す情報を受信して、この情報をそのまま位置情報として用いても良い。このようにすることで、救急医療支援装置１において、位置情報を取得する処理等を行わないようにして、処理の軽減を図ることができる。 In each of the above embodiments, as shown in FIG. 33, the wireless communication device 3 (or the doctor status management card 30) acquires information on the position of the own device, in other words, the position of the attached doctor. A position information acquisition unit 304 may be provided. In this case, the wireless transmission unit 303 may transmit information including information on the position together with the doctor identifier and the state identifier to the emergency medical assistance device 1. This position information may be considered as the position information of the doctor described above. Note that the position information acquisition unit 304 can be realized by GPS or the like, for example. This GPS is preferably provided with, for example, an antenna or an integrated circuit for acquiring weak GPS satellite radio waves or the like indoors. Alternatively, information including antenna identifiers transmitted from a plurality of antennas arranged in the hospital is received by the wireless communication device 3, and the received signal strength and antenna position information are received from the received signal. The position of the wireless communication device 3 may be calculated by point positioning. In this case, for example, an antenna for reception is required. Such a position detection process is a known technique as a position detection process of a mobile phone. Alternatively, the wireless communication device 3 may receive information indicating a position transmitted from an antenna or the like in each area of the hospital, and use this information as position information as it is. By doing in this way, in the emergency medical assistance apparatus 1, processing can be reduced without performing the process etc. which acquire position information.
　また同様に、図３４に示すように、患者用無線通信装置４においても、位置情報取得部３０４と同様の、自装置の位置、言い換えれば装着している患者の位置の情報を取得するための患者位置情報取得部４０３を備えていても良い。この場合、患者用無線通信装置４は、患者識別子とともに、この位置の情報を含む情報を救急医療支援装置１に送信するようにすれば良い。この位置の情報は、上述した患者位置情報と考えてよい。このようにすることで、救急医療支援装置１において、患者位置情報を取得する処理等を行わないようにして、処理の軽減を図ることができる。 Similarly, as shown in FIG. 34, the patient wireless communication device 4 also obtains information on the position of the own device, in other words, the position of the attached patient, similar to the position information acquisition unit 304. A patient position information acquisition unit 403 may be provided. In this case, the patient wireless communication device 4 may transmit information including this position information to the emergency medical support device 1 together with the patient identifier. This position information may be considered as the patient position information described above. By doing in this way, in the emergency medical assistance apparatus 1, processing can be reduced without performing the process etc. which acquire patient positional information.
　なお、上記各実施の形態において、各処理（各機能）は、単一の装置（システム）によって集中処理されることによって実現されてもよく、あるいは、複数の装置によって分散処理されることによって実現されてもよい。 In each of the above embodiments, each process (each function) may be realized by centralized processing by a single device (system), or by distributed processing by a plurality of devices. May be.
　また、上記各実施の形態において、一の装置に存在する２以上の通信手段（情報送信部など）は、物理的に一の媒体で実現されても良いことは言うまでもない。 Further, in each of the above embodiments, it goes without saying that two or more communication means (such as an information transmission unit) existing in one apparatus may be physically realized by one medium.
　また、上記実施の形態において、各構成要素が実行する処理に関係する情報、例えば、各構成要素が受け付けたり、取得したり、選択したり、生成したり、送信したり、受信したりする情報や、各構成要素が処理で用いるしきい値や数式、アドレス等の情報等は、上記説明で明記していない場合であっても、図示しない記録媒体において、一時的に、あるいは長期にわたって保持されていてもよい。また、その図示しない記録媒体への情報の蓄積を、各構成要素、あるいは、図示しない蓄積部が行ってもよい。また、その図示しない記録媒体からの情報の読み出しを、各構成要素、あるいは、図示しない読み出し部が行ってもよい。 In the above embodiment, information related to processing executed by each component, for example, information received, acquired, selected, generated, transmitted, and received by each component. In addition, information such as threshold values, mathematical formulas, addresses, etc. used by each component in processing is retained temporarily or over a long period of time on a recording medium (not shown) even when not explicitly stated in the above description. It may be. Further, the storage of information in the recording medium (not shown) may be performed by each component or a storage unit (not shown). Further, reading of information from the recording medium (not shown) may be performed by each component or a reading unit (not shown).
　また、上記各実施の形態では、救急医療支援装置がスタンドアロンである場合について説明したが、救急医療支援装置は、スタンドアロンの装置であってもよく、サーバ・クライアントシステムにおけるサーバ装置であってもよい。後者の場合には、出力部や受付部は、通信回線を介して入力を受け付けたり、画面を出力したりすることになる。 In each of the above embodiments, the case where the emergency medical support device is stand-alone has been described. However, the emergency medical support device may be a stand-alone device or a server device in a server / client system. . In the latter case, the output unit or the reception unit receives an input or outputs a screen via a communication line.
　また、上記各実施の形態において、各構成要素は専用のハードウェアにより構成されてもよく、あるいは、ソフトウェアにより実現可能な構成要素については、プログラムを実行することによって実現されてもよい。例えば、ハードディスクや半導体メモリ等の記録媒体に記録されたソフトウェア・プログラムをＣＰＵ等のプログラム実行部が読み出して実行することによって、各構成要素が実現され得る。 In each of the above embodiments, each component may be configured by dedicated hardware, or a component that can be realized by software may be realized by executing a program. For example, each component can be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory.
　なお、上記各実施の形態における救急医療支援装置を実現するソフトウェアは、以下のようなプログラムである。つまり、このプログラムは、コンピュータを、急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の数を含む患者情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する患者情報受付部と、前記急患を受け入れる部屋を含む、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域に居る１以上の各医師に装着された無線通信装置から、１以上の医師識別子を含む医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する医師等動的情報受付部と、急患の受け入れの要請を示す情報である受入要請を、外部の装置から受信する受入要請受信部と、病院施設情報格納部に格納された病院の施設に関する情報であり、急患を受け入れる部屋の病床数を少なくとも有する病院施設情報および前記患者情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断するベッド判断部と、前記受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等静的情報格納部に格納された医師を識別する１以上の医師識別子を有する医師識別子群を有する医師等静的情報および前記医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断する医療チーム判断部と、前記ベッド判断部がベッドの空きがあると判断し、かつ、前記医療チーム判断部が急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断した場合、対応可能である旨の情報を前記外部の装置に送信する対応可否送信部として機能させるためのプログラムである。 In addition, the software which implement | achieves the emergency medical assistance apparatus in each said embodiment is the following programs. In other words, this program accepts patient information including the number of patients in a room that accepts an emergency, and at least temporarily stores a patient information reception unit that stores the emergency information and a room that receives the emergency. A dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor for receiving dynamic information such as a doctor including one or more doctor identifiers from a wireless communication device attached to each of one or more doctors in the area where the act is performed; Number of beds in the room that accepts emergency cases, which is information about hospital facilities stored in the reception request reception unit and the hospital facility information storage unit that receives an acceptance request that is information indicating a request for acceptance of an emergency case from an external device. A bed determination unit for determining whether there is a bed available using the hospital facility information and the patient information at least, and the reception request reception unit When receiving a request, using static information such as a doctor having a group of doctor identifiers having one or more doctor identifiers identifying a doctor stored in a static information storage unit such as a doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor, A medical team determination unit that determines whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency, the bed determination unit determines that a bed is available, and the medical team determination unit When it is determined that there is a medical team that can be used, this is a program for functioning as a supportability transmission unit that transmits information indicating that support is possible to the external device.
　なお、上記プログラムにおいて、情報を送信する送信ステップや、情報を受信する受信ステップなどでは、ハードウェアによって行われる処理、例えば、送信ステップにおけるモデムやインターフェースカードなどで行われる処理（ハードウェアでしか行われない処理）は含まれない。 In the above program, in a transmission step for transmitting information, a reception step for receiving information, etc., processing performed by hardware, for example, processing performed by a modem or an interface card in the transmission step (only performed by hardware). Not included) is not included.
　なお、上記プログラムにおいて、上記プログラムが実現する機能には、ハードウェアでしか実現できない機能は含まれない。例えば、情報を取得する取得部や、情報を出力する出力部などにおけるモデムやインターフェースカードなどのハードウェアでしか実現できない機能は、上記プログラムが実現する機能には含まれない。 In the above program, the functions realized by the program do not include functions that can only be realized by hardware. For example, a function that can be realized only by hardware such as a modem or an interface card in an acquisition unit that acquires information or an output unit that outputs information is not included in the function realized by the program.
　また、このプログラムを実行するコンピュータは、単数であってもよく、複数であってもよい。すなわち、集中処理を行ってもよく、あるいは分散処理を行ってもよい。 Further, the computer that executes this program may be singular or plural. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
　図３５は、上記プログラムを実行して、上記実施の形態による救急医療支援装置を実現するコンピュータの外観の一例を示す模式図である。上記実施の形態は、コンピュータハードウェア及びその上で実行されるコンピュータプログラムによって実現されうる。 FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the external appearance of a computer that executes the program and realizes the emergency medical assistance device according to the embodiment. The above-described embodiment can be realized by computer hardware and a computer program executed on the computer hardware.
　図３５において、コンピュータシステム９００は、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭ（Ｃｏｍｐａｃｔ　Ｄｉｓｋ　Ｒｅａｄ　Ｏｎｌｙ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）ドライブ９０５、ＦＤ（Ｆｌｏｐｐｙ（登録商標）　Ｄｉｓｋ）ドライブ９０６を含むコンピュータ９０１と、キーボード９０２と、マウス９０３と、モニタ９０４とを備える。 35, a computer system 900 includes a computer 901 including a CD-ROM (Compact Read Only Memory) drive 905 and an FD (Floppy (registered trademark) Disk) drive 906, a keyboard 902, a mouse 903, a monitor 904, and the like. Is provided.
　図３６は、コンピュータシステム９００の内部構成を示す図である。図３６において、コンピュータ９０１は、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭドライブ９０５、ＦＤドライブ９０６に加えて、ＭＰＵ（Ｍｉｃｒｏ　Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ　Ｕｎｉｔ）９１１と、ブートアッププログラム等のプログラムを記憶するためのＲＯＭ９１２と、ＭＰＵ９１１に接続され、アプリケーションプログラムの命令を一時的に記憶すると共に、一時記憶空間を提供するＲＡＭ（Ｒａｎｄｏｍ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）９１３と、アプリケーションプログラム、システムプログラム、及びデータを記憶するハードディスク９１４と、ＭＰＵ９１１、ＲＯＭ９１２等を相互に接続するバス９１５とを備える。なお、コンピュータ９０１は、ＬＡＮへの接続を提供する図示しないネットワークカードを含んでいてもよい。 FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an internal configuration of the computer system 900. As shown in FIG. 36, in addition to the CD-ROM drive 905 and the FD drive 906, a computer 901 is connected to an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 911, a ROM 912 for storing a program such as a bootup program, and the MPU 911. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 913 that temporarily stores program instructions and a temporary storage space, a hard disk 914 that stores application programs, system programs, and data, and an MPU 911 and a ROM 912 are interconnected. And a bus 915. The computer 901 may include a network card (not shown) that provides connection to the LAN.
　コンピュータシステム９００に、上記実施の形態による救急医療支援装置等の機能を実行させるプログラムは、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭ９２１、またはＦＤ９２２に記憶されて、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭドライブ９０５、またはＦＤドライブ９０６に挿入され、ハードディスク９１４に転送されてもよい。これに代えて、そのプログラムは、図示しないネットワークを介してコンピュータ９０１に送信され、ハードディスク９１４に記憶されてもよい。プログラムは実行の際にＲＡＭ９１３にロードされる。なお、プログラムは、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭ９２１やＦＤ９２２、またはネットワークから直接、ロードされてもよい。 A program for causing the computer system 900 to execute the functions of the emergency medical support device and the like according to the above-described embodiment is stored in the CD-ROM 921 or the FD 922, inserted into the CD-ROM drive 905 or the FD drive 906, and the hard disk 914. May be forwarded to. Instead, the program may be transmitted to the computer 901 via a network (not shown) and stored in the hard disk 914. The program is loaded into the RAM 913 when executed. The program may be loaded directly from the CD-ROM 921, the FD 922, or the network.
　プログラムは、コンピュータ９０１に、上記実施の形態による救急医療支援装置の機能を実行させるオペレーティングシステム（ＯＳ）、またはサードパーティプログラム等を必ずしも含んでいなくてもよい。プログラムは、制御された態様で適切な機能（モジュール）を呼び出し、所望の結果が得られるようにする命令の部分のみを含んでいてもよい。コンピュータシステム９００がどのように動作するのかについては周知であり、詳細な説明は省略する。 The program does not necessarily include an operating system (OS) or a third-party program that causes the computer 901 to execute the functions of the emergency medical assistance device according to the above-described embodiment. The program may include only a part of an instruction that calls an appropriate function (module) in a controlled manner and obtains a desired result. How the computer system 900 operates is well known and will not be described in detail.
　本発明は、以上の実施の形態に限定されることなく、種々の変更が可能であり、それらも本発明の範囲内に包含されるものであることは言うまでもない。 The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications are possible, and it goes without saying that these are also included in the scope of the present invention.
　以上のように、本発明にかかる救急医療支援装置等は、救急医療を支援するための装置等として適しており、特に、急患の搬送先の決定を支援する装置等として有用である。 As described above, the emergency medical support device and the like according to the present invention are suitable as a device for supporting emergency medical care, and are particularly useful as a device and the like for assisting determination of a delivery destination of an emergency patient.

Claims (15)

  1. 病院の施設に関する情報であり、急患を受け入れる部屋の病床数を少なくとも有する病院施設情報を格納し得る病院施設情報格納部と、
    急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の数を含む患者情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する患者情報受付部と、
    医師を識別する１以上の医師識別子を有する医師識別子群を有する医師等静的情報を格納し得る医師等静的情報格納部と、
    前記急患を受け入れる部屋を含む、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域に居る１以上の各医師に装着された無線通信装置から、１以上の医師識別子を含む医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する医師等動的情報受付部と、
    急患の受け入れの要請を示す情報である受入要請を、外部の装置から受信する受入要請受信部と、
    前記病院施設情報および前記患者情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断するベッド判断部と、
    前記受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、前記医師等静的情報および前記医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断する医療チーム判断部と、
    前記ベッド判断部がベッドの空きがあると判断し、かつ、前記医療チーム判断部が急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断した場合、対応可能である旨の情報を前記外部の装置に送信する対応可否送信部とを備えた救急医療支援装置。     A hospital facility information storage unit that can store hospital facility information that is at least the number of beds in a room that accepts emergency cases, and is information related to hospital facilities;
    A patient information reception unit that receives patient information including the number of patients in a room that accepts an emergency case, and accumulates at least temporarily; and
    A static information storage unit such as a doctor capable of storing static information such as a doctor having a group of doctor identifiers having one or more doctor identifiers for identifying a doctor;
    Receiving dynamic information such as a doctor including one or more doctor identifiers from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors in an area where medical treatment is performed for the emergency patient, including a room for receiving the emergency patient, and at least temporarily A dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor that accumulates automatically,
    An acceptance request receiving unit for receiving an acceptance request, which is information indicating a request for accepting an emergency patient, from an external device;
    Using the hospital facility information and the patient information, a bed determination unit that determines whether there is a bed available;
    When the acceptance request receiving unit receives an acceptance request, the medical information that determines whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor The team decision department,
    When the bed determination unit determines that there is a vacant bed and the medical team determination unit determines that there is a medical team capable of handling a sudden illness, information indicating that the external device is available An emergency medical support device comprising: a response propriety transmitting unit that transmits to the device.
  2. 前記患者情報受付部は、
    １以上の患者に装着された１以上の各無線通信装置から、少なくとも患者であることを示す情報を受信し、当該患者であることを示す情報を用いて、患者の数を含む患者情報を取得する請求項１記載の救急医療支援装置。     The patient information receiving unit
    From at least one wireless communication device attached to one or more patients, at least information indicating that the patient is received, and using the information indicating that the patient is included, patient information including the number of patients is acquired. The emergency medical assistance device according to claim 1.
  3. 前記病院施設情報格納部は、
    病院を識別する病院識別子と病院施設情報との組を１組以上格納しており、
    前記患者情報受付部は、
    病院識別子と患者情報との組を１組以上受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積し、
    前記医師等静的情報格納部は、
    病院識別子と医師等静的情報との組を１組以上格納しており、
    前記ベッド判断部は、
    前記受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、前記病院施設情報および前記患者情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがある病院の病院識別子を取得し、
    前記医療チーム判断部は、
    前記受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、前記医師等静的情報および前記医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得し、
    前記対応可否送信部は、
    前記ベッド判断部および前記医療チーム判断部がともに取得した１以上の病院識別子を前記外部の装置に送信する請求項１記載の救急医療支援装置。     The hospital facility information storage unit
    One or more sets of hospital identifiers and hospital facility information that identify hospitals are stored.
    The patient information receiving unit
    Accept one or more pairs of hospital identifiers and patient information, accumulate at least temporarily,
    The static information storage unit such as the doctor,
    One or more pairs of hospital identifiers and static information such as doctors are stored.
    The bed determination unit
    When the acceptance request receiving unit receives the acceptance request, the hospital facility information and the patient information are used to obtain a hospital identifier of a hospital having a bed available,
    The medical team judgment unit
    When the acceptance request receiving unit receives the acceptance request, it uses the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor to obtain a hospital identifier of a hospital where a medical team capable of handling an emergency is present. ,
    The correspondence availability transmitting unit
    The emergency medical assistance device according to claim 1, wherein one or more hospital identifiers acquired by both the bed determination unit and the medical team determination unit are transmitted to the external device.
  4. 前記受入要請は、
    急患の障害の部位を識別する障害部位識別子を含み、
    前記医師等静的情報は、
    医師を識別する１以上の医師識別子を有する医師識別子群と、当該医師識別子群で識別される１以上の医師を含む医療チームが行える医療行為を識別する１以上の医療行為識別子とを有し、
    前記医療チーム判断部は、
    前記受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、前記医師等静的情報が有する医療行為識別子および前記受入要請が有する障害部位識別子とを用いて、当該急患の対応が可能である医療チームの中で、前記医師等動的情報を用いて、現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する、または当該急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得する請求項１記載の救急医療支援装置。     The acceptance request is
    Including a site identifier that identifies the site of the emergency disorder,
    The static information such as the doctor is
    A doctor identifier group having one or more doctor identifiers for identifying a doctor, and one or more medical action identifiers for identifying a medical action that can be performed by a medical team including one or more doctors identified by the doctor identifier group;
    The medical team judgment unit
    When the acceptance request receiving unit receives the acceptance request, the medical team that can deal with the emergency case using the medical practice identifier included in the static information such as the doctor and the disordered site identifier included in the acceptance request. Thus, using the dynamic information such as the doctor, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling the emergency at present, or the medical team capable of handling the emergency is currently The emergency medical assistance device according to claim 1, wherein a hospital identifier of a hospital where a medical team capable of handling is present is acquired.
  5. 前記医師等動的情報は、
    医師識別子と、医師が居る位置を示す位置情報との組を１組以上有し、
    前記医師等動的情報受付部は、
    医師等動的情報と、時刻を示す時刻情報とを対応付けた複数の情報である医師等動的履歴情報を、少なくとも一時的に蓄積し、
    前記医療チーム判断部は、
    前記医師等静的情報および前記医師等動的履歴情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する、または当該急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得する請求項１記載の救急医療支援装置。     The dynamic information such as the doctor is
    Having one or more pairs of doctor identifiers and position information indicating positions where doctors are located,
    The dynamic information receiving unit such as the doctor,
    Dynamic history information such as doctors, which is a plurality of information in which dynamic information such as doctors and time information indicating the time are associated, is stored at least temporarily,
    The medical team judgment unit
    Using the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic history information such as the doctor, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency or is a medical team capable of handling the emergency The emergency medical support device according to claim 1, wherein a hospital identifier of a hospital where a medical team capable of handling an emergency is present is acquired.
  6. 前記医師等動的情報受付部は、
    入力手段を用いて入力された医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する請求項１記載の救急医療支援装置。     The dynamic information receiving unit such as the doctor,
    The emergency medical support device according to claim 1, wherein dynamic information such as a doctor input using an input unit is received and stored at least temporarily.
  7. 前記医師等動的情報受付部は、
    医師識別子と当該医師識別子で識別される医師のスケジュールに関するスケジュール情報とを受け付けるスケジュール情報受付手段と、
    医師識別子と当該医師識別子で識別される医師の位置情報とを受け付ける位置情報受付手段とを備え、
    前記医療チーム判断部は、
    前記医師等静的情報および前記医師等動的情報が有するスケジュール情報と位置情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する、または当該急患の対応が可能である医療チームでありかつ現在、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得する請求項１記載の救急医療支援装置。     The dynamic information receiving unit such as the doctor,
    Schedule information accepting means for accepting a doctor identifier and schedule information related to a doctor's schedule identified by the doctor identifier;
    A position information receiving means for receiving a doctor identifier and position information of the doctor identified by the doctor identifier;
    The medical team judgment unit
    It is possible to determine whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the schedule information and position information of the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor, or it is possible to handle the emergency The emergency medical support device according to claim 1, wherein a hospital identifier of a hospital where a medical team that is a medical team that is currently capable of handling an emergency is present.
  8. 前記医師等動的情報受付部は、
    １以上の医師に装着された無線通信装置から、医師識別子、および対応可または対応不可の少なくとも２種類以上の状態を識別する状態識別子とを有する１以上の情報である医師等動的情報を受信し、
    前記医療チーム判断部は、
    前記受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、前記医師等動的情報が有する各医師の状態識別子を用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否か判断する、または急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在する病院の病院識別子を取得する請求項１記載の救急医療支援装置。     The dynamic information receiving unit such as the doctor,
    Dynamic information such as a doctor is received from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors, which is one or more pieces of information having a doctor identifier and status identifiers that identify at least two types of states that can or cannot be handled. And
    The medical team judgment unit
    When the acceptance request receiving unit receives the acceptance request, it is determined whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the state identifiers of each doctor included in the dynamic information such as the doctor, or the emergency The emergency medical assistance device according to claim 1, wherein a hospital identifier of a hospital where a medical team capable of handling the above is present is acquired.
  9. 前記患者情報受付部は、
    患者を識別する患者識別子と、他の部屋に転送可能か否かを示す転送可否情報とのを１組以上有する患者情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積し、
    前記ベッド判断部は、
    前記病院施設情報および前記患者情報が有する患者の数と転送可否情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断する、またはベッドの空きがある病院の病院識別子を取得する請求項２記載の救急医療支援装置。     The patient information receiving unit
    Receiving patient information having at least one set of patient identifier for identifying a patient and transferability information indicating whether or not transfer to another room is possible, and at least temporarily storing the patient information;
    The bed determination unit
    The number of patients included in the hospital facility information and the patient information and transferability information are used to determine whether or not there is a bed available, or to obtain a hospital identifier of a hospital that has a bed available. The emergency medical support device described.
  10. 患者の転送先の部屋の空きベッドに関する情報である転送先候補施設情報を格納し得る転送先候補施設情報格納部をさらに備え、
    前記ベッド判断部は、
    さらに前記転送先候補施設情報をも用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断する、またはベッドの空きがある病院の病院識別子を取得する請求項９記載の救急医療支援装置。     A transfer destination candidate facility information storage unit capable of storing transfer destination candidate facility information that is information related to an empty bed in a patient transfer destination room;
    The bed determination unit
    The emergency medical support device according to claim 9, further using the transfer destination candidate facility information to determine whether there is a bed available or to obtain a hospital identifier of a hospital with a bed available.
  11. 前記医師等動的情報受付部は、
    １以上の各医師に装着された無線通信装置から、１以上の医師識別子と位置情報との組を１組以上有する医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積し、
    前記医師識別子と位置情報とを表示する、または表示しない領域に関する情報である表示制御情報を格納し得る表示制御情報格納部と、
    前記表示制御情報に従って、表示する領域に居る医師識別子のみ表示する表示部とをさらに備えた請求項１記載の救急医療支援装置。     The dynamic information receiving unit such as the doctor,
    Accepts dynamic information such as a doctor having one or more pairs of one or more doctor identifiers and position information from a wireless communication device worn by one or more doctors, and accumulates at least temporarily;
    A display control information storage unit capable of storing display control information which is information relating to an area where the doctor identifier and position information are displayed or not displayed;
    The emergency medical assistance device according to claim 1, further comprising: a display unit configured to display only a doctor identifier in a display area according to the display control information.
  12. 医師識別子を格納し得る医師識別子格納部と、
    医師の状態を示す状態情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する状態情報受付部と、
    前記医師識別子と前記状態情報とを、無線通信手段により送信する無線送信部とを備えた医師状態管理用端末。     A doctor identifier storage unit capable of storing a doctor identifier;
    A state information receiving unit that receives state information indicating a doctor's state and accumulates at least temporarily;
    A doctor status management terminal comprising a wireless transmission unit that transmits the doctor identifier and the state information by wireless communication means.
  13. 位置情報を取得する位置情報取得部をさらに備え、
    前記無線送信部は、前記医師識別子と前記状態情報と前記位置情報とを、無線通信手段により送信する請求項１２記載の医師状態管理用端末。     A position information acquisition unit for acquiring position information;
    The doctor state management terminal according to claim 12, wherein the wireless transmission unit transmits the doctor identifier, the state information, and the position information by wireless communication means.
  14. 病院の施設に関する情報であり、急患を受け入れる部屋の病床数を少なくとも有する病院施設情報を格納し得る病院施設情報格納部と、患者情報受付部と、医師を識別する１以上の医師識別子を有する医師識別子群を有する医師等静的情報を格納し得る医師等静的情報格納部と、医師等動的情報受付部と、受入要請受信部と、ベッド判断部と、医療チーム判断部と、対応可否送信部とを用いて行われる救急医療支援方法であって、
    前記患者情報受付部が、急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の数を含む患者情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する患者情報受付ステップと、
    前記医師等動的情報受付部が、前記急患を受け入れる部屋を含む、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域に居る１以上の各医師に装着された無線通信装置から、１以上の医師識別子を含む医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する医師等動的情報受付ステップと、
    前記受入要請受信部が、急患の受け入れの要請を示す情報である受入要請を、外部の装置から受信する受入要請受信ステップと、
    前記ベッド判断部が、前記病院施設情報および前記患者情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断するベッド判断ステップと、
    前記医療チーム判断部が、前記受入要請受信ステップで受入要請を受信した場合、前記医師等静的情報および前記医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断する医療チーム判断ステップと、
    前記対応可否送信部が、前記ベッド判断ステップでベッドの空きがあると判断し、かつ、前記医療チーム判断ステップで急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断した場合、対応可能である旨の情報を前記外部の装置に送信する対応可否送信ステップとを備えた救急医療支援方法。     A hospital facility information storage unit that can store hospital facility information that is at least the number of beds in a room that accepts a sudden illness, a patient information reception unit, and a doctor having one or more doctor identifiers that identify a doctor. Statistic information storage unit such as a doctor who can store static information such as a doctor having an identifier group, a dynamic information reception unit such as a doctor, an acceptance request reception unit, a bed determination unit, and a medical team determination unit An emergency medical support method performed using a transmitter,
    The patient information receiving unit receives patient information including the number of patients in a room that accepts a sudden illness, and at least temporarily accumulates patient information receiving step;
    The dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor includes one or more doctor identifiers from wireless communication devices attached to one or more doctors in a region where medical action is performed on an emergency patient, including a room for receiving the emergency patient. Dynamic information receiving step for receiving doctor and other dynamic information, and at least temporarily storing doctor and the like;
    An acceptance request receiving step in which the acceptance request receiving unit receives an acceptance request, which is information indicating a request for accepting an emergency patient, from an external device;
    The bed determining unit uses the hospital facility information and the patient information to determine whether there is a bed available;
    When the medical team determination unit receives an acceptance request in the acceptance request reception step, there is a medical team that can handle an emergency using the static information such as the doctor and the dynamic information such as the doctor. A medical team determination step to determine whether or not,
    If the response determination unit determines that there is a bed available in the bed determination step and determines that there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency in the medical team determination step, the response is possible. An emergency medical support method comprising: a correspondence availability transmission step of transmitting information of the above to the external device.
  15. コンピュータを、
    急患を受け入れる部屋にいる患者の数を含む患者情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する患者情報受付部と、
    前記急患を受け入れる部屋を含む、急患に対して医療行為を行う領域に居る１以上の各医師に装着された無線通信装置から、１以上の医師識別子を含む医師等動的情報を受け付け、少なくとも一時的に蓄積する医師等動的情報受付部と、
    急患の受け入れの要請を示す情報である受入要請を、外部の装置から受信する受入要請受信部と、
    病院施設情報格納部に格納された病院の施設に関する情報であり、急患を受け入れる部屋の病床数を少なくとも有する病院施設情報および前記患者情報とを用いて、ベッドの空きがあるか否かを判断するベッド判断部と、
    前記受入要請受信部が受入要請を受信した場合、医師等静的情報格納部に格納された医師を識別する１以上の医師識別子を有する医師識別子群を有する医師等静的情報および前記医師等動的情報とを用いて、急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在するか否かを判断する医療チーム判断部と、
    前記ベッド判断部がベッドの空きがあると判断し、かつ、前記医療チーム判断部が急患の対応が可能である医療チームが存在すると判断した場合、対応可能である旨の情報を前記外部の装置に送信する対応可否送信部として機能させるためのプログラム。     Computer
    A patient information reception unit that receives patient information including the number of patients in a room that accepts an emergency case, and accumulates at least temporarily; and
    Receiving dynamic information such as a doctor including one or more doctor identifiers from a wireless communication device attached to one or more doctors in an area where medical treatment is performed for the emergency patient, including a room for receiving the emergency patient, and at least temporarily A dynamic information receiving unit such as a doctor that accumulates automatically,
    An acceptance request receiving unit for receiving an acceptance request, which is information indicating a request for accepting an emergency patient, from an external device;
    It is information on hospital facilities stored in the hospital facility information storage unit, and determines whether there is a vacant bed using the hospital facility information having at least the number of beds in a room that accepts emergency cases and the patient information. A bed determination unit;
    When the acceptance request receiving unit receives the acceptance request, the doctor etc. static information having a doctor identifier group having one or more doctor identifiers identifying the doctor stored in the doctor etc. static information storage unit and the doctor etc. A medical team determination unit that determines whether or not there is a medical team capable of handling an emergency using the target information,
    When the bed determination unit determines that there is a vacant bed and the medical team determination unit determines that there is a medical team capable of handling a sudden illness, information indicating that the external device is available A program for functioning as a correspondence transmission / reception transmitting unit that transmits to a computer.
PCT/JP2010/069470 2009-12-03 2010-11-02 Emergency medicine support device, doctor availability-status management-use terminal, emergency medicine support method and program WO2011068005A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2009275075A JP2011118643A (en) 2009-12-03 2009-12-03 Emergency medical treatment support device, doctor state management terminal, emergency medical treatment support method and program
JP2009-275075 2009-12-03

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011068005A1 true WO2011068005A1 (en) 2011-06-09

Family

ID=44114863

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2010/069470 WO2011068005A1 (en) 2009-12-03 2010-11-02 Emergency medicine support device, doctor availability-status management-use terminal, emergency medicine support method and program

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2011118643A (en)
WO (1) WO2011068005A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5518956B2 (en) * 2012-07-31 2014-06-11 沖電気工業株式会社 Work management apparatus, work management method and program
WO2014063007A1 (en) * 2012-10-18 2014-04-24 The Johns Hopkins University Real-time demand capacity and patient throughput management dashboard
EP3486916A1 (en) * 2017-11-20 2019-05-22 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Method and system for localizing a handheld analytical device

Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH05266038A (en) * 1992-03-17 1993-10-15 Fujitsu Ltd Hospital control system applying ic card
JP2002312471A (en) * 2001-04-13 2002-10-25 Teruya:Kk Hospital risk management system using id mouse pendant system
JP2002324190A (en) * 2001-04-26 2002-11-08 Kokusai Kogyo Co Ltd Network system for medical service
JP2002373209A (en) * 2001-06-14 2002-12-26 Hitachi Ltd System managing sickbeds inside hospital
JP2003030320A (en) * 2001-07-19 2003-01-31 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Medical care support system
JP2004171394A (en) * 2002-11-21 2004-06-17 Takanori Terajima Automatic selection device of carrying destination, automatic selection system of carrying destination, invalid database generation device, invalid database retrieval device, and movable body
JP2004199573A (en) * 2002-12-20 2004-07-15 Nec Soft Ltd Medical doctor emergency contact system, method and program
JP2006048573A (en) * 2004-08-09 2006-02-16 Fujitsu Ltd Bed allocation apparatus and bed allocation program
JP2007128245A (en) * 2005-11-02 2007-05-24 Keakomu:Kk First-aid transport support system and its emergency support server
JP2009187167A (en) * 2008-02-05 2009-08-20 Nec Corp Emergency medical care system, apparatus for use in the same, and emergency medical care program

Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH05266038A (en) * 1992-03-17 1993-10-15 Fujitsu Ltd Hospital control system applying ic card
JP2002312471A (en) * 2001-04-13 2002-10-25 Teruya:Kk Hospital risk management system using id mouse pendant system
JP2002324190A (en) * 2001-04-26 2002-11-08 Kokusai Kogyo Co Ltd Network system for medical service
JP2002373209A (en) * 2001-06-14 2002-12-26 Hitachi Ltd System managing sickbeds inside hospital
JP2003030320A (en) * 2001-07-19 2003-01-31 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Medical care support system
JP2004171394A (en) * 2002-11-21 2004-06-17 Takanori Terajima Automatic selection device of carrying destination, automatic selection system of carrying destination, invalid database generation device, invalid database retrieval device, and movable body
JP2004199573A (en) * 2002-12-20 2004-07-15 Nec Soft Ltd Medical doctor emergency contact system, method and program
JP2006048573A (en) * 2004-08-09 2006-02-16 Fujitsu Ltd Bed allocation apparatus and bed allocation program
JP2007128245A (en) * 2005-11-02 2007-05-24 Keakomu:Kk First-aid transport support system and its emergency support server
JP2009187167A (en) * 2008-02-05 2009-08-20 Nec Corp Emergency medical care system, apparatus for use in the same, and emergency medical care program

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2011118643A (en) 2011-06-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7907053B2 (en) Combined locating, tracking and communications system
US7443303B2 (en) System and method for managing workflow
US7323991B1 (en) System and method for locating and communicating with personnel and equipment in a facility
US7099895B2 (en) System and method for performing object association using a location tracking system
US20100217618A1 (en) Event Detection Based on Location Observations and Status Conditions of Healthcare Resources
US20150379441A1 (en) Shared asset management system
US20100001838A1 (en) Automated Association of Patient Care Devices
US10559381B2 (en) Medical system and information notification method
JP2003179546A (en) Method and apparatus for accessing medical resource data
WO2008063936A2 (en) Method and apparatus for managing and locating hospital assets, patients and personnel
US20140195257A1 (en) Method And System For Workflow Modification
US20140195256A1 (en) Workflow Context Aware Location Tracking System And Method
US20130073302A1 (en) System and method for visual display of bed status by integration of location information from ambulance transports
WO2010150031A1 (en) System for locating and registration of mobile units moving in zones defined by access points
JP2016116130A (en) Transmission/reception system
WO2011068005A1 (en) Emergency medicine support device, doctor availability-status management-use terminal, emergency medicine support method and program
JP2009187167A (en) Emergency medical care system, apparatus for use in the same, and emergency medical care program
JP2023077327A (en) Clock-out time determination system, clock-out time determination device and clock-out time determination program
TW202101364A (en) Personal medical information system
US20200066398A1 (en) Nursing Home Bed Reservation
US20210386326A1 (en) System And Method For Live Patient Tracking For Surgical Centers And Hosptials
US20170004259A1 (en) Automatic contextual login using real time locating system information
JP5434032B2 (en) Patient transport destination order determination system, method, and apparatus
US11610671B2 (en) System and method for locating equipment in a healthcare facility
US10034267B2 (en) Method and apparatus for localizing components and/or persons assigned to an image recording scanner in a spatial environment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 10834458

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

DPE2 Request for preliminary examination filed before expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101)
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 10834458

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1